TM 5-682

TECHNICAL MANUAL

FACILITIES ENGINEERING

ELECTRICAL FACILITIES SAFETY

APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE: DISTRIBUTION IS UNLIMITED I

H E A D Q U A R T E R S , D E P A R T M E N T O F T H E A R M Y

SNOVEMBER1999

REPRODUCTION AUTHORILATION/RESTRICTlONS

This manual has been prepared by or for the Government and, except to the extentindicated below, is public property and not subject to copyright.Reprint or republication of this manual should include a credit substantially asfollows: “Department of the Army, TM 5-682, Facilities Engineering, Elect&a1 Fa-cilities Safety, 8 November 1999.”

*TM 5-682

TECHKICAL MANUALNO. 5-682

HEADQUARTERSDEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

W-\SHINCTON, DC, 8 Novembrr 1999

APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE; DISTRIBUTION IS UNLIIMITED

Facilities EngineeringElectrical Facilities Safety

PART 1: BASIC PRACTICES FOR ELECTRICALSAFETY

CHnmn 1. FURPOSE AND AFPLlCABlLlTY

CHArmI 2. CLASSlFlcATlONS AND RESFONS18,LITIES OF ELECTRKAL WORKERSWurker ‘lassifications.~. .. .......... .......... ... .. .. ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........Rqmnsibiiities of workers .......... .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ..........................saiety meehngs~...............................................................~......~..........~~....~.~ ........Safety rule vioiallon penalties .................................................................................

CHAPTER 3. B4SlC PERSONNEL SAFE CVORKiNG PRAmIcESBasic safe working practices ..................................................................................F”“damentab of safety.. .......................................................................................Normaienvironmentalimpac~s.. ............................................................................Hazardous e”YirO”menta, impacts .. ,~, ,,.,,.,,., ... ............................................. ........Electric shock hazards .,.,.,., ....................................................................... ..........Electrical work., .......................................................................... .......................Dc-mergized line work ........................................................................................Safety clearance for de-energized iinr work.. ..................................... ......................General rules for de-energized line work.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Permanent and temporary ground.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...........Cenerai rules on electrical grounding.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Energized line work .. ., .......................... ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPAREL, TOOLS, AND MATERlAL HANDLINGElectrical maintenance support.. ........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Inspection of apparel. to&, and materiais handling equipment.. ..................................Empioyee protection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Office s&t), .......... ., ....................... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Field and shop safety ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Support safety.. .... . . . . . . ...... . . . ............... ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General too, safety.. ........... ............ ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .hlateriairh~ndlingsafety.. ........ ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......Rifiging.. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... ~.,.~.~~~. ........... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .. ~.~,~. ......Heavi’ lifting cquipmrnt ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i\m~iliits~~~~ ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... ...... .. ......Live-line tools, electrical safety took and specialty elwtricai tools.. ......... ...... ........ ,..~ ..

CHnl-rEn 6.

CHXFTER 7.

CHAPTER 9.

APPENLXX A REFERENCES

A,TEND,X B SAMPLE SAFETY EXAMINATION

LNDU

ii

Care and inspection of live-line (hot-line) t0015.. ........................................................Rubber protective equipment ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Elechicni testing devices. ., ................ ,, ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Insulating oil handling operations ............... .. ~, ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ,, ..............

EXTERIOR SYSTEMS

OLrrDOOR S”BSTATIONSSubsta.tionwork.. .......... ~,~. ............ .. .. ........................... .......... .... ................S y s t e m fad11ar1ty.. ................ .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Workareacontrol................. ................... .................. ........................................Saietyruleschecklist.. ............. ~,~ ,,., .... .... .... .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Testing safety rules ...... ... ......................... ., ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........Switching safety rules.. ............. ............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fusing safety de5 .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... .:. .... .... ,, ., ................. ., ....... ~., .............Energy-storing protective device safety ru!ez.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Instrumrnt transiormer safety ruies.. ........................ ..... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Power transiormer and regulator safety Nk.. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Metalclad switchgear i&y ruies.. ....... ............ ................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Network prutector saiq n&s.. ...... ..... ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .storage battery saiety rules ............... ...... .,,.,, ..................... ..................................Safety requirements far phasing or connecting oi cirwits.. .. ..... ..............................

OVERHEAD LINES AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTSAerialiinework.. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................Pole handling operations.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pole installation requirements.. .... .. ................ .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Climbing and working an poles.. ...... ,~. .......... ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pole climbing equipment.. ...... .. ....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pole climbing and work prccauhans ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Crossing StT”Ct”reS.. .. .. .... .. ............ .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stringing or removing de-energized conductors ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Energized line work ............. .......... ... ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............................street lighting., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.,.,,, .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................Working on or around pie-mounted equipment.. ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Aerial rope use.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. ................. .. .......................................Too, use .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Artid lifts and insulated buckets .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Aerial cable heating material requiremenrs.. ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tree trimming and brush remwai ...................... .... ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UNDERCROUND CABLES, STRUCIURES, AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRICALCOMPONENTS

Underground work.. .. ..... ........... .....................................................................Work area protection.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ,, ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Existing obstruction protection ................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Preparation for work in underground S~UC~IJUT~S .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Work inside underground sbructurcs .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Heating materidS.. ..... . . .. . .. ......... .... ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INTERIOR SYSTEMS

MEDIUWVOLTACE SYSTEMSInterior medium-voltage work ....................... ................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Medium-voltage safety background ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............Motion hazard.. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Working an indoor equipment.. ................. ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LOW-VOLTAGE SYSTEMSInterior low-voltage work ................. ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Low-voltage saiety background ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Review of iow-voltage work precautions, ....... ..... ., .... ......... .......... . . . . . . . . . . .........

6-1 6-16-2 6-16-3 6-36-4 6-56-5 6-66-6 6-86-7 6-96-8 6-96-9 6-126-10 6-E6-11 6-166-12 6-E6-13 6-196-14 6-196-15 6-Z6-16 6-22

7-67-9

6-16-Z7 - l7-2

LIST OF FIGURIS

Ti tlr

Phasing check using hot-line stick and phasing testers.. ................. ............... .. .......... ........ ~, ...........Phasing check using voltage transiomer and wltmeter.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sampie oi a completed Safety Clearance Order, DA Form 5X-R.. ... ..... ........... .................... ..........Sample oi a completed Caution Order. DA Form 7407-R.. ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..............DangerTag, DAForm.7108.. ........... ..... .. ...... .. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....................................CautionTag,DAFormj140.. ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~,.~~~.~.~,~ ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~,~,~. ....... ... ..Craundingpath.. ....................... ............. .. .. ................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .............................Correctliftinginsrruction= .................................... ............. ~~~~,~~~~~.~ ..............................................Pikepoiemethod.. ............. ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... ..Winchlinrmethud.. ............... ..... ............. ...................... ...... ...................................................Stepsinremovingamanholecover.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... ................. ....Sailmrthodofmanholeventilallon.. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...................................... ......... .......

Tilk

OSHA permissible noise exposures.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .U.S. quideline on electric and magnetic field exposures.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... ~~~,~~. ...........................,RPA guideline on electric and magnetic iield rxposurre.. .............. .....................................................ACCIH guideline on electric and magnetic field exposures ior pacemakers ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .........United Kingdom guideline on electric and magnetic field exposures.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Recommended grounding cable sizes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Minimum safe working distances. ..... ~, ,, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..Minimum safe approach distances.. ................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Protective equipment voltage dasses.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Energized line work methods ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Approximate safe working loads of new three-strand fiber ropes used in a straight puli.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Moisture regain oi fiber ropes ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Average size of crew required to raise poles of different lengths by piking.. ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pu*e

3-73 - i3-113-E3-133-134-84-u6-j6-4i-47-6

P**c

3-33-63-63-63-63-213-x3-243-253-254-E4-C6-3

iii

TM 5–682TM 5–682TM 5–682TM 5–682TM 5–682

1–11–11–11–11–1

PART ONE

BASIC PRACTICES FOR ELECTRICAL SAFETY

CHAPTER 1

PURPOSE AND APPLICABILITY

1–1. PurposeThe purpose of this manual is to provide basic safetyrules and instructions pertinent to electrical workin order to assist electrical workers in eliminatingsituations, practices and actions which can result inaccidents to personnel and property. Safety hazardsexist in any workplace. The risks of injury from un-safe handling of energy from electrical systems haveincreased considerably in the past few decades fropersonnel involved in operating and maintainingelectrical facilities. This safety manual was devel-oped to meet the need for consistent and effectivesafety standards for electrical workers.

a. Accident prevention. Accidents do not justhappen. Accidents are normally caused by the care-less and thoughtless acts of workers. Using damagedtools or unsafe equipment or working inside unpro-tected environments are the main causes of accidents.Accident prevention is the responsibility of all work-ers. Your own safety, your co-workers’ safety, and yourcommunity’s safety depend upon your safe workingpractices, safe working procedures, and good personalprotection.

b. Safe working practices. A copy of this safetymanual will be given to each electrical worker. Eachworker will be required to learn and become accus-tomed to the safe working practises recommendedin this manual. Supervisors and foremen have theresponsibilities to interpret the safety rules listed inthe manual to their workers. A comprehensive testwill be given to each worker. Any worker who fails tomake a passing grade on the test will be restrictedin the type of work permitted.

c. Safe working procedures. A working proce-dure must be prepared by the appropriate supervi-sor or foreman for each job. It includes the detailedinstructions on how the job needs to be done. Theworker has the responsibilities to follow the instruc-tions in the procedure carefully step by step. How-ever, the workers have the right to discuss the work-ing procedures with their supervisor or foreman incase where they feel that the instructions are notclear or where safety is not adequate.

d. Personal protections. All electrical workersare required to use appropriate protective equipmentsuch as hard hats, rubber gloves, gas masks, andgoggles when exercising their jobs. Workers must alsolearn how to visually inspect and test their personalprotective equipment. All unsafe protective equip-ment must be isolated, tagged, repaired, or discarded.

e. Training. All electrical workers must betrained, certified, and current in American Red Crossor American Heart Association cardiopulmonary re-suscitation (CPR) and first aid.

1–2. ApplicabilityThis manual is applicable to all U.S. Army facilitiesengineering electrical workers including military andcivilian. Where the working conditions or job require-ments are not covered by this manual, appropriatereferences listed in appendix A will apply.

a. Mandatory. The safety rules in this manualare mandatory for all U.S. Army electrical workers,including supervisors, foremen, linemen, and othercrew members. Electrical workers have the right toask questions if the safety instructions are not ad-equate or clear. Supervisors and foremen have theduty to interpret the safety rules for their workers.Supervisors and foremen will discuss the safety rulesand procedures with his/her crew when it is neces-sary.

b. Emergency conditions. Under emergency con-ditions, supervisors and foremen may alter somesafety procedures. However, they should discuss thealternative procedures with their workers and shouldbe present at the scene all the time. Workers are notallowed to perform any work that they are not quali-fied for or where their personal protection is not ad-equate.

c. Documentation. Whenever a safety procedureis altered, an emergency written report should beprepared and documented. The report will describethe alternative method and the personal protectionused for the job.

TM 5–682TM 5–682TM 5–682TM 5–682TM 5–682

1–21–21–21–21–2

1–3. References.Required and related publication and proscribedforms are listed in appendix A.

TM 5–682TM 5–682TM 5–682TM 5–682TM 5–682

1–31–31–31–31–3

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

2–12–12–12–12–1

2-1. Workers’ classificationsWorkers’ classifications are based on the training,experience, and the quality of services they provided.No workers are allowed to do any work of a higherrated classification than that for which they havequalified. However, workers can do work in a lowerclassification when, in the opinion of the supervisoror foreman, such assignment is practical and eco-nomical.

a. Laborer. A laborer works only on the ground.Such work as clearing rights-of-way, digging poleholes, aligning poles, and similar duties. A laborercannot work as attendant of a wire reel, handle inany manner conductors being pulled in near otherenergized conductors, or guide the butt of a pole be-ing set in an energized line. No experience and train-ing are required for a laborer.

b. Groundman. This classification requires a pe-riod of employment of at least 12 months.

(1) First 6 months of employment. During thefirst 6 months of employment, the groundmancan work only on the ground under the direc-tion of the foreman in charge. The groundmanmust become acquainted with the tools requiredby linemen as well as all materials necessary inline construction. The methods of making up thevarious assemblies, such as down guys, deadends, and single and double crossarms must belearned. A groundman should observe closely theworking methods of linemen on poles and struc-tures, and assist them from the ground as theydirect with the exception that he/she must notact as attendant of a wire reel, handle in anymanner conductors being pulled in near otherenergized conductors, or guide the butt of a polebeing set in an energized line. A groundmanshould diligently study this manual and themethods of handling the various jobs. At theclose of the first 6-month period, after passingan examination on the contents of this manual,and at the direction of the foreman, the workermay be taught to climb.

(2) Second 6 months of employment or longer.After 6 months the groundman is allowed to work onde-energized equipment while learning to climb.However, no groundman is authorized to do any workthat requires climbing. The groundman must learn

CHAPTER 2

CLASSIFICATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF ELECTRICAL WORKERS

the proper work methods from the foreman and fol-low exactly all instructions given by the foreman.This manual and other references listed in appendixA must be studied and applied diligently during thisperiod.

(3) After a full a full year of employment or longer.After a full year of employment or longer, agroundman can become a candidate for promotion tolineman-C. However, the worker must take a higherlevel examination on the safety and methods of workpertaining to the facilities involved. If the candidatepasses the examination, he/she could be advancedfor promotion to lineman-C.

c. Lineman-C (or Junior Apprentice Lineman, MOS52EU4 or MOS 52G). This classification requires aperiod of employment of at least 12 months.

(1) First 6 months. During the first 6 months alineman-C is not allowed to do any work that requiresclimbing or working on energized conductors orequipment of more than 600 volts root mean square(RMS).

(2) Second 6 months or longer. A lineman-Chaving 12 months climbing experience ( 6 months asa groundman and 6 months as a lineman-C) may beallowed to do the following work:

(a) A lineman-C is allowed to work above en-ergized circuits or on energized circuits on straightpole lines not exceeding 5,000 volts between con-ductors. However, before doing this work, the line-man-C must be judged capable of doing the jobsafely and must be assisted by a higher class line-man on the same pole. The more experienced line-man must supervise the handling of energized con-ductors. During the apprenticeship period, the line-man-C must learn all of the different circuits, thevoltage each carries, and their relative positionson the poles and crossarms.

(b) A qualified lineman-C, with supervisorapproval, may gain additional knowledge of live-line tools work by assisting in installing live-line tools and raising and lowering conductorsin place, if accompanied on the same pole by alineman-A. The lineman-C may be allowed toreplace transformer fuses and tap-line fuses ofany voltage using a hot line stick or fuse puller.Handling energized jumpers or untying and ty-

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

2–22–22–22–22–2

ing in conductors is not permitted. This workmust be done by a lineman-A. The lineman-Cwill not be advanced to new or more hazardousduties until the foreman is satisfied with theworker's overall progress and ability to handle suchduties.

(3) After a full year of employment or more.After a full year of employment or more, and after athorough examination on this safety manual and themethods of work pertaining to the facilities involved,a lineman-C is qualified for-promotion to lineman-Bif suitable progress has been made.

d. Lineman-B (or Senior Apprentice Lineman).This classification covers a period of at least 12months employment.

(1) A lineman-B should be able to do all workthat is required of a lineman-C. A lineman-B workermay work above energized distribution circuits re-gardless of voltage. A lineman-B may be permittedto transfer corner poles (ordinary type) when assistedby a foreman or lineman-A. However, this shouldnot be taken as approval to work on any or all cornerpoles carrying lines not exceeding 5,000 volts betweenconductors. Ordinary corner poles are usually freeof the major hazards that exist on the heavier loadedand more congested poles which are the responsibil-ity of the lineman-A. During this service period alineman-B should be permitted to assist in the useof live-line maintenance tools when the other workeron the job is a lineman-A. Only one lineman-B mayactually handle energized conductors on one poleduring this service period.

(2) After serving at least one full year and af-ter a thorough examination on this safety manualand the methods of work pertaining to the facilitiesinvolved, a lineman-B is qualified for promotion tolineman-A if suitable progress has been made.

e. Lineman-A (or Journeyman). Only the most skill-ful and experienced linemen are to be classed in thegrade of lineman-A. A lineman-A must have not lessthan ~e years experience before being advanced tothis classification. A lineman-A is expected to be ableto perform all duties of an electrical supervisor or aforeman. The advanced position of lineman-A car-ries with it the responsibility of helping to train theless experienced workers who are assigned to workon the job. The lineman-A should be capable of su-pervising the work of any part of the crew or eventhe entire crew when delegated to do so.

f. Foreman. A foreman is the head of a lineman'screw. A foreman must have not less than 3 years of

experience on work pertaining to the facilities in-volved and 1 year experience in coaching. The fore-man should be able to direct, control, and assign suit-able workers to each electrical job. He/she should alsobe able to issue detailed instructions for each job.He/she should enforce his/her employees to apply thesafety rules seriously.

g. Troubleman. No one rated lower than a line-man-B is permitted to work as a troubleman. Thelimitations of the work for a troubleman are the sameas those outlined in subparagraphs d and e above,depending upon the troubleman equivalent ratingas a lineman (lineman-B or lineman-A).

h. Patrolman. No one rated lower than a line-man-B can be assigned to work as a patrolman. Thelimitations of work for a patrolman are the same asthose outlined in subparagraphs d and e above, de-pending upon the patrolman’s equivalent rating asa lineman (lineman-B or lineman-A). A patrolman istasked with patrolling and inspection of lines andelectrical components such as power transformers,capacitors, and circuit breakers to determinewhether, how much, and when maintenance is re-quired. A patrolman must be particularly careful withlighted cigarettes, cigars, matches, and pipe asheswhich may cause fires during tasking. A patrolmanshould also be extremely cautious to avoid injury fromfences, briars, swollen streams, and animals. A pa-trolman should be provided with a pair of boots anda standard snake-bite kit.

i. Inside wireman. An inside wireman requires 2years of study to master the complexities of the Na-tional Electric Code (NEC) and of control circuitry.Special training courses by outside educational agen-cies may be necessary to ensure that qualificationsfor servicing complex equipment have been met byan inside wireman. An inside wireman dealing withmedium voltage circuits must have qualified as a line-man-A. For low voltage circuits, an inside wiremanmust have qualified as a lineman-C.

2-2. Responsibilities of workersResponsibilities are the duties that an employee mustbe accountable for within his/her power and control.

a. Supervisors. Supervisors are persons who arein charge overall of electrical maintenance and op-eration. Supervisor's responsibilities include—

(1) Selecting suitable workers for the job re-quired.

(2) Selecting a competent worker as the leaderof each crew.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

2–32–32–32–32–3

(3) Being responsible for the safety of his/herworkers.

(4) Providing orientation to new workers. Ori-entation would include work schedules, safety workprocedures, personal safety, safety of co-workers,safety in work places, safety in public environment,first aid, emergency and local hospitals, accident re-ports, and safety reports.

(5) Developing a job description and trainingprogram for each new worker.

(6) Issuing a copy of this safety manual to eachnew worker. Each new worker will be required totake an examination on this safety-manual. Anyworker failing to make a passing grade will be re-stricted in his/her works.

(7) Interpreting the safety rules to his/herworkers when asked.

(8) Testing the workers on safety issues.

(9) Issuing work orders and instructions to theforeman who in turn will issue orders and instruc-tions to his/her employees.

(10) Conducting safety meetings to explain, re-view and upgrade safe working conditions, proce-dures, and discuss lessons learned.

(11) Asking the workers to stop work immedi-ately if unsafe working conditions are found or whenthe workers are inadequate for the job due to sick-ness or lack of training.

(12) Reviewing all unsafe working reports andaccident reports, analyzing the situations, and solv-ing the problems as soon as possible.

(13) Coordinating with the supplied utilitiesand other agencies for the shut-down of the powersystems for routine maintenance or repairs.

b. Foremen. Foremen will be in charge of the safetyand performance of the workers directly under theirsupervision. Foremen's responsibilities include:

(1) Coordinating with his/her supervisor andother crew's leaders.

(2) Reporting immediately to his/her supervi-sor all unsafe situations, working conditions, proce-dures, equipment, tools, and machinery.

(3) Being directly in charge of his/her crew.

That would include—assigning work to his/her work-ers, providing safety equipment and detailed instruc-tions pertaining to each job, safety planning, directcoaching, and quality controlling.

(4) Being responsible for the safety of his/hercrew. Asking his/her crew to stop work immediatelyand leave the area when a dangerous situation isfound.

(5) Discharging immediately any worker whois suspected to be under the influence of drugs, alco-hol, or mental illness.

(6) Providing new workers proper training.That would include: proper working methods, goodshop/housekeeping, safe working practices, first-aidtreatment, resuscitation, emergency calls, safety re-ports, accident reports, and inspecting/using/testing/maintaining personal protective devices, tools, andequipment.

(7) Assigning qualified worker in the crew tocoach new workers.

(8) Ensuring that the workers in his/her creware physically able to do the work assigned. Anyworker who appears to be sick or unfit for work willbe relieved from all duties and not allowed to returnto work until fully recovered.

(9 ) Conducting meetings to interpret thesafety rules and working procedures in detail to his/her workers.

(10) Remaining at the Job site for direct coach-ing and controlling as long as his/her crew is per-forming a job on energized lines' equipment, or ap-paratus.

(11) Preventing unauthorized persons from ap-proaching places where work is being done by theplacing of barricades, hole covers, warning signs,flags, red lanterns, and other means of protectingthe public.

(12) Taking necessary steps to correct the de-fective lines, equipment or apparatus.

(13) Avoiding engaging in the actual work ex-cept where the crew is small or, in emergencies, whenit becomes necessary to take an active part in thework.

c. Crew members. Crew members include all elec-trical and non-electrical workers. They have the re-sponsibility to learn and apply all the safety rules

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

2–42–42–42–42–4

listed in this manual. Other responsibilities of crewmembers are as follows:

(1) Observing carefully all instructions givenby their appropriate supervisors or foremen for eachjob.

(2) Understanding clearly what needs to bedone and how to accomplish the job.

(3) Being responsible for their acts. Carelessand uncontrollable acts are unacceptable. Smokingis allowed in permitted areas only. Taking drugs ordrinking intoxicants while on duty is prohibited.

(4) Applying safe working practices. Safety pro-cedures and precautions , must be taken at all times.When working in a group, a worker must notify his/her co-worker what the worker is planning to do, suchas before energizing or de-energizing a circuit.

(5) Reporting immediately to their supervisorsor foremen all unsafe situations found in the electri-cal distribution systems, working places, or publicareas.

(6) Stopping work immediately if they feel un-able to handle the job because of their health condi-tion, weather, hazardous location or situation.

(7) Taking charge of their own safety, their co-workers' safety, and their environmental publicsafety.

(8) Learning how to react when an accident oc-curs (First hid treatment, resuscitation, victim han-dling, and emergency calling).

(9) Refusing to work when they feel unqualifiedfor the job.

(10) Keeping the vehicles, tools, equipment, andworking place always clean, safe, orderly, and readyfor use at all times.

d. All workers. The following responsibilities arefor all workers, including supervisors, foremen, andall crew members.

(1) Accident prevention. Accident preventionis the most important action in which all workersmust participate. This includes—

(a) Good shop/housekeeping. Keeping floors,steps, walkways, driveways, aisles, stairways andexit routes always clean and clear of obstacles, blocks,and slippery matter. Keeping exit lights always on

and complying with National Fire Protection Asso-ciation (NFPA) 101 requirements. Keeping exit doorsunlocked from the inside and free of rust and all kindsof obstructions. Removing snow and ice from the out-door walkways, driveways, stairways, and steps.Placing tools and equipment in a safe and secureposition upon completion or suspension of work. Plac-ing small parts in containers when dismantlingequipment. Keeping tools in chests or convenientracks when not in use or storing them where theywill not create hazards. Removing stacked materi-als from walkways, driveways, aisles, stairways, andexit routes unless barricades are erected. Not exceed-ing safe floor loadings, nor placing material on oragainst any support unless it is known that it cancarry the additional weight. Stacking material so thatit cannot be overturned easily. Watching the stock-piling: inspecting for stability and for objects whichmay fall or be dislodged. Fastening the stacked ma-terial securely when needed. Using suitable racksfor storing pipe, piling, and other materials whichcannot be readily formed into stable stacks. Placingtimbers and other heavy objects on suitable blocksor sleepers to ensure necessary hand holds. Stack-ing wire reels with three strips of wood between reels.Not leaving nails projecting from boards or wallswhere they may cause personal injury. Not remov-ing materials from packing cases or removing con-crete forms without removing all projecting nails.

(b) Safe working areas. Before starting anyelectrical work, the following safety checks must bemade for all working areas. Area must be clean andfree of all slippery materials. Accessible routes foremergency exit must be available. All obstacles mustbe removed. All unsafe situations must be fixed, suchas unstable platforms where the workers stand, loos-ened electrical parts, and uncovered energized lines.Illumination should be adequate. Working spaceclearance must be sufficient. Warning equipmentsuch as barriers, traffic cones, and warning signsmust be located. Unsafe personal apparel such asneckties, jewelry, and watches must be removed.

(2) Fire prevention and protection. This is theduty for all workers, including supervisors, foremen,and all crew members.

(a) Fire prevention. Workers must not smokewhere smoking constitutes a fire hazard. Workersmust not accumulate combustible materials, sincethey create fire hazards. Material will be depositedin metal containers; containers must be emptied atthe end of each day and the contents disposed of insuch a way as not to create a fire hazard. Soiled ragsmust not be kept in lockers. Rubbish or waste mustnot be burned within 50 feet of a combustible struc-

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

2–52–52–52–52–5

ture, or within 5 feet of any building. In burningwaste and rubbish, heavy smoke must not be allowedto blow into energized equipment. No burning willbe done out-of-doors during high winds. Local civillaws banning open fires will be obeyed. Weeds orother rank vegetation must not be permitted to growin substation yards or pole yards, around oil tanksor other structures, or near buildings.

(b) Fire protection. Fire protection includes firedetection and fire extinguishing equipment. All firedetection devices such as smoke detectors, heat de-tectors, and fire alarm systems should be physicallychecked and in good operating condition monthly andshould be tested the manufacturers instructions ev-ery 6 months. Appropriate types of extinguishingequipment must be used for each location, depend-ing on the classes of fires and material stored at thelocation. There are three main classes of fires (seeNFPA 10). Class A involves normal combustible ma-terial such as wood and paper. Extinguishing agentsfor class A fires include water, soda-acid, and multi-purpose dry chemicals. Class B involves oils and flam-mable liquids. Extinguishing agents for class B firesinclude CO2, and dry chemicals. Class C involves elec-trical equipment. Extinguishing agents for class Cfires include CO2 and dry chemicals. The extinguish-ing agents Halon 1301 and Halon 1211 are being re-placed with either CO2 or dry chemical and are suit-able for combating both Class B and Class C fires,especially at indoor locations. These two Halonagents are slightly toxic in low concentrations (lessthan 5 percent). Concentrations above 15 percent willcause unconsciousness in a short period of time.Therefore, when these extinguishing agents are usedprecautionary measures similar to those for toxicagents in a confined spaces should be employed.Workers should not enter confined spaces after us-ing CO2 or other toxic extinguishers until areas havebeen thoroughly ventilated. Carbon tetrachloride fireextinguishers should not be used because they areextremely toxic. Fire extinguishing equipment mustbe inspected NFPA 10.

(3) Accident reporting. Upon the occurrenceof the accident, the worker involved in the accidentmust immediately inform his/her supervisor.

(a) Job related injury report. If the accidentresults in either injury to personnel or damage toproperty, the worker must prepare a written reportdescribing in detail the circumstances of the accident,personnel involved, injured personnel, damagedproperties, and problems caused by the accident. Thereport must be completed within 24 hours after theaccident. In addition, the worker must fully cooper-ate with the authorities who conduct the investiga-

tion of the accident. All items involved in the acci-dent should be identified as evidence and preserveduntil after the investigation has been completed.

(b) Vehicle/equipment accident report. Theworker involved in the accident should verbally in-form his/her supervisor immediately after the occur-rence of the accident. The worker should also pro-vide a written report describing in detail the circum-stances of the accident and the extent of the damagewithin 5 days of occurrence. If the accident causesinjuries to the worker or other persons, then the jobrelated injury report described in paragraph 2-2d(3)aabove should be applied. The worker should also com-ply with all local and state traffic laws when required.

(c) Misuse of authorization report. No workercan be assigned to do any work of a higher rated clas-sification. However, the worker can be assigned todo any work in a lower classification when, in theopinion of the supervisor or foreman, such assign-ment is practical and economical. It is the responsi-bilities of the worker to report to his/her supervisorany misusage or abuse of authorization.

2-3. Safety meetingsSafety meetings consist of scheduled meetings andspecial meetings for specific jobs.

a. Scheduled meetings. Scheduled safety meetingsshould be held at least once a month. The supervisorwill personally conduct these meetings. However, theleader of a crew may also be assigned the chairman-ship duties on a rotational basis. Topics of discus-sion include—

(1) Two or three safety rules from this manual,using the manual as a textbook, until completed.Then, starting over again.

(2) Safety rules, methods, and hazards con-nected with the work in progress .

(3) Lessons learned. Discussion of any acci-dents that may have occurred recently.

(4) Safe driving.

(5) Accident reports, safety bulletins, posters,and other material -furnished by the installationsafety director.

(6) Safe use of motorized equipment.

(7) Working on underground lines.

(8) Working on or near machinery.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

2–62–62–62–62–6

(9) Working in elevated positions.

(10) Grounding systems.

(11) First aid. Practicing various methods ofartificial resuscitation: cardiopulmonary resuscita-tion (CPR), chest pressure-arm lift (Silvester), andmouth-to-mouth artificial respiration. Red Cross orAmerican Heart Association certification is requiredfor all workers.

b. Special meetings. Special meetings are normallyheld by the supervisor or leader of a crew before be-ginning a particularly difficult job. All details of thejob and difficulties will be discussed. Crew membersmust understand the precautions to be observed andthe procedures to be followed. Members must under-stand what needs to be done, and know how to ac-complish the job. They should be aware of the safetyhazards, and learn how to eliminate the hazards byusing specific safety equipment such as groundingequipment and protective measures such as bodyprotective devices. Posters, pictures, diagrams andother aids may be used in conducting the meetings.Written work procedures should be prepared for com-plicated activities which involve access to locationswhere the electricity cannot be de-energized.

2–4 Safety rule violation penaltiesAny worker who fails to observe the safety rules inthis manual will be subject to penalties. The sever-ity of the penalty will be related to the seriousnessof any previous offenses.

a. First offense.

(1) Verbal reprimand.

(2) Called off the job to study safety rules. +:

(3) Discharge (Applicable to cases of deliber-ate or willful failure to observe any written regula-tions where safety of persons and/or property is en-dangered thereby).

b. Second offense.

(1) Official reprimand.

(2) Lay off without pay, 1 day.

(3) Discharge.

c. Third offense. Discharge.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–13–13–13–13–1

3-1. Basic safe working practicesBasic safe working practices require that the workerbe in good health, not under the influence of drugsor alcohol, free of major emotional, psychological, andfinancial problems, familiar with the fundamentalsof Safety, familiar with equipment and tool use, wellprepared for each job, and always alert and respon-sible for his/her acts.

3-2. Fundamentals of safetyThe fundamentals of safety include accident preven-tion and hazardous work elimination.

a. Accident prevention. ACCIDENTS DO NOT“JUST HAPPEN”—Accidents are the result of un-safe acts, unsafe conditions, or both.

(1) Unsafe acts, which cause almost 9 out ofevery 10 accidents, include—

(a) Operating without authority or warning,such as opening or closing switches, circuit breakersor reclosers without permission; operating hoists,trucks, or other motor-operated devices without giv-ing a proper warning; failure to place warning signsor guards or to give signals where needed; and viola-tion of “red tagging” rules.

(b) Making safety devices inoperative unnec-essarily or without an adequate reason, such as re-moving guards, using oversize fuses, and blockingprotective devices.

(c) Using unsafe equipment or using equip-ment improperly, such as using tools and chisels thatare damaged, using pipe extensions on wrenches notdesigned for them, using the wrong tools for the job,and using your hands instead of hand tools.

(d) Unsafe loading or placing objects, suchas carrying or lifting heavy loads, placing objectswhere they are likely to fall, unstable packing ofloads, and failure to block or guard equipmentagainst unexpected movements.

(e) Taking unsafe positions, such as work-ing or lifting from an improper position; casualwalking under suspended loads, through hazard-ous work areas, or close to openings; entering ar-eas contaminated by gases or fumes without tak-ing proper precautions; and riding in unsafe loca-tions in or on motor vehicles.

CHAPTER 3CHAPTER 3CHAPTER 3CHAPTER 3CHAPTER 3BASIC PERSONNEL SAFE WORKING PRACTICESBASIC PERSONNEL SAFE WORKING PRACTICESBASIC PERSONNEL SAFE WORKING PRACTICESBASIC PERSONNEL SAFE WORKING PRACTICESBASIC PERSONNEL SAFE WORKING PRACTICES

(f) Working near live equipment, moving machin-ery, apparatus, or moving parts thereof, without observ-ing prescribed safety precautions or regulations, or with-out using required protective devices and equipment.

(g) Distracting or startling acts, such as prac-tical joking, horseplay, teasing, quarreling, and an-noying behavior.

(h) Failure to use personal protective equip-ment or safe clothing, such as rubber gloves, aprons,and leggings where required.

(2) Unsafe conditions, include—

(a) Lack of shields or guards and unbarricadedfloor openings or excavations.

(b) Insufficient warning signs, inadequateguards for the job, makeshift barriers, and “red tags”:not properly applied.

(c) Defective material or equipment, such asbroken pieces, stripped threads, split handles, anddamaged tools.

(d) Hazardous arrangements, resulting frompoor housekeeping or lack of planning.

(e) Unsafe personal apparel, such as neck-ties, jewelry, and loose sleeves, when worn near mov-ing machinery.

(f) Improper illumination or inadequate ven-tilation when working in a manhole or utility room.

b. Hazardous work elimination. Hazardouswork can be eliminated when workers are instilledwith the habit of being cautious:

(1) Do not begin work around energized ma-chinery or equipment or at any place where a haz-ard exists until adequate lighting and all propersafety measures are provided. When finished, dis-connect and remove all extension power cords. Neverleave extension cords which are not in use.

(2) Place DANGER signs where conditions re-quire their use.

(3) Remove DANGER signs from places wherethe danger no longer exists; do not use such signsunnecessarily.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–23–23–23–23–2

(4) Inspect all tools and equipment before us-ing them and report promptly any defect noticed.

(5) Never work so closely to fellow workers thatthey may be endangered by swinging picks, shovels,or similar tools.

(6) Use nail pullers when removing nails fromboxes or crates.

(7) Do not use files without proper handles.

(8) Use cribbing or other approved means tosupport objects raised above a working position. Donot depend upon a lifting jack for support.

(9) Do not stand or allow others to stand nearropes or cables under strain.

(10) Stop portable gasoline engines or electricmotors propelling equipment such as concrete mix-ers, compressors, pumps, blowers, and cranes, be-fore refueling, greasing, oiling, or repairing.

(11) When burning insulation off scrap wire:

(a) Use an incinerator, if available. If an in-cinerator is not available, burning should be done inthe open away from buildings and flammable mate-rial. Obey local civil laws regarding open fires.

(b) Use iron forks to handle wire.

(c) Let the fire burn out before removing thewire.

(12) Report promptly and establish guards overany hazardous condition which might cause injury,property damage, or interference with electric ser-vices. This includes all hazards, such as fallen wires,open holes or ditches, and broken poles or crossarms.

(13) Keep away from dangerous places unlessthe work requires you to be there.

(14) Treat all electric wires and apparatus asdangerous and do not touch such equipment unlessyou are qualified and authorized to handle such work.

(15) Do not install fuses which are of an im-proper type or capacity.

(16) Do not operate portable electric hand drills,hand grinders, hand buffing wheels, or other simi-lar equipment unless the motor casing is effectivelygrounded or the tool is properly labeled as “doubleinsulated.”

(17) Casings of electric motors mounted on workbenches or mounted on metal bases fastened to con-crete, wood, or metal floors must be effectivelygrounded before operation.

(18) Do not remove broken light bulbs whileworking inside tanks, heaters, boilers, and other suchenclosed spaces unless the cord is disconnected fromthe supply outlet. Empty sockets are not permittedin such places.

(19) After a natural disaster such as flood, fire,tornado, hurricane or earthquake all electrical com-ponents and devices such as switchgear, circuitbreakers, fuses, transformers, reclosers, generators,electric machines, electric equipment and electriccircuits must be checked and tested by professionalsbefore re-energizing.

(20) Before starting an electrical job the work-ing areas must be checked for safety. Accessibleroutes for emergency entrance and exit should beavailable. All obstacles must be removed and all un-safe situations must be fixed before job can be started.Unsafe personal apparel such as neckties, jewelry,watches, and loose clothes should not be worn. Per-sonal protective devices such as safety gloves, rub-ber blankets, hot sticks, goggles should be availableand ready for use. The workplace must be protectedfrom unauthorized access and unforeseen accidentsby one of the following means:

(a) Warning equipment. Adequate barriers,warning signs, traffic cones, and lights must be lo-cated on approaches to and at the work areas, exca-vations, open manholes, parked equipment; and otherhazards. Special precautions must be taken for anyareas where reduced visibility occurs such as nightoperations or in fog. Warning devices must be re-moved when the work is completed.

(b) Flagmen. Flagmen are necessary whenwarning devices are not adequate such as in trafficcontrol. Flagmen must wear safety warning vests,operate two-way radios and carry warning signs fortheir protection and work area protection.

3-3. Normal environmental impactsThe environment may cause impacts on the work tobe performed and potential health hazards for work-ers when careless or lack of site preparation exists.

a. Working in elevated positions. A safety ropeshould be used to attach to the worker's body whenhe/she is in an elevated position. To prevent the pos-sibility of dropping materials or tools from the el-evated position onto people underneath, appropri-

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–33–33–33–33–3

ate signs and guards must be used to keep peopleaway. The supporting platforms for workers, tools,and materials must be strong and balanced for theloads they carry to prevent the risk of breaking orfalling.

b. Working in confined spaces. A confined spaceis an enclosed space with restricted access and in-sufficient ventilation such as vaults, manholes, ortanks. Insufficient ventilation can result in danger-ous air contamination and an oxygen deficient at-mosphere. Dangerous air contamination resultswhen there is a flammable gas or vapor exceeding10 percent of its lower explosive limit. An oxygendeficient atmosphere contains less than 19.5 percentoxygen by volume.

(1) Before entering into a confined space. Priorto entering a confined space, the atmosphere will betested by qualified personnel to determine its safetyusing approved combustion gas/oxygen detectors andrecording the results. Where tests indicate an unsafeatmosphere, forced ventilation will be provided and nowork will be started until safety has been assured byadditional tests. An adequate continuous supply of airwill be provided while work is being done.

(2) Emergency case. Entry may be made intoa confined space with an unsafe atmosphere if re-quired in an emergency but only if the worker is us-ing a supplied air respirator or gas mask if there isadequate oxygen. Always use a safety lifeline andhave a second worker standing by when an emer-gency entry is made.

(3) Safety protection. When working in a con-fined space that contains exposed energized parts, aworker must use protective shields, protective bar-riers, and insulating materials as necessary to avoidinadvertent contact with these parts. Doors, hingedpanels, and the like should be secured to preventcontact with exposed energized parts.

c. Working in noisy areas. Protection against theeffects of noise exposure should be provided for facil-ity workers whenever the noise level exceeds thepermissible limits shown in table 3-1.

(1) Noise level equivalents. As a rule ofthumb, for a normal conversation that can be heardat about 2 feet (0.6 meters) distance, the noise levelis probably less than 90 decibels, the point at whichprolonged exposure can cause a gradual decay inhearing ability. Noise which is similar to the soundof firing from a rifle or shotgun is considered as animpulse type when maximum variation in sound levelexceeds 1 second.

(2) Occupational Safety and Health Adminis-tration (OSHA) requirements. Table 3-1 providesthe permissible noise exposure expressed in decibels(for sound levels) versus hours (for time duration).Exceeding these limits, OSHA requires that engineer-ing noise controls, administrative controls, or per-sonal hearing protective equipment be used. Onlythose hearing protectors that have been tested ac-cording to American National Standards Institute(ANSI) S3.19 will be acceptable. Ear insert deviceswill be fitted individually by a competent person.Plain cotton is not acceptable as a protective device.When the sound pressure level in a working areaexceeds 115 decibels steady state, personal ear pro-tection equivalent to the combination of earplugs andear muffs shall be required.

(3) Noise level measurements. Noise levelmeasurements should be made by qualified person-nel using calibrated instruments.

(4) Caution signs. Hazardous noise level areas(greater than 85 decibels continuous or 140 decibelsimpulse) should be marked with caution signs indicat-ing both the presence of hazardous noise levels andthe need for hearing protection.

Table 3–1. OSHA Permissible Noises Exposures

Duration per Day (Hours)

8

6

4

3

2

1+1/2

1

1/2

1/4 or Less

Sound Level (Decibels)

90

92

95

97

100

102

105

110

115

Note: When the daily noise exposure is composed of two or moreperiods of noise exposures of different levels, their combined ef-fect should be considered, rather than the individual effect ofeach. If the sum of the following fractions: Cl/Tl + C2/T2 + ... + Cn/Tn exceeds unity; then, the mixed exposure should be consideredto exceed the limit value. Cn indicates that total time of exposureat a specified noise level, and Tn indicates the total time of expo-sure permitted at that level.

d. Working in insufficiently illuminated areas.Safety rules require adequate illumination for thework area. Where natural or installed artificial illu-mination is not sufficient temporary lighting mustbe provided. Ensure that temporary lighting is not

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–43–43–43–43–4

powered from the same circuit as temporary recep-tacles. The use of matches or open flames to providesuch illumination is forbidden. OSHA requires aminimum of a 5 footcandle (or 54 lux) level in con-struction areas and a 10 footcandle (or 108 lux) levelin electrical equipment rooms.

(1) Spaces containing exposed energizedparts. Do not enter spaces containing exposed en-ergized parts unless illumination is provided. Do notperform tasks near exposed energized parts wherelack of illumination or an obstruction precludes ob-servation of the work to be performed. Do not reachblindly into areas which may contain energized parts.

(2) Temporary lighting. All lamps for general il-lumination will be protected from accidental contactor breakage using approved guards. Guards are notrequired for flashlights. Flashlights will not havemetal cases. All light metal case sockets will begrounded. Temporary lights will not be suspendedby their electric cords unless cords and lights aredesigned for this means of suspension. Portable elec-tric lighting used in wet or other conductive loca-tions will be operated at 12 volts or less. However,120-volt lights may be used if protected by a groundfault circuit interrupter. Only explosion-proof light-ing equipment will be used in confined or enclosedspaces unless atmospheric tests have proven thespace to be nonexplosive.

3-4. Hazardous environmental impactsSerious bodily harm can result from contact withhazardous materials such as asbestos, polychlori-nated biphenyls (PCB), and sulfur hexifluoride (SF6).These hazardous materials can be found in old build-ing insulation material, utility substation, old trans-formers, capacitors, circuit breakers, switches, andvoltage regulators. They should be treated andhandled Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)regulations. Wood preservative treatment productswould also require special handling because of theirtoxicity. The following paragraphs will describe thedangers of these hazardous materials, where theyare used, and how to handle them. Protective appareland accessories are covered in paragraph 4-3. Theeffects of electromagnetic fields (EMF) created byhigh voltage electric lines will also be discussed. Re-quirements for protection against nuclear radiationare beyond the scope of this manual.

a. Working in asbestos areas. Asbestos had beenused in years past as insulation and fire protectionmaterial. However, cutting asbestos materials willrelease asbestos fibers to the atmosphere. These fi-bers will become harmful if they are breathed intothe lungs. The cells within the lungs will try to re-

move these fibers but will not succeed. Scar tissueswill form in the lungs. Studies have shown that sig-nificant quantity of asbestos fibers in the lung cancause lung cancer. For these reasons asbestos con-taining products are banned from the market. How-ever, electrical workers still have a chance to be ex-posed to such fibers if the existing asbestos contain-ing products such as ceiling tiles or cement-asbestosconduits in some old buildings are accidentally cut.Therefore, before starting a job in an area where as-bestos is identified, a written plan detailing compli-ance with Occupational Safety and Health Adminis-tration (OHSA) and the Environmental ProtectionAgency (EPA) asbestos abatement requirementshould be developed and submitted to theGovernment's designated authority. No asbestoswork shall be permitted without approval from theGovernment's authority. The disposal of asbestoscontaining products shall be handled by qualifiedpersonnel or contractors according to all Federal,State and local regulations.

b. Working with polychlorinated biphenyl lPCB)containing products. Because of their insulatingand nonflammable properties, PCB has been usedin years past as heat exchange and dielectric fluid inpower transformers, capacitors, voltage regulators,and circuit breakers. Trade names for PCBs includeAroclor, Askarel, Eucarel, Pyranol, Chlorextol,Nepolin, among others. PCBs can enter the air byvaporization from a leaking container. When in airPCBs will travel by wind. PCBs will then enter thesoil and water. Studies have shown that PCBs cancause serious skin diseases, liver failure, birth de-fects, and retardation. In 1977 the U.S. Environmen-tal Protection Agency (EPA) banned the productionof PCBs. The National Institute for OccupationalSafety and Health (NIOSH) recommends that theworkers not be in any workplace where the air con-tains more than 0.001 milligrams of PCB per cubicmeter for a 8-hour workday, 40-hour workweek.Workers should be aware of all locations having PCBcontaining products and who to contact if there is aspill. The transportation, storage, and disposal ofPCB containing products should be according to thecurrent EPA regulations.

(1) Handling. PCB is a “strong solvent” anda prolonged contact will result in removing the natu-ral skin oils. All PCB fluid shall be placed in closedcontainers and handled by qualified personnel.

(2) Personal protection. Nonabsorbent gloves(neoprene, teflon, viton, etc.), footwear, masks, andappropriate protective clothing should be worn whenhandling PCBs. All exposed parts of the body shouldbe greased with either petroleum jelly (vaseline), ol-

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–53–53–53–53–5

ive oil, cold cream, or another approved skin com-pound. At locations where there is not sufficient ven-tilation, workers must, in addition, use organic va-por respirators and goggles.

(3) Emergency case. In case of emergencywhen a worker comes accidentally in contact withPCB liquid he/she should immediately wash it offwith soap and water.

c. Working with sulfur hexifluoride (SF6)containers. In its pure state, SF6 is a colorless, odor-less, tasteless, nonflammable, nontoxic, and noncor-rosive gas shipped in liquid form. Since it is five timesheavier than air, it can act as an asphyxiant, and ina liquid state, it can cause tissue freezing similar tofrost bite. Its decomposition products, which resultfrom an electric arc or short-circuit, can be toxic.These decomposition products will recombine to formSF6 gas or be removed by an absorber provided forthat purpose within such equipment as circuit break-ers and switches. SF6 gas can leak and should al-ways be treated as hazardous.

(1) Handling. Only qualified workers trainedto deal with SF6's hazardous effects can analyze, fill,and reclaim this material. Only when spills and leaksoccur, should facility personnel be involved to pro-tect the public and the workplace.

(2) Dispersing. No employee will work alonewhen dispersing SF6. Wear approved insulatinggloves, safety glasses, and appropriate protectiveclothing to prevent any skin contact. Remove allsources contributing to electrical arcing and heat.Provide adequate ventilation to prevent the atmo-sphere from becoming oxygen deficient (19.5 percentby volume of oxygen minimum). Wear a hood withan air supply line when entering an oxygen-deficientatmosphere or where an oxygen detector is not avail-able to test air. Chemical cartridge respirators willnot be used. Provide a safety line and a standbyworker having another hood with an air-line as back-up for the worker in the hazardous SF6 atmosphere.

(3) In case of fire. Though a non-inflammablegas, SF6 can decompose at high temperatures to yieldtoxic and corrosive byproducts. If a fire occurs, usean appropriate fire extinguishing agent. All fire fight-ers should wear correct breathing apparatus.

d. Working with wood preservative treatmentproducts. Creosote and water-borne or oil-bornepreservatives used for wood treatment can only behandled by certified pesticide applicators. Coppernaphthenate preservative treatment does not requirecertification for its use.

e. Work around electric and magneticfields. This section covers safety measures whenworking around electric and magnetic fields producedby high-voltage electric lines. A 60-hertz electric lineemits an extremely low frequency (ELF) electromag-netic field (EMF) which has nonionizing rays. So far,no conclusive evidence has been proved that the EMFfrom ELF sources are harmful. OSHA and EPA havenot concurred that “prudent avoidance” which con-sists of taking steps to keep humans out of such fields,is necessary.

(1) Electric field. Whenever there is a voltagedifference between two conductive objects such astwo conductors, an electric field will be developed inthe space between these two conductive objects. Themagnitude or strength of the electric field is propor-tional to the difference of voltages between the twoconductive objects and inversely proportional to thedistance from the object. Electric fields are measuredin volts per meter (v/m). The higher the difference ofvoltages between two conductive objects and theshorter the distance from the object the stronger willbe the electric field.

(2) Magnetic field. Whenever there is a cur-rent flowing through a conductor or a coil of wirewound around a piece of iron (or a permanent mag-net called the “electromagnet”) , a magnetic field willbe developed in the space around the conductor andbetween the two ends of the coil. The magnitude orstrength of the magnetic field is proportional to themagnitude of the current flowing through the con-ductor (or the coil) and inversely proportional to thesquare of the distance from the conductor or the coil.Magnetic fields are measured in Gauss (G), or Tesla(T) (where one Tesla is equal to 10,000 Gausses). Thelarger the current flowing through the conductor orthe coil and the shorter the distance from the con-ductor or the coil, the stronger will be the magneticfield.

(3) Effects on human body. Electric fields willbe greatly reduced in strength by obstacles such asbuildings, trees, vehicles and so on. Magnetic fields onthe other hand cannot be blocked by obstacles but canbe greatly reduced by the distance. Some recent stud-ies have shown that the risks of cancer and leukemiaare higher for people living near high voltage trans-mission lines. These health problems are suspected tobe caused by the magnetic fields generated by the elec-tric lines. However, no scientists are certain of the causeof the disease because the energy radiated by the mag-netic field is very small as compared to the energy ra-diated by X-rays. The magnetic field energy does nothave enough strength to break the bonds in the cells ofhuman body to cause cancer or death.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–63–63–63–63–6

The International radiation Protection Association(IRPA) has also set some guidelines on electric and mag-netic fields exposures for electrical workers (See table 3–3).

The American conference of government IndustrialHygienists (ACGIH) has also set some guidelines forpacemaker workers. (See table 3–4).

Table 3–3. IRPA Guidelines on Electric and Magnetic FieldExposures

Exposures

Occupational:

-Whole working day

-short-term (*)

General Public

-Whole working day

-Short-term (*)

Electric Fields Magnetic Fields

50Hz

10kV/m

30kV/m

5kV/m

10kV/m

60Hz

10kV/m

30kV/m

5kV/m

10kV/m

50Hz

5G

50G

1G

10G

60Hz

5G

50G

1G

10G

Note: (*) For short term, electric field strength (kV /m) x hours ofexposure should not exceed 80. Whole body exposure to magneticfields up to 2 hours per day should not exceed 50G.

Table 3–4. ACGIH Guidelines on Electric and Magnetic FieldExposures for Pacemakers

Exposures

Occupational:

Cardiac Pacemaker

Electric Fields Magnetic Fields

50Hz

15kV/m

15kV/m

60Hz

15V/m

15kV/m

50Hz

10G

1G

60Hz

10G

1G

Note: Protective devices such as shielded clothing, gloves, insula-tion bucket liners and so on, should be used where the electric field is15kV / m or larger.

In the United Kingdom, the National Radiation Pro-tection Board has also established some guidelineson electric and magnetic fields for electrical workers(See table 3–5).

Table 3–5. United Kingdom Guidelines on Electric and MagneticField Exposures

Exposures

Occupational:

Cardiac Pacemaker

Electric Fields Magnetic Fields

50Hz

15kV/m

15kV/m

60Hz

15V/m

15kV/m

50Hz

10G

1G

60Hz

10G

1G

However, these guidelines are not officially approvedby U.S. Government yet. It is recommended that ap-propriate protection measures by applied when theworker experiences discomfort in the fields.

(4) Personnel protection. The most commonlyused method to protect electrical workers against elec-tric field effects is conductive shielding. Forms of shield-ing include conductive clothing, gloves, insulation, andbucket liners. Another method of protection is to avoidunnecessary proximity to electric sources and reducetime of exposure to the electric fields. There is nomethod for magnetic field protection, except distancefrom the field source.

(5) Electric and magnetic field exposure guide-lines. There are no official federal limits or guidelineson electric and magnetic fields produced by electricpower lines. However, there are six states in the UnitedStates which have set some guidelines on electric andmagnetic fields for electrical workers (See table 3–2).

3-5. Electric shock hazardsElectrical energy cannot be sensed by human body untilcontact is made. Therefore, electrical workers must al-ways be aware of electric shock hazards. Electric shockhazards can be caused by: accidentally touching anenergized line or a metal object which has differentpotential from ground; connecting two circuits whichhave phase differences, or working on an apparatus

Table 3–2. U.S. Guidelines on Electric and Magnetic Field Exposures

Electric Fields Magnetic Fields

States

Florida

Minnesota

Montana

New Jersey

New York

Oregon

On ROW

8kV/m

10kV/m

8kV/m

7kV/m

11.8kV/m

11kV/m

7kV/m

9kV/m

Edge ROW

2kV/m

1kV/m

3kV/m

1.6kV/m

On ROW Edge ROW

150mG(*)

200mG(*)

259mG(*)

200mG(*)

Notes

69-230kV lines

231-500kV lines

500kV 2-lines

Highway

crossing

road crossing

Note: ROW is the right-of-way for which a utility company acquirespermanent rights that allow the utility to build, operate, and maintainits transmission lines, and the right-of-way clear of trees, obstacles, andstructures for the reliability of lines and the safety of electrical workersand the public. (*) Under maximum load carrying conditions.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–73–73–73–73–7

Figure 3–1. Phasing check using hot-line stick and phasing testers

Figure 3–2. Phasing check using existing voltage transformers.

which can have feedback currents. Prejob planningshould be determined before starting work. Prejobplanning includes reviewing the electrical systemdiagrams, inspecting the system and understandingthe system's operation. All apparel, tools, and equip-ment needed for the job should be determined andready for use.

a. Working near energized circuits. Electricalmaintenance performed near energized circuitsshould be done with proper rubber blankets or othersuitable guards provided as a safety measure. Safeworking distance from the live apparatus or conduc-tors should also be applied (See paragraph 3-9).

b. Potential differences. The potential differ-ences between an energized conductor and ground,or between two energized conductors, are equallyhazardous. The metal frames or enclosures of elec-trical components may not be at the same potentialwith the ground. Therefore, they should be consid-ered as hazardous. The potential difference betweenconductors (including phase conductors, groundedconductors, and grounding conductors) to groundshould be checked and measured. The potential dif-ference between metal frames of electrical compo-nents to ground should also be checked and measuredbefore starting a job.

c. Phase differences. Before connecting two ormore circuits together the phases of the circuitsshould be checked. A short circuit will occur whentwo circuits having different phases are connectedto each other. Only circuits of same phase can be con-nected. When two circuits are in-phase the voltagesacross the circuits will be zero. For a power systemless than 600 volts a voltmeter can be used for phasetesting. For a power system larger than 600 volts ahot stick and high voltage voltmeter should be used(See figs 3–1 and 3–2).

d. Feedback currents. There is always a possi-bility of a feedback current when working on appa-ratus. A feedback current can result from improperdisconnection or accidental connection to a stored en-ergy power source or electric power source. A thor-ough understanding of the circuitry is necessaryalong with proper disconnection and grounding pro-visions.

3-6. Electrical workWork should be performed on de-energized electri-cal circuits except when continuous power is requiredfor critical services. In all instances, electrical work-ers should be qualified for the work. Safety proce-dures should be applied and personal protectiveequipment should be used. Where work on an ener-

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–83–83–83–83–8

gized electrical circuit is required the worker mustreceive approval from his/her supervisor and thework must be performed under direct supervision ofa qualified foreman.

3–7. De-energized line workAll lines are considered energized until they are com-pletely disconnected and isolated from all electricalpower sources. All stored energy sources such aspower factor capacitors shall be discharged to groundthrough a proper grounding system before startingthe job. Safety clearance should be applied. Barriersand warning signs should be used when it is neces-sary to prevent access of unauthorized persons to thework areas.

3–8. Safety clearance for de-energized lineworkThis safety clearance provides standard perfor-mances that must be applied by all electrical work-ers when working on de-energized lines and equip-ment operating above and below 600 volts.

a. Definitions of commonly used electrical terms.The most commonly used electrical terms are—

(1) Switching. The action of shifting, turning,or changing the existing position or direction of anelectrical interrupting device such as a switch' cir-cuit breaker or recloser to an opposite position ordirection in order to connect, disconnect, or re-con-nect a circuit or electrical device to an electrical powersystem.

(2) Blocking. Placing a barrier to obstruct theoperation of an electrical interrupting device suchas a switch, circuit breaker, or recloser to preventaccidental operation.

(3) Lockout. The application of a locking de-vice to the operating handle of an electrical inter-rupting device such as a switch, circuit breaker, orrecloser to prevent the reposition of the device ex-cept when the reposition is specifically intended.

(4) Tagging. The action of attaching a dan-ger tag or caution tag to an electrical interruptingdevice such as a switch, circuit breaker, or recloseror to an electrical rotating device such as a motor,generator, or fan or to an electrical tool such as anelectric drill or screw driver.

(5) Personnel protection ground. A groundingsystem (including grounding conductors, groundingelectrodes, and other grounding hardware) installedand connected into an electrical power system for the

purpose of discharging electrical energy to groundto protect personnel from accidental exposure to volt-age.

(6) Clearance (danger) and cautiondetails. The explanation in detail of the actions ortasks associated with the application of the dangeror caution tags.

(7) Main Hold Tag. The front side of a DAForm 7408 (Danger Tag) is designated as a "MainHold Tag" when it is attached to a main electricalsystem or equipment to hold its position until thetag is removed by authorized personnel. The MainHold Tag should not be used for any purpose otherthan the protection of personnel under a safety clear-ance.

(8) Auxiliary Hold Tag. The back side of a DAForm 7408 (Danger Tag) is used as an "Auxiliary HoldTag" when it is used to disable a subsystem or equip-ment disconnecting devices which may affect thesystem or equipment covered by the Main Hold Tag.

(9) Caution Tag. A DA Form 5140 CautionTag) used as a stand-alone or in conjunction with aDanger Tag. The Caution Tag is attached to a sys-tem or equipment to direct attention of electricalworkers to its abnormal conditions or unusual oper-ating characteristics.

(10) Task. A statement consisting of a singleaction verb which indicates a specific accomplishmentsuch as ''Block Switch A Open", "Lockout Switch A",or "Tag Switch A".

b. Safety clearance duties and responsibilities.The duties and responsibilities of supervisor andworkers engaged in the application of a safety clear-ance are as follows.

(1) Supervisor duties and responsibilities. Thesupervisor is responsible for—

(a) Designating individual(s) authorized toreceive, request, approve, issue, apply, maintain, tem-porary release, and terminate a safety clearance.

(b) Supervising and being responsible for theapplication of safety clearances.

(c) Making all necessary arrangements forinterruption of electrical power service such as noti-fying customers and the utility company.

(d) Providing direction for the management,preparation, application, and maintenance of safety

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–93–93–93–93–9

clearance records.

(e) Conducting safety clearance training andbriefing to ensure a qualified and informed workforce.

(2) Worker duties and responsibilities. The du-ties and responsibilities of workers will vary depend-ing upon duty position assignments as determinedby the supervisor.

(a) Workers authorized to approve and issuesafety clearances must—

1. Be technically qualified in all aspects ofthe electrical system and equipment operation andspecifically the paths for current flow and the re-quired positioning of the system control devices suchas disconnect switches, circuit breakers, and reclosersto de-energize the system, or place other equipmentinto operation when it is necessary;

2. Receive requests for safety clearances;3. Verify that the requestor is authorized

to initiate a request and receive a safety clearance;4. Review the accuracy of information en-

tered on the Safety Clearance an or Caution Orderform relative to the system or equipment involved;

5. Review the adequacy, sequence, and ef-fectiveness of individual tasks listed on the SafetyClearance and or Caution Order form;

6. Provide guidance or correction when itis necessary;

7. Make all necessary arrangements forpower interruption required for the job;

8. Notify customers and utility companywhen it is necessary (these arrangements must bemade prior to performing any switching which mayaffect the customer's services and utility company'ssystem);

9. Ensure a complete understanding of therequirements for the clearance order on the “Detailof the Clearance Procedures" including the verbalrestating of the details of each individual task listedon the Safety Clearance Order to the requestor;

10. Determine and assign a Safety Clear-ance Order number;

11. Annotate (on the Safety Clearance Or-der form) the numbers of all other clearance orderswhich are on the related systems or equipment;

12. Fill out the DA Form 7408 (Danger Tag)13. Issue the DA Form 5168-R (Safety

Clearance Order (Electrical Facilities)) and Dangeror Caution Tag to requester;

14. Issue DA Form 7407-R (Caution Order(Electrical Facilities)) and DA Form 5140 (CautionTag) in conjunction with the Safety Clearance Orderwhen requested;

15. Receive, review, and approve requests

for temporary lift, release of temporary lift, and ter-mination of clearance including the review of thesystem’s or equipment's status to determine if otherworkers will be affected and determine the appro-priate action to be taken in such a case;

16. Maintain safety clearance records in-cluding documenting clearance orders and other in-formation relative to issuing and releasing of clear-ances and filing of closed-out clearance orders.

(b) Workers authorized to receive safetyclearances must—

1. Meet the technical knowledge require-ments specified for the individual authorized to ap-prove and issue a clearance;

2. Be technically qualified to perform allmethods necessary to accomplish the tasks requiredby the "Details of Clearance Procedures" on theSafety Clearance Order form;

3. Determine paths of current flow and po-tential feed back circuit(s) relative to the system orequipment involved;

4. Determine tasks or actions required toachieve a clearance including a sequence of tasks thatwill be performed to precede a clearance;

5. Prepare and submit the Safety Clear-ance and or Caution Order form;

6. Apply safety clearance procedures en-suring that all tasks are performed in the order andsequence as approved and listed on the Safety Clear-ance and or Caution Order form, annotating the timewhen each task is completed;

7. Conduct a safety briefing for subordi-nates and coworkers to ensure that they understandclearly the applied clearance requirements includ-ing familiarizing subordinates and coworkers withthe positioning of all danger tags (main and auxil-iary), caution tags, and personnel safety grounds;

8. Determine the requirements for tempo-rary lift of clearances and request temporary lift ofclearances including coordination and briefing otherpersons or crews that may have been working on theequipment or system;

9. Request authorization to release tem-porary lift and reapply the original clearance orderincluding coordination and briefing other persons orcrews that may have been working on the equipmentor system;

10. Request authorization to release andperform the release of safety clearances includingperforming the tasks of unlocking, blocking, tagging,repositioning of switches, and removal of personnelsafety grounds as specified in the details of safetyclearance procedures;

11. Prepare turn-in and close-out dangertags to the issuing authority.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–103–103–103–103–10

(c) Workers who receive approved (ClearanceOrders must—

1. Apply the safety clearance order byimplementing the tasks specified in the ''Details ofClearance Procedures";

2. Perform the tasks in the order and se-quence as listed;

3. Fill out the "Time Applied" for each taskupon completion;

4. Ensure that the related power systemor equipment is isolated from all power sources andstored energy sources and that the methods of block-ing and locking are properly applied;

5. Apply Danger Tags issued in conjunc-tion with the Safety Clearance Order;

6. Sign the "Placed By" column on bothMain and Auxiliary Tags.Note: Danger Tags must be applied at the time wherethe switching task is performed for the specific dis-connect device identified in "Details of ClearanceProcedures.” All previous tags attached to the devicemust be removed (by a temporary lift order), exceptwhere other inherent problems preclude the removalof the tag.

7. Conduct a safety briefing, as necessary,to inform subordinates and coworkers on safety is-sues and concerns related to the applied clearance.

(d) Workers authorized to request TemporaryLift/ Close-Out of Clearances. Worker who receivesan approved safety clearance order can request fromthe issuing authority a temporary lift or close-out ofclearance. When this individual is not available, thesupervisor can perform the request or designate aperson to perform this function. The request mustbe approved prior to performing any task of unlock-ing, blocking, tagging, repositioning of switches orremoval of personnel protective grounds. When acaution order is in effect as a requirement of the clear-ance order the following additional procedures mustbe performed:

1. Request temporary lift or close-out of thecaution simultaneously with the request to tempo-rary lift or close-out of the clearance;

2. Request and apply a new caution orderfor the system or equipment involved. The "Detailsof Caution Procedures" for the new caution ordershould be specified in accordance with the originalCaution Order.

(e) Workers authorized to approve TemporaryLift/Close-Out of Clearances. Workers issuing safetyclearance orders have authorization to receive andapprove requests for temporary lift or close-out ofclearances. However, they must review the systemor equipment status to determine if other workerswill be effected by release of the clearance and-de-

termine the appropriate action to be taken in such acase. The worker must make all necessary arrange-ments for restoration of service such as notifying thecustomers and utility company. These arrangementsmust be made prior to performing any switchingwhich may affect the customers' service or utilitycompany's system. They must approve and recordthe temporary lift/close-out of clearance.

WARNING:

(f) Workers who receive approval of Tempo-rary Lift/ Closed-Out Orders must—

1. Perform the tasks of unlocking, block-ing, tagging, repositioning of switches, and removalof personnel protective grounds;

2. Perform these tasks in the reverse se-quence as listed on the Clearance Order form;

3. Enter the "Time Removed Column" aseach task is completed.Note: The task action to be performed during therelease of a clearance is the opposite action as statedfor applying the clearance. For instance, if a task ofthe clearance procedure reads "Open Switch A" theopposite operation is "Close Switch A".

4. Remove all clearance tags;5. Submit the closed-out clearance order

with all associated clearance tags to the issuing au-thority.

(g) Workers who receive Turned-In ClearanceOrders and Tags must complete the termination ofclearance by entering the "Released By" and "Ac-cepted By" blocks and the time and date the closed-out clearance order and tags from the "active" file tothe "inactive" file.

c. Safety clearance forms. There are four safetyclearance forms: Safety Clearance Order, DA Form5168R (fig. 3–3), Caution Order, DA Form 7408 (fig.3–5), and Caution Tag, DA Form 5140 (fig. 3–6).

The preparation and application of the forms willdepend on each job.

(1) DA Form 5168-R (Safety Clearance Order(Electrical Facilities). The Safety Clearance Orderform is used for requesting and issuing a clearancefor electrical work. It contains all data necessary forapplying and releasing a clearance or a temporarylift of clearance. The Safety Clearance Order form

Clearance should not be released whenremoval of the clearance will leave otherworkers unprotected. In such cases, a newclearance order must be issued, as neces-sary, to protect the other workers. The newclearance order must be applied before theold clearance can be released.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–113–113–113–113–11

Figure 3–3. Sample of a completed DA Form 5168-R, Safety Clearance Order (Electrical Facilities).

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–123–123–123–123–12

Figure 3–4. Sample of a completed DA Form 7407-R, Caution Order (Electrical Facilities).

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–133–133–133–133–13

Figure 3–5. Sample of a completed DA Form 7408, Danger Tag.

Figure 3–6. Sample of a completed DA Form 5140, Caution Tag.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–143–143–143–143–14

must be used for all electrical works performed onde-energized lines and equipment operating above600 volts. DA Form 5168-should be prepared by theworker who is authorized to receive and apply asafety clearance. The safety clearance order formshould be typed or hand-written in ''black'' or “blue”ink pen or ballpoint pen and filled out as shown infigure 3–3. DA Form 5168-R will be reproduced on8 1/2 - by 11-inch paper. A copy for reproduction pur-poses is located at the back of this manual. The prepa-ration of the Safety Clearance Order form follows—

(a) Block 1, Order Number. The Order num-ber will consist of two sets of numbers separated bya hyphen. The first set will consist of two digits rep-resenting the current year. The second set will con-sist of four digits beginning with the number "0001".For example: 99-0001.

(b) Block 2, Other Number. If there areother clearances and or cautions which are in effecton the system or equipment for which the clearanceis being requested, the individual who issues thesafety clearance will enter the order numbers of theseclearances/cautions in block 2.

(c) Block 3, Station/Installation. The nameof the station/substation or facility where the sys-tem or equipment is physically located will be en-tered in block 3 by the individual who requests theclearance.

(d) Block 4, Line or EquipmentInvolved. The description of the line or equipmenton which the work is to be performed will be enteredin block 4 by the individual who request the clear-ance.

(e) Block 5, Time Applied. The individualwho applies the clearance order will enter the timewhen each task is completed. The 24-hour systemwill be used. Military (hhmm) or civilian time(hh:mm) may be used on all forms. For example: 1500or 15:00.

(f) Block 6, Details of ClearanceProcedure. The details of the tasks needed to com-plete the clearance will be described in block 6. Thetasks must be numbered in the order that they willbe implemented. In the example substation #3 is shutdown and repairs made. Clearance is temporarilylifted midway to test for operation. After the test,unit is shut down again and times recorded in theright hand column.

(g) Block 7, Time Removed. The individualwho performs a clearance removal will enter the time

when each task is completed. The procedures to re-move a clearance will be in reverse order to that usedfor applying a clearance. The task action used forremoving an order will be the Opposite action to thatused for installing an order. For instance, if the taskaction used to install a clearance order is “Openswitch A'', the task action used to remove a clear-ance order is "Close Switch A".

(h) Block 8a, Issued To. The name of theperson who is authorized to receive and implementthe safety clearance will be entered in block 8a bythe issuing authority.

(i) Block 8b, Issued By. The name of the per-son who issues the safety clearance must be enteredin block 8b. In cases where the individual issuingand receiving the clearance is the same person theperson's name will be entered in both the “Issued to"and "Issued by" blocks.

(j) Block 8c, Timed Issued. The time whenthe safety clearance is issued will be entered in block8c by the person who issues the clearance.

(k) Block 8d, Date Issued. The date, month,and year when the clearance is issued must be en-tered in this block. Numerical or alphanumericalforms may be used on all forms. For example: 24-12-1999 or 24 Dec 1999.

(l) Block 9a, Released By. The name of theperson who releases the clearance must be enteredin block 9a.

(m) Block 9b, Accepted By. The name of theperson who accepts the released clearance must beentered in block 9b. In cases where the individualaccepting release and releasing the clearance is theSame person the person’s name will be entered inboth the “Released By" and "Accepted By" blocks.

(n) Block 9c, Time Released. The time whenthe clearance is released will be entered in block 9cby the person who accepts the released clearance.

(o) Block 9d, Date Released. The date,month, and year when the clearance is released willbe entered in block 9d by the person who accepts thereleased clearance.

(2) Safety clearance order logbook. All infor-mation relative to issuing and releasing clearanceorders must be recorded in a logbook. This logbookwill also document information on accidents thatoccur during a given clearance.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–153–153–153–153–15

(3) Safety clearance order record file. Separatefiles are required for active (still in effect) and inac-tive (released) safety clearance orders. Inactive filesshould be maintained within the organization'srecord keeping system according to AR 25-400-2.

(4) Special cases. Three special cases exist.

(a) Operation of the system or equipmentduring a clearance is not authorized while the clear-ance is in effect. However, when it is necessary forthe system or equipment or parts thereof to be oper-ated for purposes of operational or after-main-tenance, testing, a temporary lift of the clearancecould be applied. There are no restrictions on the totalnumber of temporary lifts that can be issued rela-tive to a given safety clearance order. However, onlyone temporary lift will be in effect for a given clear-ance at a time. In addition, if the system or equip-ment has multiple safety clearances applied, a tem-porary lift is required for all the clearances in effect.The issuing authority must coordinate all partiesinvolved to ensure safety of all personnel.

(b) Temporary lifts of clearance. When morethan one temporary lift of clearance is needed forthe job each temporary lift should be annotated al-phabetically. The first temporary lift of clearanceshould be given the letter "A". The next temporarylift of clearance should be given the next letter "B",and so on. The detailed description for each task per-formed during a temporary lift of clearance shouldbe listed and numbered. The number assigned foreach task performed during a lift of clearance will bebased on the number given to a related task listedon the original order but is annotated with the al-phabetical letter of the temporary lift of clearanceas illustrated in figure 3–3. The time when a task isapplied and removed during a lift of clearance shouldbe entered by the individual who applied for the liftof clearance.

(c) At an attended substation, the operationsof the system or equipment during a lift of clearanceshould be carried out by the operator on duty.

(5) DA Form 7407-R, (Caution Order (Electri-cal Facilities)). This form is used to direct electri-cal workers' attention to abnormal, hazardous, andunusual conditions of an electrical system or device.The caution order differs from the safety clearanceorder in that the system equipment may be operatedwhile the caution is in effect. The Caution Order isnormally used in conjunction with a clearance to ad-dress the conditions of the system or equipmentwhich are not mentioned in the clearance order. How-ever, the caution cannot be used in lieu of a clear-

ance. DA Form 7407-R will be reproduced on 8 1/2-by 11-inch paper. A copy for reproduction purposes islocated at the back of this manual. The preparationof the Caution Order form follows—

(a) Block 1, Order Number. The Order num-ber will consist of a letter X followed by two sets ofnumbers. The first set of numbers will consist of twodigits representing the current year. The second setof numbers will consist of four digits beginning withthe number "0001". For example: X94-0001.

(b) Block 2, Other Number. If there areother clearances or cautions which are in effect onthe system or equipment for which the caution orderis being requested, the individual who issued thecaution order will enter the order numbers of theseclearances or cautions in block 2.

(c) Block 3, Station/Installation. The nameof the station, substation, or facility where the sys-tem or equipment is physically located will be en-tered in block 3 by the individual who requests thecaution.

(d) Block 4, Line or Equipment in-volved. The description of the line or equipment towhich the caution will be applied, will be entered inblock 4 by the individual who requests the caution.

(e) Block 5, Time Applied. The time whena task (listed in the Details of Caution Procedures)is applied and completed will be entered in this blockby the individual who performed the task. The 24-hour system will be used.

(f) Block 6, Details of Caution Procedures.The details of caution procedures will depend uponthe intent of the caution. For a caution order whichinvolves only switching, tagging, or blocking, the de-tail of tasks that need to be performed to completethe caution should be described in block 6. For a cau-tion order which stipulates the operation of an elec-trical device or equipment, the operating instructionsmust be entered. Where the instructions have anassigned number this number could be entered. Thedetails of the procedures must be numbered in thesequential order that they will be implemented.

(g) Block 7, Time Removed. The proceduresto remove a caution order will be performed in thereverse order to that used for applying the cautionorder. The task action used to remove an order willbe the opposite to that used for installing an order.For instance, if the task action used to install a cau-tion order is “Open switch A” the task action used toremove an order is “Close Switch A”. The time when

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–163–163–163–163–16

a task (to remove an order) is completed will be en-tered in block 7 by the individual who performed thetask.

(h) Block 8a, Issued To. The name of the in-dividual who is authorized to receive and apply acaution order will be entered in block 8a by the issu-ing authority.

(i) Block 8c, time Issued. The name of theindividual who issues a caution order must be en-tered in block 8b. In cases where the individual issu-ing and receiving the caution order is the same per-son the person’s name will be entered in both the“Issued To” and “Issued By” blocks.

(j) Block 8c, Time Issued. The time at whicha caution order is issued will be entered in block 8cby the person who issues the order.

(k) Block 8d, Date Issued. The date, month,and year when a caution order is issued must be en-tered in this block. Both numerical and alphanu-merical forms could be used.

(l) Block 9a, Released By. The name of theperson who releases the caution order must be en-tered in block 9a.

(m) Block 9b, Accepted By. The name of theperson who accepts the released caution order mustbe entered in this block.

(n) Block 9c, Time Released. The time atwhich a caution order is released will be entered inblock 9c by the individual who accepts the releasedcaution order.

(o) Block 9d, Date Released. The date,month, and year where the caution order is releasedwill be entered in block 9d by the person who ac-cepts the released caution order.

(6) Caution order logbook. All informationrelative to issuing and releasing caution orders mustbe recorded on a logbook. This logbook will also docu-ment all operations of the system or equipment whilethe caution is still in effect.

(7) Caution order record file. Separate filesare required for active (still in effect) and inactive(released) caution orders. Inactive files should bemaintained within the organization's record keep-ing system according to AR 25-400-2.

(8) Special applications. Caution orders re-maining in effect for an extended period must be re-

viewed annually at a minimum to determine if therequirement still exists. Results of the review mustbe communicated to all elements of the operation.Caution orders issued for abnormal/unusual condi-tions of an electrical system or equipment which can-not be corrected will become a part of the equipment'spermanent record and may remain indefinitely. Cau-tion orders issued for abnormal/unusual conditionof mobile equipment must be transferred from thelosing issuing authority to the gaining issuing au-thority when the equipment is transferred betweenauthorities. In this case a duplicate of the order isprepared and forwarded to the gaining, issuing au-thority and the caution tag is left attached to theapplicable device.

(9) DA Form 7408 (Danger Tag) (fig. 3–5).Danger Tags must be used in conjunction with theDA Form 5168-R (Safety Clearance Order), and mustbe applied with each safety clearance issued. The tagmust never be used for any purpose other than theprotection of personnel working under a safety clear-ance order. A tag is applied to systems and equip-ment to ensure that a device's position will not bechanged by unauthorized persons as long as the sys-tem or equipment has an active safety clearance ineffect. The tag can only be removed by the individualwho installs the tag or an authorized person desig-nated by his/her supervisor.

(a) Main Hold Tag. The front side of theDanger Tag is designated as the “Main Hold Tag”.The Main Hold Tag is used to attach to a primarydisconnecting device of a circuit to ensure that theposition of the device will not be changed by unau-thorized persons as long as the tag is attached. AMain Hold Tag will be applied for each safety clear-ance issued and remain attached for as long as thesafety clearance order is in effect.

(b) Preparation of Main Hold Tag. TheMain Hold Tag will be prepared by the individualwho issues the tag. It will contain data consistentwith that listed on the associated Safety ClearanceOrder, such as substation name, clearance ordernumber, line or equipment involved, issuing author-ity, applying authority, date and time applied. Wherean Auxiliary Hold Tag is used in conjunction with aMain Hold Tag, the location (or placement) of theAuxiliary Hold Tag will be listed on the Main HoldTag. The name of the worker who installs the Auxil-iary Hold Tag will also be entered. The name of thestation/substation or facility where the system orequipment is physically located will be entered inthis block by the individual who requests the clear-ance. The clearance number must be entered in thisblock by the individual who issues the Danger Main

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–173–173–173–173–17

Hold Tag, as given on the Safety Clearance Orderform. The tag number will be one (1) when the tag isused as the Main Hold Tag. The tag number will beentered by the individual who issues the tag. Thedescription of the line or equipment on which thework is to be performed will be entered in the “Clear-ance On” block by the individual who issues the Dan-ger Main Hold Tag. The name of the individual whoreceives the Danger Tag will be entered in the “Is-sued To” block by the issuing authority. The name ofthe individual who issues the Danger/Main Hold Tagmust be entered in the “Issued By” block. In caseswhere the individual issuing and receiving the Dan-ger/Main Hold Tag is the same person, the person'sname will be entered in both the “Issued To” and “Is-sued By” blocks. The date, month, and year whenthe Main Hold Tag is installed must be entered inthe “Date” block by the individual who installs thetag. Both numerical and alphanumerical forms couldbe used. For example: 24-12-1999 or 24 Dec 1999.The time when the Main Hold Tag is installed willbe entered in the “Time” block by the individual whoinstalls the card. The 24-hour system will be used.Both military form (hhmm) and civilian form(hh:mm) could be used. For example: 1500 or 15:00.The name of the individual who installs the Auxil-iary Hold Tag will be entered in the “Placed By” (Aux-iliary Tag Placement Section) block by the individualwho received the tag. The location where the Auxil-iary Hold Tag is to be placed, as specified in the SafetyClearance Order, will be entered in the “Location”(Auxiliary Tag Placement Section) block by the issu-ing authority. The name of the individual who re-moves the Auxiliary Hold Tag will be entered in the“Removed By” (Auxiliary Tag Placement Section)block by the individual who receives the tag.

(c) Auxiliary Hold Tag. The back side of theDanger Tag is designated as the “Auxiliary Hold Tag”.The Auxiliary Hold Tag is used to attach to subsystemdisconnecting devices to disable subsystem circuitswhich may affect the system or equipment that isbeing worked on.

(d) Preparation of Auxiliary Hold Tag. TheAuxiliary Hold Tag will be prepared by the individualwho issues the tag. It will contain data consistentwith that listed on the Main Hold Tag such as clear-ance order number, line/equipment involved, issu-ing authority and so on. The clearance number mustbe entered by the individual who issues the tag. Thisnumber was given on the Safety Clearance Orderform. The tag number entered must match with theassigned number listed on the “Tag Number” columnof the Main Hold Tag, where the location of the Aux-iliary Hold Tag matches with the location describedon the Main Hold Tag. The same number will also be

entered on the “Tag No” block on the other side ofthe tag. No other information is necessary on theother side of the tag when the tag is used as an Aux-iliary Hold Tag. The name of the individual who in-stalls the Auxiliary Hold Tag will be entered in the“Placed By” block by the individual who receives thetag. This name should also be entered on the MainHold Tag. The times when the Auxiliary Hold Tag isinstalled will be entered by the individual who placesthe tag. The name of the individual who receives theAuxiliary Hold Tag will be entered in the “Issued To”block by the issuing authority. The location wherethe Main Hold Tag is installed should be filled in bythe issuing authority. The description of the line orequipment held by the Auxiliary Hold Tag must befilled in by the issuing authority. The location wherethe ground rod is installed for this clearance shouldbe entered by the issuing authority. This ground lo-cation must be filled in conjunction with the MainHold Tag.

(e) Danger Tag Holder. The Danger Tagmust be placed inside a tag holder to prevent damagecaused by weather or destructive operation of the elec-trical equipment or devices. Tag holders must be of anonconductive, see-through (that is clear plastic) ma-terial designed for installation with a switch stick.

(f) Special applications are as follows:Gang-operated switches must be locked open and anappropriate number of danger tags (one for eachsafety clearance) must be applied to the lock. Like-wise, a turbine throttle valve must be locked in theclosed position and tagged. For overhead lines, a vis-ible line-break must be provided at all points of pos-sible feed. An open oil circuit breaker is not accept-able. When an oil circuit breaker must be used, theline-side leads must be removed from the breakerbushings and the breaker must be mechanicallyblocked open, locked-out, and tagged. In addition, avoltage test will be used to determine that the linesare de-energized. Protective grounds will be installedon the lines as close as possible to the oil circuitbreaker.

WARNING:

Perform the voltage test to verify that thecircuit is de-energized before installingprotective ground or serious injury mayoccur. For underground systems, a visibleline-brake must be provided when feasible.When an oil circuit breaker or oil-discon-nect switch must be used, the same re-quirements as specified for overhead linesmust be met. Oil fuse cutouts must beblocked and locked in the open position.The fuse block must be removed and theclamp must be danger tagged.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–183–183–183–183–18

(10) DA Form 5140 (Caution Tag). (Fig. 3–6).Caution Tags are normally used to attach to an elec-trical system or equipment to direct attention of elec-trical workers to the abnormal, hazardous, and un-usual operating conditions of the system or equip-ment or device. The caution differs from the clear-ance in that the system or equipment may be oper-ated while the caution is in effect. The caution can-not be used in lieu of a clearance.

(a) Preparation of Caution Tag. The front sideof the tag should be prepared by the individual whoissues the tag. The back side of the tag should besigned by the individual who operates the equipment.On side A the Caution Order number must be en-tered in this block by the individual who issues thetag. This number is given on the Caution Order form.The name of the station, substation, or facility atwhich the effected equipment or electrical device isphysically located will be entered by the issuing au-thority. The description of the line or equipmentto which the caution tag will be attached will be en-tered by the issuing authority. The abnormal condi-tions and unusual operating characteristics of thesystem or equipment must be entered in this blockby the issuing authority. Special instructions neededto operate an electrical system or run equipment ora device should be entered in this block by the indi-vidual who issues the tag. The time in minutesneeded to wait before closing or reclosing a circuit oroperate electrical equipment should be entered bythe issuing authority. The name of the individual whorequests the caution order will be entered by the is-suing authority. The name of the individual who ap-proves the caution order will be entered by the issu-ing authority. The name of the individual who in-stalls the tag will be entered in the "Placed By" blockby the individual who receives the tag. The name ofthe individual who releases the tag will be enteredby the individual who receives the released tag. Thename of the individual who authorizes the release ofthe tag will be entered in the "Ordered Off By" block.Normally, the issuing authority approves the releaseof the tag. The name of the individual who removesthe tag will be entered by the issuing authority. Onside B, the name of the individual who operates thesystem or equipment while the caution tag is still ineffect must enter his/her name. The time when thesystem or equipment is operated while the cautionis still in effect will be entered by the operator. Thedate, month, and year when the system or equipmentis operated while the caution is still in effect will beentered by the operator.

(b) Caution Tag Holder. The Caution Tagmust be placed inside a tag holder to prevent dam-age caused by weather or destructive operation of

the electrical equipment or device. Tag holders mustbe of a nonconductive, see through (that is, clear plas-tic) material designed for installation with a switchstick.

(c) Special applications. Caution Tags whichremain in effect for an extended period, must be in-spected monthly as a minimum to determine thatthe tags are physically attached, and protected frominclement weather.

d. Safety Clearance/Caution Order processing.The Safety Clearance/Caution Order processing isas follows:

(1) The individual authorized to receive aSafety Clearance/Caution Order must prepare theSafety Clearance Order, DA Form 5168-R, and or theCaution Order, DA Form 7407, and submit the re-quested order(s) to the individual who has authorityto issue the order(s). The requester must provide adetailed description of all tasks which are requiredfor the system or equipment isolation and personnelprotection.

(2) The individual authorized to issue a SafetyClearance/Caution Order will—

(a) Receive the request for Safety Clearance/Caution Order.

(b) Review the system or equipment statusto determine if other workers will be affected by therequested/Clearance/Caution Order, and determinethe appropriate action to take in such a case.

(c) Make all necessary arrangements forscheduled outages, such as notifying the customersand utility company, if necessary.

(d) Issue the Safety Clearance/Caution Or-ders and Danger/Caution Tags necessary for the job.

(e) Record and follow up the all clearancesin effect.

(3) The individual who received the approvedSafety Clearance/Caution Order, has authorizationto request a temporary lift of clearance. He/she mustprepare and submit to the issuing authority a supple-mental Safety Clearance Order, DA Form 5168-R.

(4) The individual who receives the request fortemporary lift of clearance will review the system orequipment status to determine if other workers willbe affected by the lift of clearance and determine theappropriate action to take in such a case.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–193–193–193–193–19

(5) The individual who received the approvedtemporary lift must perform all tasks as outlined inthe supplemental Safety Clearance Order form.

(6) The issuing authority will have authoriza-tion to approve the release of temporary lift andSafety Clearance or Caution Order. No release ofsafety clearance/caution can be performed before therelease was approved.

(7) The individual authorized to release aSafety Clearance/Caution must complete all taskslisted on the approved order, but in reverse orderand opposite sequence from that in which the tasksare applied. For instance, if a task reads "OpenSwitch A" when a clearance is applied, the oppositeoperation is "Close Switch A".

3-9. General rules for de-energized line workThe following rules should be applied for all de-en-ergized line work.

a. Low voltage de-energized line work (600 Voltsand below). All de-energized lines/equipment/appa-ratus to be worked on should be securely groundedto a common grounding electrode. An equipotentialvoltage between the line/equipment/apparatus to beworked on and the platform on which the workerstands must be checked before starting work. Anapproved voltmeter, scope meter, or voltage detectormust be used for this test. All automatic devices suchas automatic transfer switches should be physicallyturned off or disconnected if it is possible. All storedenergy sources such as power factor capacitors shouldbe properly drained to ground. The grounding con-ductor used to drain the stored energy should be re-tained until the work is completed. In cases wherethe lines/equipment/apparatus should not begrounded the foreman must explain to his/her crewthe reasons for not grounding. All other energizedlines, equipment, or apparatus which are not con-nected to the system to be worked on, but are withinthe reaches of electrical worker, should be coveredwith insulated protective equipment. Always treatbare wires such as ground wires of uninterruptiblepower systems or communication systems, as ener-gized lines.

b. Medium and high voltage de-energized linework (above 600 volts). The following rules mustbe applied before starting any line work:

(1) Clearly understand the instructions andwork requirements.

(2) Prepare all necessary tools and equipment.

(3) Prepare safety procedures.

(4) Apply personal protective equipment.

(5) Perform a safety clearance for lines/equip-ment/apparatus to be worked on.Note: When installing a temporary ground for a line,equipment, or apparatus the connection to groundmust be made first. Before making a connection toan electric line/equipment/apparatus, test for staticdischarge with a switch stick as an added precau-tion. When removing a temporary ground, discon-nect the ground connection last.

(6) Cover all other energized lines/equipmentwithin reach with insulated equipment such as rub-ber line hose, insulator hoods, or rubber blankets.

(7) Discharge all surge arresters and stored en-ergy devices, if existing.

(8) Guard the working area with suitable bar-riers and warning signs from access by unauthorizedpersons.

(9) Before starting work, check the equipoten-tial voltage between the line/equipment/apparatusto be worked on and the platform where the workerwill stand.

(10) Before cutting a cable, be sure that the cablehas been correctly identified by your foreman bychecking the duct and cable location against thatshown on working print or by cable identificationtags. The working print must also be checked againstthe facility engineer's map records. Cables can alsobe identified with the aid of an exploring coil by lis-tening for a pulsating beat imposed on the cables bysending an interrupter signal.

(11) After the cable has been identified andgrounded, remove a three inch strip of coveringaround cable and test with a voltage detector at twoor more points near the center of the exposed insula-tion. Repeat the test with another voltage detector ifit is available. Alternatively, a spiker can be used, asdescribed in paragraph 7–5.

(12) When cutting cable, place a hacksaw on theexposed cable insulation adjacent to and touchingthe grounded metallic shield or sheath or the tempo-rary ground on the shield or sheath before cutting.

(13) Do not approach or touch reactors and con-nected equipment unless it has been proven that theyare de-energized and grounded.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–203–203–203–203–20

(14) When the worker changes position he/shemust check all energized lines within his/her reachagain and re-cover them with insulated equipmentwhen it is necessary before starting the new work.

3–10. Permanent and temporary groundA permanent ground is installed for safe operationof electrical power systems and devices. A temporaryground is used for electrical worker's safety whenengaged in electrical services.

a. Purpose of grounding. The purpose of agrounding is to limit the potential differences result-ing from fault conditions to values that are safe whentouched by a human body. This assures that a per-son in the vicinity of working area is not exposed tothe danger of critical electric shocks.

b. Definition of grounding terms.

(1) Ground: A conducting connection,whether intentional or accidental, between an elec-trical circuit or equipment and the earth or to someconducting body that serves in place of the earth.

(2) Grounded: Connected to earth or to someconducting body that serves in place of the earth.

(3) Effectively grounded: Intentionally con-nected to earth through a ground connection or con-nections of sufficiently low impedance and havingsufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent thebuildup of voltages that may result in undue haz-ards to connected equipment or to persons.

(4) Grounded conductor: A system or circuitconductor that is intentionally grounded.

(5) Grounding conductor: A conductor used toconnect equipment or the grounded circuit of a wir-ing system to a grounding electrode or electrodes.

(6) Equipment grounding conductor: The con-ductor used to connect the noncurrent-carrying metalparts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosuresto the system grounded conductor, the groundingelectrode conductor, or both at the service equipmentor at the source of a separately derived system.

(7) Grounding electrode conductor: The con-ductor used to connect the grounding electrode to theequipment grounding conductor, to the grounded con-ductor, or to both of the circuits at the service equip-ment or at the source of a separately derived sys-tem.

(8) Ground-fault circuit-interrupter: A device

intended for the protection of personnel that func-tions to de-energize a circuit or portion thereof withinan established period of time when a current toground exceeds some predetermined value that is lessthan that required to operate the overcurrent pro-tective device of the supply circuit.

(9) Ground-fault protection of equipment:A system intended to provide protection of equipmentfrom damaging line-to-ground fault currents by op-erating to cause a disconnecting means to open allungrounded conductors of the faulted circuit. Thisprotection is provided at current levels less thanthose required to protect conductors from damagethrough the operation of a supply circuit overcurrentdevice.

(10) Reference ground. A conducting bodysuch as the earth and the metal frame of a buildingto which an electric potential is referenced.

c. Types of grounding. Five types of groundingwill be described in the section: power system ground-ing, equipment grounding, electrostatic grounding,lightning protection grounding, and temporarygrounding.

(1) Power system grounding. Power systemgrounding has three main functions:

(a) Stabilize the system voltage to ground.

(b) Limit the overvoltages produced by light-ning stokes, line surges, or unintentional contact withhigher voltage lines.

(c) Facilitate the operation of overcurrentprotective devices such as fuses, circuit breakers,reclosers, and relays under ground-fault conditions.

(2) Equipment grounding. The main functionof equipment grounding is to provide a low imped-ance path for fault currents to flow back to the sourceto activate the operation of overcurrent protectivedevices under ground-fault conditions.

(3) Electrostatic grounding. The generation ofstatic electricity is not a hazard in itself. However,the hazard arises when an accumulated static elec-tric charge is subsequently discharged as a spark.Occupancies where flammable or explosive liquids,gases, dusts, or fibers are present need an electro-static grounding to reduce sparking.

(4) Lightning protection grounding. The esti-mated energy dissipated by a direct lightning strokeis approximately 300,000,000 Joules or equivalent

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–213–213–213–213–21

Table 3–6. Recommended Grounding Cable Sizes

Cable Sizesin Copper (AWG)

2/0

3/0

4/0

Fault time(cycles)

Maximum FaultCurrents in Amperes

1530

1530

1530

27,000 or less20,000

36,00025,000

43,00030,000

to l0,000,000,000 kWatts or 66 kG of TNT. The Na-tional Electrical Code (NEC) requires a separategrounding system be used for lightning protection.Power system grounding cannot be used as lightningprotection grounding.

(5) Temporary grounding. Temporary ground-ing is used for personal safety. A de-energized linelocated adjacent to an energized line is always sub-ject to both capacitive and magnetic coupling fromthe live line which can induce voltage in the de-en-ergized lines. In addition, accidental energizing ofthe lines, accumulation of static charges on the line,improper drain of power capacitors, or surge arrest-ers are other hazards for electrical workers. Tempo-rary grounding shall be applied to all lines, equip-ment, or apparatus to be worked on and remain un-til the work is completed.

(a) Installation. Before installing a tempo-rary ground, the line/equipment/device must betested for differential voltage. Proper clearance dis-tance and hot-line tools must be applied even whenthe line/equipment/device is de-energized. Temporarygrounding shall be installed at both ends of the line/equipment/apparatus to be worked on when it is nec-essary. All conducting objects such as static lines,transformer tanks, and platforms where the electri-cal workers stand shall be connected together toground to prevent dangerous touch and step voltage.

(b) Grounding conductors. Temporarygrounding conductors shall be of copper, rubber in-sulated, and flexible type. Aluminum grounding con-ductor is not permitted. Since the resistance of a con-ductor is proportional to its length, temporarygrounding conductors shall be kept as short as pos-sible. In general, grounding conductor length shouldbe limited to 30 feet. Sharp bending of groundingconductors should be avoided. The size of groundingconductors will depend on the maximum fault cur-rents available at the service location. Table 3-6 pro-vides recommended sizes for grounding conductors.Where two or more grounding conductors are usedthe maximum fault currents listed in this table canbe derated by a factor of 0.9. Temporary groundingconductors should have the same length if they areconnected at both ends of a line, piece of equipment,or apparatus.

(c) Grounding electrodes. The temporarygrounding electrode should be driven at least 6 feetinto ground. Where a permanent grounding electrodeexists, it can be used instead of a temporary ground-ing electrode. However, the permanent groundingelectrode should be checked for good condition be-fore use.

d. What needs to be grounded. All metal elec-trical component enclosures, maintenance vehicles,equipment, or devices located within or near work-ing areas shall be properly grounded to a commongrounding point.

(1) Electrical component enclosures. All metalenclosures for electrical components such as trans-formers, circuit breakers, switches, switchgear, andreclosers located within or near working areas mustbe properly grounded to a common grounding elec-trode (either temporary or permanent), through ap-proved grounding conductors.

(2) De-energized electrical components. All de-energized electrical components such as overheadlines, power transformers, and capacitors shall beproperly grounded to a common grounding electrode(either temporary or permanent), through approvedgrounding conductors. The grounding conductorsshall remain until the electrical work is completed.

(3) Aerial electrical grounding components.All aerial electrical grounding components such aslightning arrester grounding wires, metal pole, pole-mounted transformers grounding wires, and staticwires located near or within working areas must beproperly grounded to a common grounding electrode(either temporary or permanent) through approvedgrounding conductors.

(4) Maintenance vehicles. When maintenancevehicles such as a utility trucks or boom trucks areparked within minimum approach distances listedin table 3-8. The vehicles' chassis must also be prop-erly grounded to the common grounding electrode(either temporary or permanent) for the service areathrough an approved grounding conductor.

(5) Platform or boom where the worker standsshould be bonded to the lines/equipment/devices tobe worked on. An equipotential between the plat-form or boom where the worker stands and the line/equipment/device to be worked on must be checkedby an approved instrument before starting work. All

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–223–223–223–223–22

electrical conducting material within reach of workermust be covered with approved protective equipmentsuch as rubber blankets. Proper personal protectiveequipment such as rubber gloves and hard hats mustbe worn and proper tools should be used.

(6) Other equipment such as diggers and cranesshould be bonded, if practicable, to the commongrounding electrode (either permanent or tempo-rary).

3–11. General rules on electrical groundingThe following rules should be applied for the ground-ing of de-energized circuits:

a. All lines/equipment/apparatus regardless ofvoltage, should be considered as energized unlessshort-circuited and grounded with approved ground-ing devices.

b. The temporary grounding conductor should bechecked for proper size, good condition, and continu-ity before each use. When installing a temporarygrounding conductor the connection to ground shouldbe made before the connection to a de-energized line,device, or apparatus. A proper hot stick should beused when connecting a temporary grounding con-ductor to a deenergized line, piece of equipment orapparatus. When removing a temporary groundingconductor, the connection to a de-energized line/equipment/apparatus should be removed first. Thetemporary grounding conductor should remain untilthe job is completed and all energized lines or piecesof equipment have been cleared.

c. Where ground switches are installed they mustbe approved for use as a ground switch. Safety clear-ance should be applied when the normal operatingposition of a ground switch is changed.

d. When it is necessary to ground lines above en-ergized circuits the following preliminary precautionsmust be taken according to the voltages of the ener-gized circuits below the lines to be grounded:

(1) Circuits carrying voltages up to 15,000 voltsmust be covered with proper protective equipment.

(2) Circuits carrying voltages larger than15,000 volts must be de-energized.

e. When work is to be done on single-feed linesthe temporary ground should be installed betweenthe work and the source of power. In no case shouldthe work be done farther than one mile from the tem-porary ground.

f. When work is to be done on double-feed lines atemporary ground should be installed on each sideof the work. The distance between these two tempo-rary grounds should not exceed 2 miles.

g. When work is to be done on energized linesequipped with pole gaps in the ground wire, bridgesuch gaps with ground clamps or suitable gap bridg-ing devices before climbing to positions above them.

h. When electrical testing requires that circuitsor equipment not be grounded apply the protectivegrounds first and then temporarily remove them onlyfor the immediate period of the test. All disconnect-ing devices isolating the circuit or equipment mustbe locked or blocked open with correct lockout andtagout procedures.

i. When installing grounding equipment on woodpole lines, first sink a ground rod at least six feetinto earth. Attach the ground device securely to thisrod and then to the conductor keeping as far belowthe line conductor as possible. Be sure that your bodydoes not come in contact with ground wire or the lineconductor. Start at the lowest line conductor andground each line conductor working upwards andbeing sure to use the same ground rod for all lineconductors.

j. When installing grounding equipment at sub-stations, first securely attach the ground device tothe station grounding system and then to each lineconductor keeping as far away as possible and belowthe line conductors if practical. Be sure that yourbody does not come in contact with the ground wireor line conductor.

k. To remove the protective ground, first removethe ground device from each line conductor keepingas far away as possible and being sure your bodydoes not come in contact with the ground wire or lineconductor. Then remove the grounding device fromthe station grounding system.

3–12. Energized-line workEnergized line work is defined as work performedon a line, equipment, or apparatus which is connectedto an energized electrical power source or a storedenergy source that is not properly discharged. Syn-onyms of energized are live, hot, or alive.

a. Permitted work. No energized line work canbe performed unless it is permitted by the supervi-sor in order to maintain continuous power for a criti-cal load within an installation. The permission shouldbe based on the qualification of the workers and theavailability of the tools, equipment, and personal

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–233–233–233–233–23

protective equipment.

b. Requirements for energized line work. The fol-lowing requirements must be observed when per-forming energized line work:

(1) Workers must be–

(a) Specially trained and qualified for ener-gized line work.

(b) In good health.

(c) Not under influence of alcohol and drugs.

(d) Free of emotional, psychological~ and fi-nancial problems.

(e) Familiar with the safety procedures andapplication.

(f) Familiar with the use of tools and equip-ment. When a bucket or elevated platform is used,the worker should be familiar with the technique andoperation of the equipment or device.

(g) Familiar with the technique and appli-cation of the bucket

(h) Familiar with system/equipment/appara-tus to be worked on and elevated platform when it isused.

(2) Tools and equipment must–

(a) Be specially made for energized line work.

(b) Meet applicable acceptance test stan-dards.

(c) Have proper voltage class.

(d) Be cared for and maintained to meet in-service standards.

(e) Be visually checked for damage beforeeach use. Damaged tools or equipment must be re-moved from services immediately.

(f) Be tested in accordance with the Ameri-can Society for Testing and Material (ASTM) F18 byapproved laboratories or manufacturers every sixmonths.

(3) Low, medium, and high voltage services–

(a) Low voltage (600 volts and below). Except

for circuit switching or fuse replacement, services onenergized lines/equipment/apparatus operating at600 volts and below between conductors should notbe performed unless the following conditions are sat-isfied. Determining whether it is necessary to maincontinuous power to the critical loads. Preparing asafety plan for the job. This should also include anemergency escape plan. Having proper tools, equip-ment, and personal protective equipment available.Preparing a working method for the job. Checkingthe weather forecast. Never performing energizedline work when it rains, snows, sleets, or storms.Never performing work on a wet line or piece of equip-ment. Checking the working environmental condi-tions. Never performing energized line work whenthe surrounding atmosphere is full of dust or haz-ardous gases. Isolating the working area from en-trance of unauthorized persons with suitable barri-ers. Covering all other energized lines, ground wiresand metal objects within reach with approved insu-lating protective equipment such as rubber line hose,insulator hoods, and rubber blankets. Covering alljoints and loose ends of conductors with approvedelectrical tapes or insulated wire connectors.

(b) Medium voltage (600 to 17,000 volts).Except for circuitswitching or fuse replacement, ser-vices on energized lines or equipment operating at600 to 17,000 volts between conductors should notbe performed unless the conditions required for me-dium voltage systems are satisfied, plus the follow-ing. All energized line works must be performed un-der direct supervision of at least a qualified foreman.No electrical worker is permitted to work on anyenergized line/equipment/apparatus at a distanceshorter than that required by OSHA 29 CFR 1910 .269and 29 CFR 1926 (See paragraph 3–12b (4) and table3–7). Non-electrical workers, such as laborers, arenot permitted to approach any energized line, equip-ment, or apparatus which is located within the lim-its required by OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269 and 29 CFR1926 without proper personal protective equipment(See paragraph 3–12b (5) and table 3–8). Proper per-sonal protective equipment must be worn by all work-ers (including non-electrical workers) when ap-proaching an energized line, equipment, or appara-tus. At least two qualified electrical workers (includ-ing the foreman) must be present at the site for eachenergized line being worked. No energized line workcan be performed when the device to be worked on isnot located in a secure position or when the workeris standing on a moving or unstable platform. Do notraise, move, or lower any energized line more than18 inches.

(c) High voltage, (17,000 volts and above).Except for the circuit switching or fuse replacement,

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–243–243–243–243–24

Table 3–7. Minimum Safe Working Distances

Voltage Range(Phase-to-Phase)

50V to 1kV

1.1 to 15kV

15.1 to 36kV

36.1 to 46kV

46.1 to 72.5 kV

Phase to Ground

Space

2ft 1in (0.64m)

2ft 4in (0.72m)

2ft 7in (0.77m)

3ft 0in (0.90m)

Phase to Phase

Space

2ft 2in (0.66m)

2ft 7in (0.77m)

2ft 10in (0.85m)

3ft 6in (1.05m)

Minimum Safe Working distance

Table 3–8. Minimum Safe Approach Distances

Voltage to ground

-50kV or below

-for every 10 kV over 50kV

Distance

10ft

Add 4 inches to the initial 10ft

work on energized lines or equipment operating at17,000 volts and above between conductors is not rec-ommended for U.S. Army facility electrical workers.Maintenance on high voltage electrical distributionsystems (17,000 Volts and above) should be performedby qualified contracting personnel.

(4) Minimum safe working distances. Whenworking on energized lines the minimum safe work-ing distance must always be observed. The safe work-ing distance is defined as the distance between theworker's body and the energized part of the systemor equipment to be worked on, dependent on the volt-ages where the work is performed. Table 3–7 pro-vides the minimum safe working distances requiredby Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) 2g CFR 1910.269 and 29 CFR 1926.

(5) Minimum safe approach distances. Theminimum safe approach distance is defined as theshortest possible distance that an unqualified workersuch as laborer or groundman can approach withoutdanger. Table 3–8 lists the minimum safe approachdistances required by OSHA 29 CFR 1910.269 and29 CFR 1926.

c. Protective equipment voltage classes. Protectiveequipment classification is based on the use voltages.The equipment must pass the required proof voltagetests and be cared for to meet in-service standards.Table 3–9 provides the voltage class, color label code,and maximum use voltages for personal protectiveequipment. Under-rated protective equipment shouldnot be used. In addition, whenever a worker feels atingle when handling a tool, the service must be

stopped and the tools must be replaced. The tinglesignals that the protective equipment's insulating ca-pability has been reduced. The equipment must besent to approved laboratories or manufacturers fortesting before being reused.

d. Work methods. Work method is defined as themethod that can be applied for energized line workdependent on the nominal voltages of the system.Table 3–10 provides general energized line workmethods that most utilities companies use.

e. Categories of energized line work. The catego-ries of energized line work are based on the locationwhere the worker stands to perform the work.

(1) Workers at ground potential. Workers arelocated on the structure or platform supporting theline/equipment/apparatus which is directly connectedto ground via a proper grounding conductor. Properinsulating tools and personal protective equipmentshould be used.

(2) Workers at intermediate potential. Workersare isolated from the ground and grounded objectsby an insulating means such as an aerial lift or aninsulating ladder. Proper insulating tools and per-sonal protective equipment should be used.

(3) Workers at line potential. Workers arebonded to the energized line/equipment/apparatuson which work is to be performed and are insulatedfrom the ground, grounded objects, and other ener-gized devices that are at a different potential. Thisis commonly known as the barehand technique and

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–253–253–253–253–25

Table 3–9. Protective Equipment voltage Classes.

Maximum UseVoltages(Volts)

1,000

7,500

17,000

26,500

36,000

Class

0

1

2

3

4

Color Label

Red

White

Yellow

Green

Orange

Proof TestVoltages(Volts)

5,000

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

Min. distance Between collectorGauntlet and Glove Cuff (Inch/

mm)

1/25

1/25

2/50

3/75

4/100

Table 3–10. Energized Line Work Methods

Nominal Voltage Level

Up to 750 volts

750 to 7,500 volts

7,500 to 17,000 volts

17,000 to 36,000 volts

Work Method

Gloving by conventional work position or by structure mounting (ground potential)

Gloving from structure mounting or in a bucket (ground potential)

Gloving from electrically insulated bucket or platform (intermediate protection) or useof live-line tools from structure mounting or a bucket (intermediate potential)

Use of live line tool from an electrically insulated bucket (intermediate potential)

is not recommended for U.S. Army facility electricalworkers.

f. Safety preparation. Safety preparation is ofutmost importance in electrical work. The workermust be instructed in detail on safety measures andwork procedures. Personal protective equipment suchas rubber gloves, rubber blankets, and hot sticksshould be visually checked for damage and good con-dition. When an insulated bucket is used the workershould be thoroughly trained and familiar with theoperation of the bucket as well as cautions to be ob-served. Detail on insulated bucket operation is de-scribed in paragraph 4–11.

g. Safety check. Before starting work on an en-ergized line or equipment the following safety checksmust be performed.

(1) Check the voltage rating of the circuits tobe worked on.

(2) Check the clearance to ground of lines andother energized equipment.

(3) Check the voltage limitations of the bucketequipment.

(4) Check that the conductive shoes, clips, andother devices to be used to connect the bucket linerto the worker are in proper operating condition.

(5) Check that the circuit automatic reclosingdevices have been made inoperative while work isbeing performed.

(6) Check the condition of conductors, tie wires,and insulators to see if there are any signs of burns,cracks, damage, or defects.

(7) Check the voltage classes of personal pro-tective equipment. Wear personal protective equip-ment when required. Personal protective equipmenthaving lower voltage classes are not permitted at thesite.

(8) All energized conductors, neutral conduc-tors, ground wires, messengers, and guy wires in theproximity of the work site should be covered withapproved protective equipment. The covering shouldbe applied to the nearest and lowest conductor firstand removed in reverse order.

(9) Special care should be exercised when work-ing in the proximity of fuses, surge arresters, andlike equipment. Procedures may require that theybe bypassed for the duration of the work.

(10) Protective equipment should be removed atthe end of the working day.

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

3–263–263–263–263–26

4–14–14–14–14–1

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

CHAPTER 4

APPAREL, TOOLS, AND MATERIAL HANDLING

4–1. Electrical maintenance supportApparel, tools, and equipment which support elec-trical maintenance and the requirements for theirinspection and use are important. Always refer tomanufacturer's instruction for specifics.

4–2. Inspection of apparel, tools, and ma-terials handling equipmentAll tools and equipment used should be in compli-ance with OSHA requirements as a minimum. Main-tenance and testing requirements for personnel pro-tective apparel, tools, and materials will meet therequirement covered in TM 5-684/NAVFAC MO-200/AFJMAN 32-1082. To prevent the use of defectiveprotective devices, tools, and equipment, inspectionswill be made as indicated below. After proper inspec-tion the foreman shall, regardless of ownership, pro-hibit the use of equipment which is considered un-safe.

a. A careful initial inspection of tools brought onthe job by a new worker will be made by the supervi-sor or foreman. Use will be permitted only if the toolsare in good condition and conform to requirementsof this manual.

b. Weekly inspections of protective devices, tools,and equipment in active use will be made by the fore-man or a properly designated worker.

c. A thorough inspection of all protective devices,tools, and equipment will be made by the supervisorat least every 60 days.

d. Inspections of tools and equipment owned bya worker may be made by the supervisor or foremanat any time.

e. Before a job is started a competent person willinspect protective apparel, tools, ladders, scaffolds,ropes, and other materials handling equipment whichwill be used. All items must be suitable and in goodcondition.

4–3. Employee protectionAppropriate clothing is a basic requirement. Addi-tional protective apparel and accessories may be nec-essary depending upon the degree of hazard protec-tion required.

a. Suitable clothing. Clothing appropriate toweather conditions and to the job being done will beworn.

(1) Clothing do's.

(a) Always wear a top shirt or similar garmentwith sleeves. Long sleeves provide protection fromcold and sun. Loose sleeves must not be worn aroundmoving machinery.

(b) Long sleeves must be rolled down and but-toned while working on or near live equipment andelectric lines or high-temperature equipment. Gar-ments with exposed metallic fasteners should not beworn.

(c) Wear safety shoes or boots with nonslipperysoles and heels in good condition when handlingheavy loads such as poles, crossarms, apparatus,reels, and motors. Workers should buy safety-toeshoes since they cost no more and are just as ser-viceable and comfortable as any other good workshoe.

(d) Wear work gloves when handling rough orheated objects and while performing any other workwhere gloves will help in preventing hand injuries.Rubber glove protectors will not be used as workgloves.

(e) Wear approved goggles or head shields andgloves while operating welding equipment. Weargoggles that are appropriate for the type of electricor acetylene welding in progress.

(f) Wear nonconducting hard hats and safetyshoes or boots when working on overhead and un-derground systems. Wear insulating gloves where notprohibited for use with live-line tools. Wear helmetswhen working in congested areas, industrial facili-ties, missile silos, and other such areas. Also wearhelmets when working below other workers, or nearexposed energized lines. Helmets prevent head inju-ries caused by fixed obstructions, falling or flying ob-jects, or from direct contact with over-energized lines.Helmets will meet ANSI Z89.1 Class B requirements(20,000 volts ac tests for three minutes).

(g) Wear appropriate safety equipment when us-

4–24–24–24–24–2

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

ing a chain saw. Wear work gloves, work shoes witha safety toe, hard hat, and goggles with clear lenses.Industrial ear muffs or plugs shall be worn to pro-tect against the effects of exposure to excessive noise.

(h) Glasses must be fastened with a head orneck band or else restrained under safety goggles sothey cannot fall into energized circuits.

(i) Long hair must be secured to prevent en-tanglement in moving machinery.

(2) Clothing don'ts.

(a) Don’t wear rings, metal wrist bands, orwatch chains when working on energized electricalequipment.

(b) Where work is exposed to the hazards offlames or electric arcs do not wear clothing that, whenexposed to flames or electric arcs, could increase theextent of injury. Clothing made from acetate, nylon,polyester, and rayon, either alone or in blends, is con-sidered unsafe unless the fabric has been treated towithstand the conditions that may be encountered.

(c) Don't wear anything made of celluloid orother flammable plastic when working near electricarcs or open flames. This includes cap visors, col-lars, cuff protectors, and rims for eyeglasses orgoggles.

(d) Don’t wear your sleeves rolled up.

(e) Don't wear loose clothing, danglingsleeves, or neckties when working around movingmachinery.

(f) Don’t wear gloves while working on mov-ing parts in a machine shop as they are more easilycaught than your skin.

(g) Don’t wear garments equipped with metalslides or zipper fasteners, unless the fastener is ef-fectively covered, when working around energizedelectrical equipment.

(h) Don't wear shoes with heel or toe platesor hobnails.

b. Protective apparel. Basic requirements aredescribed herein. More specific requirements may bedescribed in other parts of this manual, wheredeemed necessary by your supervisor or foreman, andas recommended by the manufacturer of a specifictool or item of equipment.

(1) Eye and face protection. This protection isrequired wherever there is any exposure to eye orface hazards. Protection will meet requirements ofANSI Z87.1. Contact lenses are not to be consideredeye protection nor worn in environments where toxicor irritant substances could be trapped by the lenses.Eye and face protectors must be thoroughly washedwith soap and water before being worn by anotherperson. Eye and face protection must be worn when:

(a) Chipping, grinding, impact drilling, orbreaking concrete, brick, and plaster.

(b) Welding or helping in welding of any typeincluding thermite type welders. For electric arcwelding, only helmets that meet ANSI Z89.1 may beused. Goggles intended for acetylene welding mustnot be used for electric arc welding. Approved col-ored lenses may be needed. Welding curtains maybe needed where the public is exposed to welding arcs.

(c) Blowing out machines or equipment withcompressed air, blowing soot from boilers, and han-dling ashes in power plants.

(d) Cleaning or working with rusty materi-als or handling materials which are subject to flak-ing or scaling. Compressed air used for cleaning pur-poses must be less than 30 pounds per square inch(207 kilopascals) and effective chip guarding and pro-tection must be used.

(e) Blowing dirt or dust.

(f) Tinning or soldering lugs or large joints.

(g) Trimming thorny trees or using brushchippers.

(h) Riveting or chipping metal.

(i) Grinding, where no approved permanentguard is attached to equipment.

(j) Burning.

(k) Pouring molten metal, gunniting, or theuse of other hot or injurious substances.

(l) Handling chemicals, acid, or caustic, andin any other place where splashing may injure theeyes, except where complete head coverings are pro-vided. Chemical goggles are necessary.

(m) Anytime there is a possibility of an elec-trical flash.

4–34–34–34–34–3

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(2) Foot protection. Foot protection will meetANSI Z41 requirements where work activities aresuch as to be inherently dangerous to toes, such asjack hammers, tampers, post-hole diggers, and chainsaws. Special electrical requirements are as follows:

(a) Use conductive footwear where staticcharges can cause discomfort but in no case will theybe worn where workers are exposed to other shockhazards.

(b) Electrically insulated footwear should beused when a dangerous step or touch potential is ex-pected to occur.

(3) Respiratory protection. Before enteringinto an area where toxic/flammable gas/vapor maybe expected, respiratory protection must be worn.Federal regulations governing respirator protectionare contained in 30 CFR Part 11 and OSHA Safetyand Health Standards, 29 CFR 1910.134. The Na-tional Institute of Occupational Safety (NIOSH) ispart of the U.S. Department of Health and HumanServices and does not promulgate regulations. How-ever, NIOSH routinely makes recommendations re-garding the use of respirators, and specific respira-tors must be approved by Mine Safety and HealthAdministration (MSHA) and NIOSH. Respirator willalso comply with ANSI Z88.2. When work requiringa long stay inside a toxic/flammable gas/vapor areais expected, air ventilation must be provided. (Seeparagraph 7-4 for details.) Respirator use is subjectto the following requirements.

(a) The worker must have satisfactorily com-pleted a pulmonary function test, been trained andfitted for the type of respirator to be used, and beclean shaven where the respirator contacts the face.A worker's physical qualifications should meet therequirements of ANSI Z88-6.

(b) The space in question must be coveredby a confined space entry plan including emergencyrescue, air monitoring equipment to be used, fre-quency of air testing, ventilation equipment, proce-dure to minimize atmospheric hazards, and type ofrespirator to be used.

(c) Air purifying respirators of the canistergas mask type are generally used for emergency airpurifying. Chemical cartridge respirators are usedmore often for nonemergency situations or for longor repeated exposures. Particulate filter respiratorsare used for most types of particles. Air-supplied res-pirators are used in oxygen-deficient atmospheres.

(d) Misuse of respirators may cause prob-

lems. Sometimes filter respirators for particulatesare incorrectly used. Sometimes chemical filteringrespirators are used when atmosphere-supporting orself-contained breathing apparatus is required. Somesubstances require protection both from damage tothe respiratory system and systemic injury throughthe skin.

(4) Respirator use rules. Check with the facil-ity environmental coordinator for the approved res-pirator to be used based on the following rules.

(a) Canister type respirator (gas masks)must be worn when entering tanks, rooms, or con-fined spaces where there is a suspicion or possibilitythat poisonous gases may be present. Whenever agas mask is used, even for a short length of time, thecanister must be replaced immediately after use witha new canister.

(b) Chemical cartridge respirators must beworn when obnoxious odors are encountered or whenpainting in confined places where the exposure doesnot justify the use of a canister type gas mask.

(c) Filter type respirators must be worn whendoing spray painting in the open, or when blastingor metallizing, or when working in any dust ladenplaces where no harmful gases are encountered.

(d) Air purifying type respirators must notbe depended upon in places where there is insuffi-cient oxygen in the atmosphere to support life. Ven-tilate the area or use supplied air respirators.

(e) Dust type respirators must be used whenusing compressed air for cleaning machinery or busstructures, where there is wood dust in the air, andother such dusty areas.

(f) Gas masks and chemical cartridge respi-rators must be inspected and sterilized after use andbefore being worn by another person. Filter type res-pirators will be issued for individual use only.

(5) Hearing protection. Hearing protection isrequired when noise levels exceed those given in table3–1. Hearing protectors must have been tested inaccordance with ANSI S3.19 as a basis for themanufacturer's noise attenuation data. The types ofear protectors are plug, cap, and muff.

(a) The plug type is inserted into the ear ca-nal. The cap type fits over the ear canal opening. Themuff type covers the entire ear. Each type has ad-vantages and disadvantages and because of comforttheir acceptance will vary from worker to worker. It

4–44–44–44–44–4

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

is recommended all types be available and that eachof these types must be custom fitted by experiencedpeople to assure their effectiveness.

(b) Plugs or caps, when properly fitted, re-duce noise to the ear by 25 to 30 decibels in the highermore harmful frequencies. The better type of ear muffcan reduce noise by 35 to 45 decibels. Combinationsof the types may give slightly more protection buttotal attenuation never exceeds 50 decibels.

(6) Protective clothing. Conform to clothing do'B and don'ts given previously and to the followingspecifics:

(a) Wear flash resistant nonsynthetic cloth-ing when working on or near energized equipment.

(b) Wear appropriate gloves, welders glovesfor welding, leatherpalm gloves for handling sharp-edged materials, and electrical rubber gloves for workon energized circuits. Additional protective clothingmay be mandated for these tasks such as welders'aprons and chaps, depending on the work.

(c) When working near traffic areas wearsafety color fluorescent clothing.

(d) Wear U.S. Forest Service-approved pro-tective chaps when using chain saws.

(7) Skin protection. Skin must be protectedfrom toxic or irritant substances where these occuror where there is a possibility they can occur in theworkplace. Prevent injury by wearing suitable pro-tective clothing. Protective ointments, prompt appli-cation of proper cleaners, and appropriate first aidremedies should be on hand. Be sure emergency-typewater sources are on hand for irritant substanceswhich could come into contact with the body, such asan acid spill in a battery room.

(8) Responsibility. Personal protective ap-parel is worn when it is impossible or impracticableto eliminate a workplace hazard. Supervisors shouldensure that workers are fully trained not only in theirproper use and selection, but why they are needed.Foremen are responsible for ensuring that personalprotective apparel is worn, but workers should beprovided with the most comfortable apparel avail-able. Inspection and maintenance of equipment is ajoint supervisor, foreman, worker responsibility. Theworker should be familiar with the requirements ofacceptable equipment. The foreman should train theworker in the maintenance/inspection requirementsand equipment should be inspected by both beforebeing put into use. The supervisor is responsible for

seeing to the repair or replacement of unacceptableequipment.

4–4. Office safetyThe fundamentals of safety and elimination of haz-ards (chap 3, paras 3–2 and 3–3) will eliminate mostsafety problems. Common sense should be used. Thefollowing rules are given because they are so oftenviolated.

a. Drawers of desks and file cabinets will be keptclosed when not in use. Only one drawer of a file cabi-net will be pulled out at a time in order to avoid over-balancing, unless the cabinet is securely fastened tothe wall or to other cabinets.

b. The floor will be kept free of tripping hazardssuch as telephone cords, electric extension cords, andpaper cartons.

c. Broken glass and other sharp objects will notbe placed in waste paper containers. Sharp-pointedpins will not be used for fastening paper together.Staples, paper clips, or other approved fasteners willbe used.

d. Volatile substances will be used only in wellventilated areas. Toxic substances will not be per-mitted in office areas during working hours of anyoffice personnel.

e. Workers will not attempt to clean, oil, or ad-just any machine that is running. If the machine isnot equipped with a starting switch that can be lockedin the “off'” position, it will be disconnected from itspower source. Unsafe electrical cords or faulty elec-trical equipment should be disconnected from thepower source and tagged.

f. Boxes and chairs will not be used in place ofladders. Do not sit on the edge of a chair. Do not tiltback when sitting in a straight chair.

4–5. Field and shop safetyMaintain all rules given for office safety and use onlyequipment approved and authorized by the supervi-sor for use in the workplace. Workers are respon-sible for the safe condition of the equipment they use.Unsafe equipment must be taken out of service andreported to the foreman or supervisor. People, tools,and equipment may need to be temporarily supportedbefore work can be accomplished. All tools must behandled with respect and knowledge of the damagetheir uncontrolled or incorrect use can cause, eitherby direct action in some cases or indirectly by degra-dation of their protective abilities in other instances.

4–54–54–54–54–5

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Materials must be lifted when moved in an approvedmanner. Special precautions are required for sub-stances which are hazardous if incorrectly handled.

4–6. Support safetyNo worker or any material or equipment can be sup-ported without a determination as to the adequacyof the support and to its proper fastening in place.The use of ladders, scaffolds, and boatswain’s chairsas temporary work structures can result in injuriesif safe practices are not followed.

a. Ladders. Ladders will conform to OSHAStandards (29 CFR 1910.25). Workers will never usea ladder for any purpose other than as a work plat-form, and only when using small hand tools or han-dling light material. Never use a ladder as a plat-form for lifting heavy materials or when substantialexertion is required.

(1) Always inspect the ladder carefully beforeusing it. Ensure that side rails, spurs, shoes, rungs,extension hardware, and rope are all in good condi-tion, with no splinters, cracks, looseness, or otherdefects. Never use a defective or improvised ladder.Defective ladders will be destroyed or cut to a smallersize.

(2) Before placing new wooden ladders in ser-vice give each ladder two coats of boiled linseed oilto which Japan dryer has been added, applied hot,and then varnish. To refinish ladders, follow the sameprocedure after they have been cleaned and sanded.Wooden ladders will never be painted so as to ob-scure a defect in the wood; only a clear, nonconduc-tive finish will be used.

(3) Portable metal ladders or wooden ladderswith metal side reinforcement or metal rungs willnot be used in the vicinity of energized electrical cir-cuits. (Exception: Such ladders may be used in spe-cialized work, at high-voltage substations, wherenonconductive ladders might present a greater haz-ard and proper precautions are taken when used insuch specialized work.) Any such ladders used forother authorized purposes will be legibly marked“Caution-Conductive Ladder-Do Not Use AroundElectrical Equipment.” Wire truss portable ladderswill never be used.

(4) Always use ladders that are long enoughfor workers to reach their work when standing onthe third or fourth rung from the top of a straightladder, or the second or third step of a stepladderwhich is over 5 feet (1.5 meters) in length. Place aladder so that the horizontal distance from the baseof the ladder to the vertical plane of the support is

approximately onefourth the ladder length betweenpoints of support. Where the ladder extends abovethe top support, ladder length to the top support onlyis considered.

(5) All portable ladders will be equipped withnonslip bases and care will be exercised in placingthem. Blocking or lashing or having the ladder heldby someone will be required, as indicated below when:

(a) Work is done from a stepladder where theworker must stand 10 feet (3 meters) or higher.

(b) It is necessary to work with both handsfrom a straight ladder where the worker's feet aremore than 10 feet (3 meters) from the ground.

(c) The ladder is used on slippery or hardsurfaces.

(d) The worker is in such a position on theladder that force is exerted sideways or outwardly.

(e) The top of the ladder cannot be placedsquarely against a flat riding surface.

(f) The distance from the base of the ladderto the surface against which it is leaning is not atleast approximately one-fourth the length of theladder.

(6) Ladders placed near doors in passagewaysmust be protected against being struck by the dooror by traffic.

(7) Remove climbers before working on ladders.

(8) Face a ladder when ascending or descend-ing, and take each step in order.

(9) When climbing a ladder never carry any-thing which will interfere with the free use of bothhands for holding onto the ladder.

(10) When standing on a ladder, do not lean toone side while working unless the ladder is ad-equately secured.

(11) Do not place ladders over machines withexposed moving parts.

(12) Lower all ladders before the users leavethe job, unless the ladder is located in an enclosedspace not accessible to the public, in which case lashthe ladder securely.

(13) Workers will belt off to a ladder whenever

4–64–64–64–64–6

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

both hands must be used for the job or there exists apossibility of the worker falling from an elevated po-sition.

(14) When dismounting from a ladder at an el-evated position (as at a roof) the worker will ensurethat the ladder side rails extend at least 3 feet (0.9meters) above the dismount position, or that grabbars are present.

(15) Comply with the following straight ladderrequirements.

(a) Straight ladders will not be climbed be-yond the third step from the top.

(b) Straight ladders will not be spliced to-gether to form a longer ladder.

(c) A straight ladder will not be placedagainst an unsafe support.

(d) Only one person should be on a straightor extension ladder at a time.

(16) Step ladders will not be used as straightladders and workers will observe the following in-structions.

(a) Do not stand on the top platform of step-ladders unless it is designed to be stood on.

(b) Fully spread stepladder legs and lock thespreading bars in place.

b. Scaffolds. Scaffolding will be of sufficientstrength and rigidity to support four times the weightof the workers and material to which it will be sub-jected; that is, it will have a safety factor of at leastfour. Construction details of all scaffolding will com-ply with OSHA Standards (29 CFR 1910.28).

(1) Temporary construction platforms 6 feet(1.8 meters) or more above ground must have a stan-dard railing and toe boards on all open sides as perOSHA 29 CFR 1910.23. All wood used for scaffoldingor trestles must be sound, straight grained, and freefrom large knots and other imperfections. Warpedor twisted planking must not be used. Scaffolds mustbe well braced and fully capable of supporting boththe human and tool loads to be imposed upon them.All decking must be securely fastened. No part ofthe scaffold must be removed or weakened while thedecking is in place. All scaffolds except swing scaf-folds will rest on a suitable footings and will standlevel. Movable scaffolds will have their casters orwheels locked to prevent movement. Swinging scaf-

folds must be constructed to prevent excessive tilt-ing.

(2) Platforms or scaffolds on which personnelare to work must be inspected by a competent per-son before they are used and as often thereafter ascircumstances require.

(3) Scaffolds will not be moved without first re-moving all workers, loose tools, materials, and equip-ment resting on the scaffold deck.

(4) Always observe the following rules when re-quired to work on a scaffold.

(a) Never work on a scaffold that is coatedwith hazardous materials (such as ice, snow, mud,grease, or other slippery materials).

(b) Never work on a scaffold that is less than18 inches (450 millimeters) wide.

(c) Never work on a scaffold that is not leveland stable.

c. Boatswain's chair. A boatswains chair will beconstructed to meet the following minimum safetyrequirements:

(1) The chair seat will be not less than 12 by24 inches (300 by 600 millimeters) and of 1-inch (25millimeters) thickness. The seat will be reinforcedon the underside to prevent the board from splitting.

(2) Two seat slings of a fiber rope approved foruse near electric lines will be of at least 5/8 inch (18.9millimeters) diameter and reeved through the fourseat holes so as to cross each other on the undersideof the seat.

(3) Seat slings will be of at least 3/8-inch (9.5millimeters) diameter wire rope when a worker isconducting a heat producing process such as gas orarc welding.

(4) The worker must be protected by a safetylife belt attached to a lifeline. The lifeline will be se-curely attached to substantial members of the struc-ture (not to a scaffold), or to securely rigged lines,which must safely suspend the worker in case of afall.

(5) The tackle will consist of correct size ballbearing or bushed blocks and properly spliced 5/8-inch (18.9 millimeters) diameter first-grade approvedrope.

4–74–74–74–74–7

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(6) The roof irons, hooks, or the object to whichthe tackle is anchored will be securely installed. Tie-backs when used will be installed at right angles tothe face of the structure and securely fastened.

4–7. General tool safetyUse proper tools suitable for the job in progress. Toolsmust be approved and authorized by the supervisorof the electrical section and meet OSHA require-ments. Inspect them for use every day. Follow thesafe practices and calibration intervals outlined bythe manufacturer. Keep unguarded sharp-edged orpointed tools out of your pocket. Cutting tools will beproperly sharpened and provided with cutting edgessuitably guarded when not in use. Never lay toolsdown when working in an elevated position unlessthe tools are protected from falling. Use containersfor tools being transported or carry them in a toolbelt. Tools will be fitted with proper handles whererequired. Broken wooden handles will be replaced.Do not tape or wire lash defective wooden handles.Metal tools will not be used near energized equip-ment. An eye wash/shower should be readily avail-able whenever there is exposure to tools which usewelding materials, acids, solvents, and other chemi-cal substances.

a. Measuring tools. Never use metal tapes orcloth tapes having metal reinforcing or metal strandswoven in the fabric, brass-bound rules, metal scalesand gages, or wire-bound hose and rope, when work-ing on or near energized electrical equipment or lines.Always use wooden rulers or nonmetallic tapes whentaking measurements near electrical equipment orconductors.

b. Nonpowered hand tools. Never use impro-vised tools and always store tools not in use on toolboards or in appropriate containers. Never use handtools on moving machinery unless directed to do soby your foreman.

(1) Always assume a safe working positionwhen using wrenches to avoid injury due to thewrench slipping. Do not use shims to make a wrenchfit. Do not use wrenches with sprung or damagedjaws. Do not use pipe to extend a wrench handle foradded leverage unless the wrench was designed forsuch use.

(2) Always use adjustable wrenches with theirjaw openings turned toward the direction of pull.

(3) Never use tools, such as cold chisels, thathave mushroomed heads.

(4) Never use tools with multiple cutting edges,

such as files and rasps, unless they are equipped withsuitable handles.

(5) Never use a hammer on highly temperedtools, such as files or drills, because flying metal chipsmay cause injury.

(6) Never use screwdrivers with metal shanksextending through the handle when working on ornear energized equipment.

(7) Chisels, drills, punches, ground rods, andpipes will be free of burrs. Items which are held byone person and stuck by another will be held withsuitable holders. A holder will be held by a worker ina position which avoids the danger of being struckby a tool being used by another worker.

(8) The insulation on hand tools will not be de-pended upon to protect users from shock unless de-signed for energized work.

(9) Axes, picks, and sledge hammers will beonly used where there is sufficient room to swing thetools and will conform to the following.

(a) Never use axes as mauls or sledges.

(b) Where double-bit axes are provided,workers must be given special instructions in theirsafe use.

(c) Always carry an axe with the head for-ward, by holding the handle next to the head. Nevercarry any type of axe or brush hook on your shoul-der.

(d) Keep cutting edges of axes and pickssharp.

(e) Handles must be smooth without splits,and securely fastened to the head.

(f) Always place axes and picks transportedin trucks so as to prevent injuries to workers.

c. Pneumatic and hydraulic tools. Use thesetools with caution. Eye protection, foot protection,and other protective devices will be worn when theiruse could reduce the possibility of injury. Tools willbe operated only by competent persons who have beentrained in their use.

(1) Never exceed the manufacturers recom-mended operating pressures for pneumatic and hy-draulic equipment, hoses, valves, and fittings.

4–84–84–84–84–8

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Figure 4–1. Grounding path.

(2) Always verify that pneumatic or hydraulictools used on or around energized lines or equipmentare equipped with nonconducting hoses. The hosesshould have adequate strength for the operating pres-sure in use. Always use hoses, valves, and fittingsthat are pressure-rated by the manufacturer. Neveruse hose that has any kind of defect.

(3) Never lay pneumatic or hydraulic hose overladders, steps, scaffolds, or walkways where the hosecould become a tripping hazard. Never use hoses forhoisting or lowering tools.

(4) Pneumatic tools will never be pointed at an-other person.

(a) Always install safety clips or retainers onpneumatic-impact tools to prevent dies and tools frombeing accidentally expelled from the barrel.

(b) All hoses exceeding 1/2-inch (12.7 milli-meters) inside diameter will have a safety device atthe source of supply or branch line to reduce pres-sure in case of hose failure or disengagement of aconnection.

(c) Before making adjustments or changing/disconnecting air-tools (unless equipped with quick-change connectors), the air will be shut off at the airsupply valve ahead of the hose. The hose will be bledat the tool before breaking the connection.

(d) Compressed air will not be used for clean-ing purposes unless the pressure has been reducedto less than 30 pounds per square inch (207kilopascals) and then only with effective chip guard-ing and personal protective equipment.

(e) Compressed air will not be used to blowdust or dirt from clothing or exposed skin.

(5) Always use hydraulic fluid that meets therequirements of U.S. Bureau of Mines, Schedule 30.

d. Electrically powered portable tools. Electri-cally powered tools can be classified as portable cord-connected type or self-contained battery type.

(1) Portable cord-connected power tools.Safety rules for portable cord-connected tools mustbe followed for both the tool and the cord connection.All electrically-powered tools, except those poweredby selfcontained batteries or which are labeled asdouble insulated, must have a line cord with agrounded conductor and a polarized grounding plug.The receptacle to be used for the tool must begrounded also to make the conductor and grounding

plug effective. All tools used outdoors or in damp orwet locations will be protected by a ground fault cir-cuit interrupter. The rules for grounding portableequipment, systems, and methods of accomplishmentare outlined in the NEC. The object of grounding isto ensure a metallic connection of low resistance di-rectly from metal surfaces of electric tools to ground.When insulation fails, metal surfaces are energizedby coming into contact with bare portions of the elec-tric conductor. The current will flow directly throughthe grounding system to ground and the potentialdifference between the electric tool surfaces andground will be very low (usually less than 5 volts).The low resistance path to ground facilitates the op-eration of the overcurrent devices in the circuit. Fig-ure 4–1 indicates that if the grounding path is bro-ken (or if a grounding cable is not used) current froma defective tool will pass directly through the personto ground.

(a) Electrically-powered hand tools which arecord connected to any source of power must not beused when any worker or nearby worker can evenminimally be in contact with water.

(b) Electrical tools will not be used wherethere is a hazard from flammable vapors, gases, ordusts.

(c) Extension lamps are portable power toolsand should be connected to only porcelain, composi-tion, or rubber-covered sockets that incorporate abulb guard. The shock hazard of extension lamps canbe eliminated through the use of small portable trans-formers which reduce the input power to 6 volts.

(2) Cord connections. Cord connections should

4–94–94–94–94–9

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

preferably be provided as a part of the portable powertool. Where additional cords are necessary for exten-sion to a receptacle they will match or exceed therating of the portable device cord and carry an Un-derwriters Laboratories' label.

(a) Cords should be inspected frequently fordefects that may become a shock or short circuit haz-ard. Implement an assured equipment groundingprogram to verify cord and plug equipment is in-stalled as per 29 CFR 1926.404.

(b) Rubber-sheathed cord should be usedwith portable electric tools and with extension lampsused inside boilers, tanks, or other grounded enclo-sures.

(c) Special types of cords should be consid-ered for use in areas where oils and solvents arepresent.

(d) Cords with a green-covered groundingconductor and polarized plug and receptacle shouldbe used with portable electric equipment for the pur-pose of positively grounding the frames of tools whichare not double insulated.

(e) Handle cords with care so as not to dam-age the insulation by dragging them over sharp edgesor by rolling heavy trucks or materials over them.

(f) Always maintain plugs and cords in a ser-viceable condition.

e. Machine tools. Rules for machine tools applywhether tools are permanently connected or portable.

(1) Work space. Always provide bins or con-tainers for all scrap material, and racks or bins forstock materials. Always keep work benches in goodcondition and free from scrap material.

(2) Belts. Always keep exposed belts andgears covered with safety guards to prevent injury.Never use your hands to shift moving belts.

(3) Machinery. Never work on any machinerybelt or the machinery until a danger tagout (see para-graph 3–8) is attached to primary operating controls(such as start switch, governor, throttle, clutch leveror other such device) used to set the machine in mo-tion. The foreman must verify that all operating le-vers, valves, and switches are blocked open and pro-vided with tagouts to avoid inadvertent startup ofequipment under repair. Safe Clearance and dangersigns must be displayed as required.

(a) Always make arrangements with the cog-nizant supervisor to lock equipment out of servicebefore starting repairs on steam, air, hydraulic, ormotor-driven equipment such as conveyors, crush-ers, or cranes.

(b) Always take a safe and secure positionnear machinery to avoid falling, leaning, or contact-ing moving or live parts.

(c) Never take a position on, in, or near anyequipment at rest; this will avoid injury in the eventthe equipment is started up.

(d) Never remove machine guards except forinspection or repair to the guards or machinery.Never remove guards while machine is operating.Always replace guards immediately after work iscompleted.

(e) Never clean shafts and other parts of ro-tating machinery, except commutators and collectorrings, while the machinery is operating.

(f) Always remove crank handles from hand-operated winches when force is not being applied tothe handle.

(4) Cutting tools. Always remove the chuckwrench from the chuck as soon as a drill is installedor removed. Always remove the cutting tool drill froma machine as soon as work is finished.

(5) Lathe or shaper work. Always wear ap-proved safety glasses or goggles when doing lathe orshaper work to avoid eye injuries.

(6) Grinding wheels. Always wear close-fit-ting goggles when grinding if a glass safety screen isnot installed. The tool work rest should have a maxi-mum opening of one-eighth inch (3.17 millimeters)and the tongue should not exceed 0.25 inch (6.35 mil-limeters). Grinding wheels and rings should be in-spected and tested before using to make sure theyare not damaged.

(a) Never stand directly in front of a grind-ing wheel because there is always the danger of awheel breaking.

(b) Always set the grinding rests close to thewheel for small work to prevent the work from beingcarried down between wheel and rest.

(c) Do not use the side of an ordinary wheelfor grinding. The face of the wheel must be properlydressed at all times.

4–104–104–104–104–10

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(d) Never drive a wheel faster than the speedrecommended by the manufacturer.

(e) Always hold articles you are grinding orbuffing so that your hands will not be injured if any-thing slips.

(7) Drill presses. Insure that the drill pressis securely fastened to the floor or bench top. Alwaysfasten or clamp the work securely when using a drillpress, unless the work is large enough to provideholding leverage. A secure hold is especially impor-tant when reaming or when working on brass.

(a) Never force the drill or feed it too fast.

(b) Always remove metal chips with a stiffbrush or piece of wood. Never use your hand or fin-gers.

(c) Always use drills that are properly sharp-ened.

f. Powder-actuated tools. Only those workerswho are qualified by training in their operation mayuse these tools. Operators and assistants using thesetools will wear eye protection (safety eye goggles and/or face shields) and a safety hat. Tools may never bepointed at any person. Powder actuated tools can notbe used in an explosive or flammable atmosphere.

(1) Explosive charges must be carried andtransported in approved containers. Tools will notbe loaded until just prior to the intended firing. Onlycartridges with an explosive charge adequate for thejob and with proper penetration can be used. Toolsand cartridges will never be left unattended.

(2) Prior to use, the operator will inspect thetool to determine that it is clean, that moving partsoperate freely and the barrel is free from obstruc-tions, and ensure that the protective shield is prop-erly attached to the tool.

(3) In case of a misfire, the operator will holdthe tool in place for 30 seconds, before trying to oper-ate the tool a second time, and then wait another 30seconds before trying if there is a second misfire. Mis-fired cartridges will be disposed of properly. (Placein a metal container and return them to your super-visor.)

g. Welding and cutting tools. Welding and cut-ting will be performed only by experienced and prop-erly trained persons. Before welding or cutting isstarted, the area will be inspected for potential firehazards. Suitable fire extinguishing equipment shall

be made available in the work area. Rules and in-structions supplied by the manufacturer or affixedto the machine will be followed. Additional person-nel shall be assigned to guard against fire duringand after the performance of hot work.

(1) Use adequate local exhaust ventilation andor respiratory protection plus other personal protec-tive equipment as needed.

(2) Protect combustibles and flammables in thework area from sparks, slag, and heat produced bythe operation. Also take precautions to protect otherpersons from the sparks and slag. Make a fire checkof the area about 30 minutes after work is stopped.

(3) Where combustible materials such as pa-per clippings or wood shavings are present, the floorwill be swept clean for a radius of 35 feet (10.5 meters)before welding. Combustible floors will be kept wetor protected by fire-resistant shields. Where floorshave been wet down, personnel operating arc-weld-ing or cutting equipment will be protected from pos-sible shock.

(4) When welding or cutting in elevated posi-tions, precautions will be taken to prevent sparks orhot metal from falling onto people or flammablematerial below.

(5) Protect electrical cables and gas hoses fromphysical damage, and from being a tripping hazard.Welding hose will not be repaired with tape.

(6) An electric welding machine will be prop-erly grounded.

(a) When electrode holders are to be left un-attended, the electrodes will be removed and theholders will be so placed or protected that they can-not make electrical contact with workers or conduct-ing objects.

(b) When the welder must leave his/her workor stop work for any appreciable length of time, orwhen the welding machine is to be moved, the powersupply switch to the equipment will be opened.

(7) Gas welding machines will be provided withapproved backflow check valves in both gas and oxy-gen lines.

(a) Use friction lighters or stationary pilotflames, not matches or cigarette lighters, to light atorch. Remove matches and butane cigarette light-ers from your pockets and keep them away fromwelding and cutting operations.

4–114–114–114–114–11

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(b) Use gas cylinders whose contents areclearly labeled and protect them from excessive heatand accumulations of snow and ice.

(c) Keep valve protection caps on cylindersexcept when the cylinders are secured in place on awelding cart or connected to a manifold.

(d) Store oxygen cylinders at least 20 feet (6meters) away from fuel gas cylinders and flammablematerials. Store cylinders in an upright position andsecure them to prevent them from falling over.

(e) Keep grease and oil away from oxygen sys-tem valves, fittings, regulators, and gauges.

h. Painting. Painting may be done with a brushor using spray guns as applicable to the work. Therequirements given in this paragraph apply to touch-up or outdoor painting for electrical maintenance,not for industrial painting operations. Review thematerial safety data sheet (MSDS) for the materialbeing used and follow the precautions given therein.Paint only in areas approved as suitable for handpainting or for hand and spray painting as applicableto the equipment to be used. Observe the followingrules when painting:

(1) A brush used near live parts energized atabove 600 volts must be attached to an approved in-sulated stick.

(2) Mix and apply paint in adequately venti-lated areas or use appropriate respiratory protection.

(3) Keep flammable paint away from heat, openflames, smoking, and another ignition sources. Donot smoke within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of any paint-ing operation.

(4) Use a good grade of linseed oil or alcohol toclean paint from hands, face, or body; then wash thor-oughly with soap and water. Never use gasoline, tur-pentine, or thinners.

(5) Always clean paint from your hands beforeeating or placing your hands on unprotected parts ofyour body.

(6) Never allow paint to collect and remainaround or under fingernails after the work shift.

(7) Never go near open flames while wearingpainting clothes or carrying paint rags or waste.

(8) Never store rags, waste, burlap, and cloth-ing used in connection with painting in the same

room or cabinet with paint materials.

(9) Never chew tobacco or gum while mixing,brushing, or spraying.

(10) When using paint-spraying equipment:

(a) Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

(b) Keep the spray gun pointed away fromyourself and others.

(c) A metal object being sprayed should besupported in a manner to avoid insulating it fromconductive surfaces, because paint spraying producesstatic electricity.

(d) Make sure that excessive air pressure isnot delivered to the spray gun. The pressure shouldonly be sufficient for the job at hand.

(e) Do no spray painting near live wires un-less barriers are placed between the spray gun andlive parts.

i. Solvents. The following requirements apply totouch-up or outdoor use of solvent for electrical main-tenance and not for industrial solvent treatment.Solvents used inside must be approved for use in thearea where applied. Use only approved solvents forwhich MSDS are available and follow all MSDS pre-cautions. When a solvent is required to remove oil orgrease, a petroleum distillate of the safety type suchas Stoddard solvent should be used.

(1) In special cases where a strong chlorinatedsolvent is required, the room must have positive ven-tilation.

(2) The use of carbon tetrachloride, alone or inmixtures, for cleaning purposes is prohibited.

(3) Ventilation must be provided in areas wheresolvents are used in order to avoid fires, explosions,or endangering workers.

(4) Protective equipment, such as gloves,goggles, and aprons, should be worn when workingwith solvents, to prevent irritation to the skin andeyes.

(5) Avoid wetting clothing with solvents; cloth-ing that has become wet with solvent should be re-moved.

4–8. Materials handling safetyThe following requirements apply to manual lifting,

4–124–124–124–124–12

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Figure 4–2. Correct lifting instructions.

use of hand trucks, and handling and storage of ma-terials requiring special precautions.

a. Manual lifting. Manual lifting of material ac-counts for such occupational injuries as strains,sprains, fractures, and bruises. These injuries arecaused, primarily, by improper lifting, carrying tooheavy a load, incorrect gripping, failing to observeproper foot or hand clearances, and failing to use orwear protective equipment. There are five steps tosafe lifting (see figure 4–2). If there is any doubt asto your ability to lift or lower the load without strain,confer with the foreman directions the lifting.

(1) Inspect objects for slivers, jagged edges,burrs, or slippery surfaces, and wear gloves whenneeded to protect your hands. Keep hands and glovesfree of oil and grease which might interfere with get-ting a firm grip on the object being lifted.

(2) Workers will not attempt to lift beyond theircapacity. Caution will be taken when lifting or pull-ing in an awkward position. Never carry a load thatobstructs the vision. Obtain assistance in liftingheavy objects or use hoists or cranes.

(a) When two or more persons carry a heavyobject that is to be lowered or dropped, one persononly will give signals for the group.

(b) When two or more persons are carryingan object, each worker, if possible, should face thedirection in which the object is being carried.

(3) Accessories, such as chains, falls, blocks andtackles, and jacks and hoists, should be used wher-ever practical instead of lifting by hand. Inspect alllifting devices in accordance with TB-43-0142.

(a) Never load a jack in excess of its rating.Make sure the footing for a jack is substantial.

(b) Always center the jack properly under theload, and if there is danger of the head slipping, puta wooden block on top of the jack to help keep it inposition. Place the jack so there will be an unob-structed swing of the handle to prevent injury to theknuckles.

(c) Never leave the handle in the socket of ajack standing under load.

(d) Never load hoists and load binders in ex-cess of their rating. If the strain requires the use ofhandle extensions on come-alongs (Coffing) or chainfall (Blackburn) hoists, they are overloaded.

(4) When lifting transformers and other equip-ment, slings of suitable strength must be used. Placeslings so as to avoid cutting them on sharp edges ofequipment. Rope slings of suitable strength may bepermitted for lighter work if the rope cannot be cutby sharp edges or projections. Only rope slings mustbe used around energized equipment where the useof metal slings would create a hazard.

(5) Heavy timbers, steel members, and otherheavy objects should, if practical, be lowered intoplace and not dropped.

(6) Do not throw tools and materials up or downto workers on a different level. Raise or lower themby handlines or in canvas tool bags or buckets.

(7) When tools or material are raised or low-ered, stand clear at all times and avoid coming di-rectly under any load until it is properly placed andsecured.

(8) When tools and materials are raised or low-ered, prevent their coming in contact with energizedwires or equipment.

b. Hand and forklift trucks. Manually-operated

4–134–134–134–134–13

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

hand trucks and machine operated forklift trucks willbe used as appropriate for lifting heavier or largerobjects.

(1) The operator will always face in the direc-tion of travel.

(2) Equipment will always be operated at a safespeed for existing conditions.

(3) Before moving the equipment, the opera-tor will make sure that no person or objects are inthe path of the truck. Clearances in all directionswill always be checked, particularly overhead clear-ances.

(4) Sudden stops which might spill the load willbe avoided.

(5) All loads will be securely fastened or safelypositioned to prevent tipping or falling.

(6) When using hand trucks, you should ob-serve the following:

(a) Keep the center of gravity of the load aslow as possible.

(b) Place the load so the weight is over theaxle and not the handles, so it will not slip, shift, orfall off.

(c) Keep the truck downhill from you whengoing up or down an incline.

(7) Fork lift trucks will be operated only by au-thorized personnel who are qualified and trained intheir use. Operators will comply with the following.

(a) Brakes and controls will be tested priorto use. Equipment with faulty brakes or mechanicalor electrical defects will not be operated. Needed re-pairs will be reported immediately.

(b) Do not add fuel with the engine running.Equipment with internal combustion engines will notbe operated in enclosed areas for prolonged periodsof time as the safe levels of carbon monoxide in theenclosure may be exceeded.

(c) Lift bars on fork lift trucks which are mov-able or replaceable will be held firmly in place by aproper securing pin. Jury-rigged devices, such asusing a threaded bolt, will not be permitted. Onlyattachments provided by or approved by the manu-facturer may be used. Such attachments will be prop-erly secured. Improvised methods will not be used.

(d) When picking up a load, forks will be setsquarely and as far as possible under the load. Loadsshould not be raised or lowered while traveling. Loadswill not be suspended or swung over other persons.No one should be allowed to stand or walk under el-evated forks. Loaded or empty, forks should be car-ried as low as possible, but high enough to clear un-even surfaces.

(e) On inclines and declines, all types ofloaded lift trucks will be driven with the load on theupgrade side of the driver.

(f) No one will be allowed to ride the fork lifttruck other than the operator, except when seats areprovided for this purpose.

(g) A fork lift truck is considered unattendedif the operator is 25 feet (7.5 meters) away or thetruck is not in his/her view. When unattended, theload engaging means will be fully lowered, controlswill be neutralized, power will be shut off, and brakesset. Wheels will be chocked when the truck is parkedon an incline.

c. Storage and handling of materials subject tospecial precautions. Hazardous materials subject toEPA requirements such as asbestos, PCB, and SF6gas are covered in chapter 3, paragraph 3–4. Mate-rials that require more than normal handling andstorage precautions because of possible adverse ef-fects from mishandling or improper storage are re-quired to conform to the following:

(1) Flammable liquids. Conform to applicabledirectives and regulatory agency requirements re-garding the handling and storage of flammable liq-uids:

(a) Flammable liquids will be stored,handled, and transported only in approved contain-ers, and extreme care must be used at all times toprevent ignition.

(b) When pouring or pumping flammable liq-uids from one metallic container to another, electri-cal contact will be maintained between the pouringand receiving containers.

(c) Leaky flammable liquid furnaces ortorches will not be used.

(2) Poisons and pesticides. Before handling poi-sonous substances, workers will thoroughly famil-iarize themselves with the hazards involved and uti-lize all necessary precautions, protective devices, and/or equipment. Particular care will be exercised by

4–144–144–144–144–14

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

persons with open sores. Workers will not handlefood, drink, and tobacco with such poisonous sub-stances on their hands. Handling of pesticides willbe done only by personnel certified by the applicableagency.

(3) Explosives. Explosives will not be handledby facility workers. Any requirement must be pro-vided by contract personnel licensed in accordancewith regulatory agency requirements. This require-ment does not apply to cartridges used in powder-activated tools, which are exempt from regulatoryagency provisions but do required qualified training.

(4) Acid and caustics. Acids and causticsshould not normally be handled by electrical work-ers except for use in battery maintenance which iscovered in paragraph 5–13.

(5) Compressed gases - general. Portable gascylinders or containers, whether full or empty, willbe handled with extreme care and will be stored in asuitable, well-ventilated location, properly securedin a vertical position with each container's valve capin place, except when in actual use and connected toa device. Do not drop, jar, or expose to temperatureextremes and keep away from sparks and flames.

(a) Cylinders will have their contents prop-erly identified.

(b) Cylinders will not be rolled and will notbe lifted by the valve or valve cap; a suitable cradleor other device will be used.

(c) Cylinders will not be placed where theymight become part of an electric circuit or within 5feet (1.5 meters) of an electrical outlet.

(d) A flame will never be used to detect gasleaks. A leaking cylinder will not be used but will betaken outdoors away from sources of ignition. Notifyyour foreman of the need for disposal.

(e) A sign "Danger-no smoking, matches, oropen lights" or equivalent wording will be conspicu-ously posted in rooms or at entrances to areas wherecompressed gas is used or stored.

(f) Workers will never force connectionswhich do not fit nor will they tamper with the safetyrelief devices of cylinder valves.

(g) No attempt will be made to mix gases ina cylinder or to transfer gas from one cylinder toanother.

(h) The recessed top of cylinders will not beused as a place for tools.

(i) Compressed gases will not be used from acylinder or cylinder manifold or other container un-less an acceptable pressure regulating device is in-stalled on the cylinder, valve, or manifold. Regula-tors will not be required with gases used from cylin-ders through torches or other devices which are notequipped with shutoff valves. All connections to pip-ing, regulators, and other appliances will be kepttight to prevent leakage. When cylinders or contain-ers are not in use, always keep valves tightly closed.

(j) Compressed gas cylinders will be trans-ported so as to prevent them from falling, rolling, orcreating a tripping hazard. They will be stored and/or-transported upright. Unless they are secured ona suitable truck, rack, or container provided for por-table service; regulators will be removed and valveprotection devices installed before cylinders aremoved.

(k) Before the regulator is removed from acylinder, the valve will be closed and all pressurereleased from the regulator.

(l) Gas cylinders will not be stored inside anyoccupied building. Separate storage buildings or shel-tered storage areas will be used.

(m) Oxygen cylinders in storage will be sepa-rated from other gas cylinders or combustible mate-rials (especially oil or grease) by a minimum distanceof 20 feet (6 meters) or by a 5 foot (1.5 meters) highnoncombustible barrier. Oil, grease, or similar ma-terials will not be allowed to come in contact withany valve, fitting, regulator, or gage of oxygen cylin-ders.

d. Cleaning operations. Use only approved sol-vents and compressed air reduced to a pressure ofno more than 30 pounds per square inch (207kilopascals).

4–9. RiggingVarious types of fiber rope, wire rope, chains, rig-ging hardware, or combinations are used to lift ma-terial and equipment. The safe use of rigging devicesrequires that the combination of rope and rigginghardware must have adequate lifting capacity rat-ings and, when applicable must be approved for suchuse near any energized work. Refer also to CIE-4.Only qualified workers can install, maintain, and/orrepair ropes and chains.

a. Fiber rope. Fiber ropes may be made of syn-

4–154–154–154–154–15

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682Table 4–1. Approximate safe working loads of new three-strand fiber ropes used in a straight pull.

in

1/4

3/8

1/2

5/8

3/4

7/8

1

Nominal diameter Polypropylene Polyester Nylon Polyethylene(mm)

(6.4)

(9.5)

(12.7)

(15.9)

(19.1)

(22.2)

(25.4)

lbs

250

500

830

1,300

1,700

2,200

2,900

(kg)

(113)

(227)

(376)

(590)

(771)

(998)

(1,315)

lbs

300

700

1,200

1,900

2,400

3,400

4,200

(kg)

(136)

(318)

(544)

(862)

(1,089)

(1,542)

(1,905)

lbs

300

700

1,250

2,000

2,800

3,800

4,800

(kg)

(136)

(318)

(567)

(907)

(1,270)

(1,724)

(2,177)

lbs

250

500

800

1,050

1,500

2,100

2,500

(kg)

(113)

(227)

(363)

(476)

(680)

(953)

(1,134)

Table 4–2. Moisture regain of fiber ropes

Type

Polypropylene

Polyethylene

Polyester

Nylon

Moisture regain percent

0

0

0.4

4.5

thetic materials or natural vegetable fibers.

(1) Materials. Synthetic fibers used for ropeare nylon, polypropylene, polyester, and polyethyl-ene. Natural fibers used are manila and sisal. Natu-ral fiber ropes should not be used because they havehigh moisture absorbing factors and low loadingstrengths. Synthetic ropes' size to strength charac-teristics are given in table 4–1. Values are given ininches (in) and pounds (lbs) first and in parenthesessecond in millimeters (mm) and kilograms (kg). Thesevalues are based on new ropes under static testingwithout consideration of operating conditions. Asafety factor should always be used in determiningactual safe lifting capacity.

(2) Construction. Twisted rope is usuallymade of three or four strands. There are also braidedropes and parallel ropes. Each require different meth-ods of splicing which are beyond the scope of thismanual. Refer to TM 5-684 and the ''Lineman's andCableman's Handbook'' for knot and splice data.

(3) Conductivity. No rope should be consid-ered an insulator because all ropes contain moistureas part of the fiber makeup. The moisture regain offibers is given in table 4–2. When rope becomes wet,dirty, or contaminated, its electrical conductivity isincreased. Even insulators conduct electricity if notkept clean or dry. Only polypropylene and polyethyl-

ene ropes which are specially treated to resist wet-ting are recommended for use near energized con-ductors.

(4) Safety (design) factor. Different ropes havebetter characteristics for shock and sustained load-ings. The minimum safety factor recommended is 6for polypropylene and polyethylene and 9 for polyes-ter or nylon rope.

(5) Care of rope. Rope should be cared for asfollows.

(a) Never overload a rope or drag it overrough or sharp objects. The given safety factor isbased on the minimum breaking strength of the rope.In figuring safety factor, make allowance for the ageand condition of the rope.

(b) Be careful in making a rope fast. Avoidshort acute bends over unyielding or sharp-edgedsurfaces. Never drag rope over the ground, over sharpobjects, or over another rope. If rope is installed onan object with sharp corners, pad the rope.

(c) A rope with a kink or hockle (reverse kink)in it should be removed from service. Wet ropes areespecially likely to kink.

(d) When rope is not in use, store it properlyin a cool dry area away from direct sunlight to pre-vent shrinkage. Be sure it is free from mechanicalinjury, heat, or excessive dryness. Keep loose coilsoff the floor and hung on a wooden peg.

(e) Never use rope around storage batteries.

(f) A wet rope may absorb moisture, andtherefore, it may not be as strong as a dry rope. Ex-ceptions are polypropylene and polyethylene ropes

4–164–164–164–164–16

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

which do not absorb moisture. Polyester and nylonropes, when they are properly finished with a ma-rine overlay, could provide an increase in strengthwhen wet. Never use a wet or frozen rope next to anenergized line. Never permit a wet rope to freeze.

(g) Always finish (serve) the ends of fiber ropeto prevent unraveling.

(h) Keep ropes clean. Dirt on the surface ofand/or embedded in the rope acts as an abrasive onstrands and fibers.

(i) The ends of all ropes should be preventedfrom fraying by first whipping and serving and thenmelting. Avoid excessive stretching of nylon rope bysurging loads to prevent surface abrasion.

(6) Inspection of ropes. Rope should be in-spected each time it is used.

(a) Examine carefully for cuts, worn spots,acid stains, and burns. The outward appearance of arope is often deceiving.

(b) Rope must be free from metal strands andcores, solder, oil, and grime. An approved safety hookis the only metal permitted on a handline.

(c) A splice in a rope must be free of all metalobjects, tapes, or knots. Splicing must be done in ac-cordance with the “Splicing Handbook” from theCordage Institute and must be tested and approvedby the supervisor or foreman before usage. Splicingmay reduce the safe working load down to 80 or 90percent of a new rope. A hitch in the rope may re-duce the rope strength to 45 percent and should notbe used. Only a bowline knot which may reduce therope strength to 60 percent can be used.

(d) A tackle must always be used with a blockor load connected. If a tackle is to be used intermit-tently, it should be pretested before each use, as asafety precaution, with three times the load which itwill carry.

(e) Before using fiber ropes as slings to liftloads, the capacity of the ropes should be determinedfirst. When different types of ropes, chains, and rig-ging hardware are used in combination, the overallcapacity is the capacity of the weakest item.

(7) Use of rope. Be aware of the following re-quirements when using rope.

(a) The elasticity and stretch of syntheticrope can cause a delay in response when lifting or

dropping loads. Different fiber compositions will havedifferent elongation curves.

(b) Use caution when the load is under ex-cessive tension and then suddenly released. Thewhipping action is very dangerous to personnel andequipment in the area.

(c) Never use wet rope on or near energizedconductors.

(d) Carry handlines up poles or structuresuncoiled and attached to the back of your body belt.Be sure handlines do not catch on pole or structureattachments.

(e) The safe loads for rope indicated in table4-1 must not be exceeded.

(f) Avoid sudden jerks or strains.

(g) Reverse rope ends periodically, BO all sec-tions of it will receive equal wear.

(h) For hoisting work, where protection of aworker's life is paramount, use a safety factor threetimes as great as the safety factor previously given.

(i) When bent around a rounded surface theradius around which the rope is bent should be notless than six times the rope diameter, preferably eighttimes.

(j) Use pulleys, when necessary to preventchaffing ropes, while lifting or lowering loads.

b. Wire rope. Increased fatigue life and resis-tance to abrasion and abuse are the main reason forthe use of wire rope in slings and other hoisting de-vices. Such rope is usually made of wire strands laidtogether and twisted over a fiber-saturated and lu-bricated core. The core cushions and preserves theshape of the rope and lubricates the wires. Use wirerope in accordance with the recommendations of themanufacturer and do not exceed the safe workingload required by ANSI B30.9, based on the breakingstrengths of ASTM A 603. The safety factor for wirerope can be from 3 to 7 depending upon consider-ation of loads; acceleration; rope speed; the number,size, and arrangements of sheaves and drums; andthe length of the rope.

(1) Care of wire rope. Never overload wirerope beyond its safe load.

(a) Never store wire rope or put any strainon it because it may cause a kink.

4–174–174–174–174–17

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(b) Never store wire rope by winding it tootightly.

(c) Never store wire rope in a wet or dampstorage area.

(d) When wire rope is cut, finish (serve) thecut ends with soft iron wire to keep the wires fromunraveling.

(e) Lubricate wire rope as needed and neverremove the rope’s internal lubricant. Use a jet of airor steam, or wire brush the ropels exterior prior toapplying the manufacturer's approved lubricant.

(2) Inspection of wire rope. Never use a wirerope without wearing gloves for safety. Check wirerope for broken strands by running a cloth over therope to find the broken strands. Immediately removewire rope from service and discard if it has one ormore of the following defects:

(a) Corrosion of the wire rope or attachmentscaused by acids or alkalies. (Rust film, which hascaused pitting or loss of less than one-third of theoriginal diameter of outside individual wires can beremoved and the wire can be cleaned, relubricated,and reused.)

(b) One or more broken wires in the valleybetween two adjacent strands, six randomly distrib-uted broken wires in one rope lay, or three brokenwires in one strand in one rope lay.

(c) Wear or scraping of one-third the origi-nal diameter of outside individual wires.

(d) Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or anyother damage resulting in distortion of the wire ropestructure.

(e) Evidence of heat damage.

(f) End attachments that are cracked, de-formed, or worn.

c. Use of wire rope. Handle wire rope in accor-dance with the following requirements.

(1) Never apply sudden or abrupt loads on wirerope. When handling extra heavy loads never fastenrope over sharp edges or corners without padding.

(2) Wire rope should never be coiled or uncoiledlike fiber rope. Always wind around sheaves or drumsand avoid rope twist and spreading of coils and cross-ings or overlapping on sheaves or drums.

(3) Use sheaves and drums with grooves slightlylarger than the wire rope to avoid pinching and bind-ing the strands and to permit the rope to adjust it-self to the curvature. However, the grooves shouldnot be so much larger that the rope will flatten.

d. Chains. Chains have an advantage over wireropes in that they are not as easily damaged. Alwayscheck that chains are an approved type for lifting.Only alloy steel chains for rigging that have beenmarked and maintained in conformance with themanufacturer's guidelines may be used. Do not usethese chains for tying down equipment.

(1) Care of chains. Never overload chains be-yond the safe loads indicated by the manufacturer'srecommendations and do not exceed the safe work-ing loads of ANSI B30.9 based on the breakingstrengths of ASTM A 906.

(a) Never store chains in a wet or damp stor-age area.

(b) Normalize or anneal chains periodicallyas recommended by the manufacturer.

(c) Hooks, rings, links, couplings, or other at-tachments, when used with steel chains, must havea rated capacity at least equal to that of the chain.

(2) Inspection. Inspect chains used in load-carrying service before each initial use and weeklythereafter.

(a) Remove chains from service when any ofthe following defects are evident: nicked or crackedlinks, lifted linkwelds, more than 10 percent elonga-tion of any link or section, or when wear of 20 per-cent of the diameter of any link has occurred.

(b) Chains are to be repaired by the manu-facturer or in strict accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations.

(3) Use of chains. Never use chain slings thatdo not have permanently affixed durable identifica-tion stating size, grade, rated capacity, and slingmanufacturer.

(a) Avoid sudden or abrupt application ofloads to chains. When handling extra heavy loads donot fasten chains over sharp corners or edges with-out padding.

(b) Chains are conductors; they must neverbe used near live conductors or energized equipment.

4–184–184–184–184–18

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(c) Never shorten or lengthen a chain by useof kinks or bolts.

e. Slings. Determine the capacity rating of fi-ber rope, wire rope, chains, rigging hardware, or com-binations thereof before using them to lift loads. Re-fer to the requirements of ANSI B30.9. For individualitems used in combination, the safety factors are notcumulative, and the overall capacity rating of thecombination is the capacity of the weakest item. Theparticular application or service factors may furtherreduce the capacity rating. The sling angles affectsthe capacity of each leg by the sine of the angle tothe horizontal. Never provide a sling angle of lessthan 30 degrees. This reduces the capacity by 50percent (sine 30 degrees = 0.5).

(1) Store slings so they will not be damaged.

(2) Protect in-use slings from being damagedby sharp, rough, or square corners. Use chafing pro-tection between rope and edges. Sharp bends (whichshould be avoided to protect the sling from beingdamaged) also need chafing protection.

(3) Remove damaged slings from use and de-stroy them.

(4) To prevent sling-related accidents, do thefollowing:

(a) Do not use knots or other devices toshorten slings.

(b) Keep sling legs free of kinks.

(c) Keep the load within the sling's capacity.

(d) Balance loads supported by baskethitches to prevent slippage.

(e) Securely attach the slings to the load.

(f) Keep suspended loads clear of obstruc-tions.

(g) Keep people clear of suspended loads andloads about to be lifted.

(h) Keep your hands and fingers from be-tween the sling and the load while the sling is beingtightened around the load.

(i) Place blocks under the load so slings maybe removed without damaging them.

f. Rigging hardware. Do not use job-fabricated

hardware unless it has a been tested and certifiedby a rigging engineer.

(1) Use forged-alloy or stainless steel hoistinghooks (excluding sling and choker hooks) that arestamped with their safe working load and areequipped with safety keepers, swivels, and headacheballs (minimum tension devices).

(2) Use forged-alloy or stainless steel shacklesof the locking or secured-pin type for hoisting. In-spect them before use and discard any that are wornin the crown or pin by more than 10 percent of theoriginal diameter. Do not replace shackle pins withbolts.

4–10. Heavy lifting equipmentCranes, winches, and derricks are used on vehiclesfor hoisting heavy equipment, as opposed to aeriallifts or buckets used to elevate personnel to job-sitesabove ground.

a. Operation of equipment near energized elec-trical facilities. Equipment and workers must takeinto account the safe operating requirements for suchan operation.

(1) When mobile hoists, cranes, or similar liftingdevices are used near energized lines or equipment,the lifting device will be properly grounded, or insu-lated, isolated, or considered as energized.

(2) Unqualified workers will not set up nor oper-ate any piece of equipment where it is possible tobring such equipment or any part thereof within theminimum safe approach distances specified in table3–2. This applies to any medium- or high-voltage (600volts and above) line or installation unless the lineis de-energized, a clearance is secured, and the lineor equipment is grounded. To maintain the distancesspecified in table 3–2, the worker may:

(a) Install adequate guards or barriers, or

(b) Use a full-time signalman to warn the op-erator when approaching minimum distances.

(3) Qualified electrical workers will complywith the requirements for aerial lifts.

b. Equipment operation. Only authorized per-sons will be permitted in the cab or on the equip-ment. Only those designated persons who are trainedand qualified will operate the hoisting equipment.

(1) Always include the weight of auxiliary load-handling devices (such as buckets, magnets, load

4–194–194–194–194–19

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

falls, slings, and hooks) as part of the load. Followthe manufacturers operating and maintenance pro-cedure and never overload the lifting device. Alter-ations and modifications are to be made only by au-thorized persons.

(2) Only one person is permitted to give ordersto the lift operator during the entire movement ofthe object. The operator, however, will obey a "Stop"signal given by anyone.

(3) Inspect the vehicle before use each day andhave defects corrected. Also have the equipmenttested and certified annually. For the first lift of eachday, the load will be test-lifted and the brakes checked(load lifted several inches and then tested) and thefollowing minimum checks will be made.

(a) Check all control mechanisms for any pos-sible maladjustment which could interfere withproper operation.

(b) Check all safety devices for any malfunc-tions.

(c) Check for any deterioration or leakage inthe air or hydraulic system.

(d) Check for the adequacy of hooks, slings,and load attachment devices.

(e) Check for the presence of a fire extin-guisher which is at least a U/L-rated 5BC (2.5-poundor 1.1-kilogram capacity approved for Class B and Cfires) in accordance with ANSI/UL 711.

(4) Operators will not leave their position atthe controls of lifting devices while the load is sus-pended.

(5) No person will be permitted to ride on thehook, sling, or load of any hoisting equipment. Noworker will be under a suspended load or inside theangle of a winch line. No worker will stand or worknear a chain or rope under tension unless the natureof his/her work requires it.

(6) With every load change, the slings and bind-ings will be checked and will be readjusted as neces-sary to ensure safety and stability. All slings andother fittings will be of sufficient strength and of theproper type so as to be safe for their intended use.

(7) Observe the following precautions when us-ing a winch and hoisting cable.

(a) Because of the heavy nature of work done

with winches, it is essential that all moving parts bekept thoroughly lubricated. The rated capacity ofboth winch and cable must never be exceeded.

(b) Use chain or wire rope when pulling poles,stumps, trees, or when lifting objects with a winchand derrick.

(c) When using a winch and cable for any pur-pose, always pass the cable over a sheave. Never runthe cable over the end of a truck without using asheave.

(d) Never use winch cable over sheaves orbars to raise or lower a load which should be handledwith a derrick.

(e) All personnel should be instructed tostand clear of a cable when it is under strain.

(f) Kinks in winch lines should be avoided toprevent weakening at kink points.

(g) Do not use your hands to guide orstraighten winch cables on a drum while the drumis in motion.

(h) Wear leather work gloves when handlingwinch cable.

(i) Discard defective cable.

(j) Do not use winches with mechanical de-fects.

(k) Do not use bent or broken A-frames orbooms, or those which have cracks in the steel.

(8) Observe the following precautions for erect-ing derricks.

(a) To safely assemble a derrick, the truckshould be as nearly level as possible. For safety, twoor more workers are required to remove any leg ofthe derrick from the truck. For larger derricks addi-tional workers may be required. Support the boomwhen extending it so that the telescopic ends cannotbe pulled out too far causing a section to drop. Donot permit anyone to stand under the derrick whileit is being raised or lowered, nor at other times, un-less a stiff leg or safety cable is connected. To reduceexcessive strain on tires, springs, and chassis, sup-port the truck by placing the derrick supporting jacksin position whenever possible. It may be necessaryto block the rear wheels if the truck is not standingon level ground.

4–204–204–204–204–20

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(b) To protect the public and workers, do notoperate trucks on streets, roads, or highways withthe derrick assembled, unless the truck is towing atrailer, and then only for short distances and underthe immediate direction of a designated worker, whowill give undivided attention to the movement.

4–11. Aerial liftsAerial lifts are electrically isolated buckets, whichare often referred to as insulated buckets. Aerial liftsmust be constructed to meet ANSI/SIA A92.2. Fol-low aerial lift rules as given to meet facility andOSHA safety practices.

a. Operation of aerial lift equipment near ener-gized electrical facilities. Electrical workers may op-erate aerial lift equipment between the distancesspecified in table 3–2 and the distances specified intable 3–3 if all of the following conditions are met:

(1) A job hazard analysis has been done.

(2) A hot line order has been obtained.

(3) The activity is being performed under thedirect supervision of a designated person who istrained and competent in this type of work.

(4) The distances between energized parts andthe aerial lift equipment is monitored while the aeriallift equipment is being moved and/or repositioned.

(5) The aerial lift equipment is grounded.

(6) No one, other than necessary workers, arewithin 10 feet (3 meters) of the equipment during itsoperation. Workers are to perform their work whileon the equipment; not from a position on the ground.

b. Types of aerial lifts. Aerial lifts include thefollowing types of vehicle-mounted aerial devicesused to elevate personnel to job-sites aboveground.

(1) Extensible boom platforms.

(2) Aerial ladders.

(3) Articulating boom platforms.

(4) Vertical towers.

(5) A combination of any of the above.

c. Manufacture. Aerial equipment may be madeof metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP),or other material; may be powered or manually op-erated; and are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or

not they are capable of rotating about a substantiallyvertical axis. Aerial lifts may not be “field modified''unless such modification is certified by the manu-facturer.

d. OSHA aerial lift rules. OSHA mandates thefollowing rules.

(1) Aerial ladders will be secured in the lowertraveling positions by the locking device on top ofthe truck cab and the manually operated device atthe base of the ladder, before the truck is moved forhighway travel.

(2) Lift controls will be tested each day priorto use to determine that such controls are in safeworking condition.

(3) Only authorized persons will operate anaerial lift.

(4) Belting off to an adjacent pole, structure,or equipment while working from an aerial lift willnot be permitted.

(5) Workers will always stand firmly on thefloor of the bucket and will not sit or climb on theedge of the bucket or use planks, ladders, or otherdevices for a work position.

(6) A body harness will be worn and a lanyardattached to the boom or bucket while working froman aerial lift.

(7) Boom and bucket load limits specified bythe manufacturer will not be exceeded.

(8) The brakes will be set and outriggers, whenused, will be positioned on pads or a solid surface.Wheel chocks will be installed before using an aeriallift on an incline, provided they can be safely in-stalled.

(9) Generally, an aerial lift truck will not bemoved when the boom is elevated in a working posi-tion with workers in the bucket.

(10) Articulating boom and extensible boomplatforms, primarily designed as personnel carriers,will have both platform (upper) and lower controls.Upper controls will be in or beside the platformwithin easy reach of the operator. Lower controls willprovide for overriding the upper controls. Controlswill be plainly marked as to their function. Lowerlevel controls will not be operated unless permissionhas been obtained from the worker in the lift, exceptin case of emergency.

4–214–214–214–214–21

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(11) Climbers will not be worn while perform-ing work from an aerial lift.

(12) The insulated portion of an aerial lift willnot be altered in any manner that might reduce itsinsulating value.

(13) Before moving an aerial lift for travel, theboom(s) will be inspected to see that equipment isproperly cradled and outriggers are in the stowedposition.

e. Other general rules. Observe the followingsafety rules.

(1) The operating and maintenance instructionmanuals issued by the manufacturer will be followed.

(2) Shock loading (sudden stops or starts) ofthe equipment will be avoided.

(3) When a boom must be maneuvered over astreet or highway, necessary precautions will betaken to avoid accidents with traffic and pedestri-ans.

(4) The operator will always face in the direc-tion in which the bucket is moving and will see thatthe path of the boom or bucket is clear when it isbeing moved.

(5) Workers will not ride in the bucket whilethe truck is traveling. (Exceptions: Workers may ridein the bucket for short distances at the work loca-tion if the bucket is returned to the cradled positionfor each move and the workers face the direction oftravel.)

(6) When workers are in the bucket of an aeriallift, the emergency brake of the vehicle will be set.Wheel chocks or outriggers will be used to provideadded protection. When the vehicle is on an incline,wheel chocks will be used regardless of whether ornot outriggers are used. The truck should sit approxi-mately level when viewed from the rear.

(7) Workers will not stand or sit on the top oredge of the bucket or on ladders placed in the bucket.Workers' feet will be on the floor of the bucket theentire time they are in it.

(8) When two workers are in the bucket orbuckets, one of them will be designated to operatethe controls. One worker will give all signals, whichwill be thoroughly understood by all persons con-cerned.

(9) When two workers are working from thebucket, extreme care will be taken to avoid oneworker contacting poles, crossarms, or othergrounded or live equipment while the second workeris working on equipment at a different potential.

(10) In no case will more than one energizedconductor or phase be worked on at a time.

(11) The aerial lift with workers and equipmentwill maintain proper clearances from unprotectedenergized conductors. Safety rules governing the useof hot-line tools, rubber goods, personal protectiveequipment, and general safe practices apply to workdone from aerial buckets.

(12) When using pneumatic or hydraulic toolsin a bucket, the operator will be sure that hoses orlines do not become entangled in the operational con-trol B .

(13) Bucket care will be provided the followingrequirements.

(a) Remove water accumulation from thebucket. The bucket interior must be dry during use.

(b) Wipe exposed insulation of bucket andboom clean with a dry cloth at the start of each day.

(14) Always inspect a bucket daily before anywork is done.

(a) Inspect visible hydraulic hoses for chaf-ing and then inspect hoses and fittings for leaks withthe system under pressure.

(b) Inspect wire cables for frayed strands andsecure attachment.

(c) Inspect the bucket safety belt assemblyfor good condition.

(d) Verify that the most recent dielectric testfor the bucket and arm occurred within the last 6months.

(e) Examine the exposed insulation of an in-sulating boom for cuts, unusual discoloration, orother signs of damage prior to use or at any timedamage is suspected.

(f) Inspect the remaining portions of booms,sheaves, cables, fittings, bucket, and bucket liner fordefects.

f. Insulated buckets. Insulated buckets are re-

4–224–224–224–224–22

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

quired for work in accordance with table 3–5. An in-sulated bucket of an aerial lift is provided with a con-ductive bucket liner.

(1) The liner, usually a metallic screen, mustcompletely surround the bucket walls and floor toprovide electrostatic shielding for the occupant. Toolsand other equipment carried in the bucket must bestowed carefully to avoid damaging the liner.

(2) Insulated buckets will be subjected to anarm current (dielectric) test. This test will consist ofplacing the insulated bucket in contact with an en-ergized source equal to the voltage to be worked uponfor a minimum 3 minute period. The leakage cur-rent will not exceed one microampere per kilovolt ofnominal line-to-line voltage. Arm current tests shouldbe made at the start of each day, each time a highervoltage is to be worked, and when changed condi-tions indicate a need for additional tests. Keep arecord of all tests. Work operations will be suspendedimmediately upon any indication of a malfunctionin the equipment.

g. Maintenance. Perform periodic maintenancein accordance with the manufacturer's operationsand maintenance manual. Perform electrical testson insulation no less than every 6 months.

4–12. Live-line tools, electrical safety tools,and specialty electrical toolsThese are tools manufactured for use by electricalworkers to provide protection (and thus safety) whenworking on energized (live-line) equipment such aslines and bus bars, on de-energized and groundedlines, or for other maintenance activities.

a. Live-line tools. Live-line or hot-line tools in-sulate the worker from the energized line. They arealso known as hot sticks since they are in the form ofan insulated stick or pole. If there is a loss of insula-tion the worker's safety is compromised. Live-linetools are not only used to work on energized lines;they are also used to safely de-energize and groundlines for de-energized line working. The followingparagraphs discusses their terminology and use.

(1) Terminology. ANSI/IEEE 935 is the guideto be used for tool terminology. It does not give de-tailed definitions but does provide pictorial descrip-tions of the various components used. Another use-ful tool reference is “Hot Sticks - a Manual on High-Voltage Line Maintenance.”

(a) Tool material. Tools are constructed ofinsulating material and/or conductive material.Metal conductive material is used primarily for me-

chanical strength. The conductive material may becoated or covered with insulating material to pro-tect the worker from electrical contact and to avoidflashovers.

(b) Difference between insulated and insu-lating tools. An insulated tool is made of conduc-tive material and then fully or partly covered by in-sulating material, while an insulating tool is essen-tially made entirely of insulating material.

(2) General hot-line tool types. ANSI/IEEE935 covers 10 different types of equipment used inlive-line working.

(a) Insulating sticks. Insulating sticks con-sist of hand sticks used only to operate on a line orequipment by a worker. They may be fitted withsplines at their ends to permit other tool attachments.Support sticks are used to hold or move conductors.

(b) Universal tool fittings. These tool fit-tings are spliced-end tools such as pliers, wrenches,hammers, and some 35 others, and some 6 clevis andtongue tools to fit on the end of insulating sticks.

(c) Insulating covers and similar assemblies.These are of various types to provide insulation fromconductors, conductive hardware, insulators, and asbarriers to limit work zones. See rubber protectiveequipment covered in paragraph 4–14.

(d) Bypassing equipment. This equipmentis used to provide an electrical shunting devicearound equipment, to connect or disconnect a circuitunder load, to bypass a fuse or other device, to fuseand protect a bypass, or to pickup an electrical load.

(e) Small individual hand tools. These areinsulating or insulated hand tools for use with rub-ber gloves.

(f) Personal equipment. Personal equip-ment includes mechanical protection such as gloves,boots, helmets, shoes, and electrical protection suchas conductive or insulating apparel and eye protec-tion.

(g) Positioning equipment. Positioningequipment includes body belts, bucket trucks, lad-ders, suspension attachments, platforms, and seats.

(h) Handling and anchoring equip-ment. Includes ropes, slings, rope block yokes, ginpoles, saddles, and various accessory devices.

(i) Measuring and testing equipment. In-

4–234–234–234–234–23

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

cludes dynamometers, gap and wire gages, measur-ing sticks, phasing testers, and voltage detectors.

(j) Hydraulic and miscellaneous equipment.Includes hydraulic compression heads, cutter hoses,pumps, and various miscellaneous hot-line devices.

b. Safety tools. Safety tools may be used in con-junction with hot-line tools or to de-energize the line,or after de-energization to maintain ground conti-nuity. Grounding jumpers, elbow connectors, fusepullers, grounding clusters, and underground cablegrounding spike clamps are devices available andshould meet ASTM F 855 and IEEE 1048 require-ments for protective grounding of power lines.

c. Specialty tools. Specialty tools are used inelectrical maintenance activities, such as settingpoles by the pike pole method where jennies, canthooks, pike poles, and bumpboards are used. Spe-cialty tools not covered in this chapter, such as fallprotection climbing devices, and hand lines are cov-ered in paragraphs 6–5 and 6–12 respectively. Aerialline tool use is covered in paragraph 6–13.

4–13. Care and inspection of live-line (hot-line) toolsThese tools are only as safe as their continued careand inspection make them. ANSI/IEEE 516 andIEEE 978 provide additional information on main-tenance and testing.

a. Manufacture. Tools should be manufacturedto meet ASTM F 18 series specifications as appro-priate to the device and material. The insulating toolportion can be made of fiberglass or wood. Fiberglassshould be used, if possible, as it does not absorb mois-ture, is impervious to oil-borne materials and sol-vents, stronger, and is a better insulator than wood.Like any insulator, fiberglass must be keep clean anddry to maintain its insulating ability. Only use live-line tools that have a manufacturer's certification ashaving been tested to meet the following minimumrequirements.

(1) Fiberglass. A fiberglass tool must havewithstood 100,000 volts ac per foot (328,100 volts acper meter) of length for 5 minutes.

(2) Wood. A wood tool must have withstood75,000 volts ac per foot (246,100 volts ac per meter)of length for 3 minutes.

b. Records. Records will be maintained for alllive-line tools to indicate their shop or laboratory in-spection and test dates. It is recommended that elec-trical shop and laboratory testing be provided at in-

tervals of not more than 6 months for tools in fre-quent use and not more than one year for tools storedfor long periods of time. OSHA requires that electri-cal testing of hot line tools be provided every 2 years.

c. Tool inspection. OSHA rules require that live-line tools will be visually inspected before use eachday. Tools to be used will be wiped clean and if anyhazardous defects are indicated such tools will beremoved from service. The following field observa-tions warrant their removal from service.

(1) Failure to pass electronic test or a moisturemeter test using portable live-line tool testers.

(2) An electrically overstressed tool showingevidence of electrical tracking, burn marks, or blis-ters caused from heat.

(3) A mechanically overstressed tool showingsuch evidence as damaged, bent, worn, or crackedcomponents; or a tool with deep cuts, scratches, nicks,gouges, dents, or delamination in the stick surface;or a tool with a deterioration of its glossy surface.

(4) A tingling or fuzzy sensation when the toolis in contact with energized conductor or hardware.

d. Tool cleaning. Clean live-line tools beforeeach use with a clean absorbent paper towel or clothand then wipe with a silicone-treated cloth. Waxingis not necessary after every use but only as needed.Use cleaning and waxing kits manufactured for live-line tools and follow directions for their use. Neveruse cloths that have been washed in harsh solvents,soap, or detergents. Residues left on the tools maybe conductive and abrasives can destroy the surfacegloss of the tool and cause water or moisture beadsto form on the surface of the tool.

e. Handling and storage. Workers share respon-sibility with their foreman and supervisor for the con-tinued safe condition of live-line tools.

(1) Storage. All live-line tools not being regu-larly transported will be stored in a dry location andwill not be tampered with or handled by unautho-rized personnel. A warm location may result in con-densation forming. Wood tools must not be subjectto temperature changes which can cause warping.Store tools in padded bins and racks away from dirt,moisture, and ultraviolet rays.

(2) Transportation. Live-line tools will betransported with care and protected from mechani-cal damage. Exposure to the weather should beavoided. The same elements of care should be used

4–244–244–244–244–24

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

for storage. Never lay tools on the ground. Contain-ers should be padded to prevent damage to insulat-ing surfaces from abrasive or bumping actions orcontamination from the environment.

f. Repairs. Repairs should be made only by com-petent personnel. Generally if there is no roughnesson the surface and the live-line tool meets electronicand moisture tests there is no need for repair. Smallsurface ruptures and small voids beneath the sur-face may need repair. Electrical tests such as high-potential or dielectric-loss tests should follow anysuch repairs. Tests should be performed by qualifiedpersonnel under contract or by facility workers whoare familiar with the test requirements of IEEE 978.

g. Use of live-line tools. When using live-linetools, employees will not place their hands closer thanis absolutely necessary to energized conductors,equipment, or metal parts of the tool being used, andin no case closer than the minimum approach dis-tance specified in table 3–3.

(1) Quick change tool heads will not be usedwithout a "Quick change safety clip."

(2) Approved blocks, ropes, slings, and othertackle used in live-line tool work will not be used forany other purpose and will be kept clean, dry, andfree from any foreign substances.

(3) Live-line tools being used to spread or raiseconductors will be securely fastened and will not beheld by workers except as necessary to secure or re-lease them.

(4) Live-line tools should be hung on a handline or approved tool hanger if possible. Do not hanga tool on a conductor or bond wire.

(5) Live-line tools will not be used in rain orheavy fog except when considered necessary by theforeman. In no case will they be used when condi-tions permit formation of rivulets of water along tools.

4–14. Rubber protective equipmentRubber protective equipment consists of gloves,sleeves, blankets, insulator hoods, and line hose.Assure that all items meet or exceed requirementsof the applicable ASTM F 18 series specifications.

a. Provision. The foreman should determine thenecessary type and amount of protective equipmentrequired on every job and visually inspect the equip-ment before use. Rubber goods must be inspectedimmediately before use or at least once a week. If anitem is found to be defective, it must be destroyed.

(1) Each line truck and service or trouble ve-hicle should carry enough rubber protective equip-ment for all of the crew's needs when handling workon voltages of 15,000 phase-to-phase and under. Theequipment will be carried in waterproof, lightproof,and dustproof compartments or containers.

(2) Do not carry rubber protective equipmentin compartments with other tools or with tools in toolbags.

b. Use of rubber protective equipment. Rubber pro-tective equipment must be used on all conductors orlive parts which might possibly be contacted by aworker climbing through or reaching from a work-ing position. See paragraph 3–15 for the recommen-dation against combined live-line tool use and rub-ber gloves.

(1) Protective equipment should be positionedto protect workers against unforeseen hazards suchas slipping, cutting out, leaning back, or falling.

(2) Protective equipment should be placed byworking from a level below the wires or insulatorson the pole or structure, beginning with those near-est the climbing space, and covering the live parts inthe order of their distance from the climbing space.Be sure to wear rubber gloves and sleeves if required.

(a) Other points of contact, such as groundedguys, equipment, and secondary wires, should becovered to provide complete protection.

(b) In cases where the voltage is too high forsafe use of rubber protection, the lines and taps nearthe work area should be covered as necessary for thevoltage level, de-energized, discharged to ground, andgrounded on all sides and preferably within sight ofthe work area.

(3) The removal of protective equipmentmust be done with equal care, wearing rubber glovesand sleeves if needed, and working below the levelof wires and insulators. The order of removal shouldbe the reverse of the order of placement.

(4) Rubber sleeves must be used under anyconditions where there is a possibility of the armscoming within the minimum distance (table 3–3) ofthe energized conductors or equipment.

c. Use of rubber gloves. Rubber gloves andsleeves if required, with leather gloves suitable forthe purpose, and gauntlets, should be worn whenclimbing or working on installations or structures inthe vicinity of live circuits or any wire or equipment

4–254–254–254–254–25

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

that may become energized by remote or accidentalmeans. Rubber gloves should not be used withoutprotector gloves over them. Liners are also availablefor wearing inside rubber gloves to absorb perspira-tion.

(1) Use only the gloves assigned, except in caseof emergency.

(2) Keep sleeves of wearing apparel tucked in-side the cuffs of the rubber gloves.

(3) Rubber gloves must be put on before theemployees are within reaching distance of live wiresor parts. Reaching distance is within 3 feet (90 cen-timeters) in any direction of wires or parts in excessof 600 volts.

(4) Do not remove gloves until out of the reach-ing distance of live wires or parts.

(5) Use rubber gloves and protector gloves(leather gauntlets) only for the specific purposes forwhich they are intended.

(6) Take care to keep hands away from contactpoints where an arc may form.

(7) Wear rubber gloves at all times when:

(a) Working on circuits, wiring, or equipmentin accordance with table 3–5.

(b) Removing or replacing fuses.

(c) Changing surge arresters.

(d) Changing capacitors.

(e) Applying or removing grounding devicesunless insulating sticks are used of the proper length.

(f) Working on equipment or lines which par-allel power circuits and which may be subjected toinduced voltage or accidental contact with live con-ductors.

(g) Working street lighting (series) circuits.

(h) Working on signals and signal wires.

(i) Working alone in wet weather, or whenworking on equipment with hazardous exposed parts.Only in extreme emergencies is a worker permittedto work in wet weather or allowed to work alone onor near energized conductors or equipment, regard-less of weather conditions.

(j) Assigned as a pulling, tensioning, or reelattendant.

(k) Assigned as ground worker who may con-tact conductors being installed on poles and equip-ment.

(l) Handling poles or structures that are be-ing erected in or between existing energized lines.

d. Use of rubber sleeves. Rubber sleeves shouldbe worn whenever there is a possibility of arms com-ing within the approach distance of table 3–3. Theywill be worn for rubber glove work. They must beworn when using live-line tools, even though thewearing of rubber gloves is not recommended.

e. Care and inspection. Rubber protective equip-ment should be inspected daily and stored in itsproper compartment or container. Protective equip-ment will not be stored in a sharply bent position orexposed to the sun's rays, light, or heat.

(1) General care. Wipe protective equipment drybefore storing. Protect from contact with oil, paint,creosote, kerosene, gasoline, acids, and other harm-ful materials. Rubber protective equipment must beturned in at least once every 6 months for gloves,every 12 months for sleeves and blankets, and uponindication that the insulating value is suspect for linehose and covers. Turn in will be made to a testinglaboratory for cleaning, inspection, and electricaltests. Shorter inspection periods may be requiredwhere frequent use of equipment is made.

(2) Care of rubber gloves. When not in use,rubber gloves should be carried in glove bags andwhen in use as follows:

(a) Rubber gloves must be washed whentested at an approved laboratory and kept free fromembedded foreign matter.

(b) Talcum and similar powders may be usedafter washing rubber gloves to avoid skin irritationand to prevent the rubber from sticking together.

(3) Inspection of rubber gloves. Before puttingon rubber gloves, give each glove an air test to detectcuts and weak spots. Roll the glove up tightly begin-ning at the gauntlet end. Notice if any air escapesthrough the palm, thumb, or fingers. Gloves whichshow weak spots or air leakage must be destroyed.

(4) Care of rubber blankets and sleeves. Roll;never fold. When being rolled, their surfaces mustbe brushed clean to prevent dirt from becoming em-

4–264–264–264–264–26

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

bedded in the surfaces of the rubber. Do not wearclimbers when standing on rubber blankets.

(5) Inspection of rubber blankets and sleeves.Inspect immediately before use. Items with cracks,holes, snags, blisters, or other defects must be dis-carded.

(6) Care of line hose and insulator hoods.Spread open line hose and insulator hoods to dry soas to permit free circulation of air on the inner side.Store hose and hoods in compartments so that nopart is strained or distorted.

(7) Inspection of line hose and insulator hoods.Inspect hose and hoods immediately before use. Ex-amine hose or hoods before use to ensure that thereare no defects and to determine whether or not theyare suitable for further use.

4–15. Electrical testing devicesElectrical testing devices are necessary to assure thatmaintenance of electric lines can be accomplishedsafely. For a more complete discussion of test devices,“Electrical Equipment Testing and Maintenance” isrecommended as a reference. This section coverstesters which are considered necessary for normalsafety considerations. Always use testing devicesaccording to the manufacturer's recommendationsand with the appropriate personal protection and/orlive-line tool.

a. Voltage detectors. Voltage detectors are usedto determine whether the line or device is energized.Low-voltage detectors often use neon glow lamps orsolenoid plunger testers. Medium- and high-voltagedetectors are proximity and direct-contact types. Itis very important that the user understand whereand how the detectors should be used. Some detec-tors cannot be used to detect or measure voltages oncables with metallic sheaths or semiconductor coat-ings. Some detectors can not be used on ungrounded-circuits or to detect lower voltages.

b. Phasing testers. Phasing testers are used todetermine the phase relationships and approximatevoltages on energized lines.

c. Line fault locators. These locators are used onunderground lines up to 34.5 kilovolts to determinethe location of line faults.

d. Insulator testers. These testers are used tomeasure the potential across each insulator in a sus-pect string of cap and pin insulators. They canbe used without interrupting service.

e. Leakage-current monitors. The leakage cur-rent that can occur from overcurrent conditions oninsulated ladder and truck booms need to be moni-tored for worker safety. Use of a monitor whichsounds an alarm at a preset leakage current levelalerts the worker to danger and eliminates the needto watch the current which is also continuously dis-played on the monitor's screen.

f. Combustible gas/oxygen detectors. Portablemonitors provide visual and audible warnings of ex-plosive atmospheres and/or low oxygen levels. A read-ing of any gas concentration ranging from 0 to 100percent of the lower explosive level (LEL) and O to25 percent of the oxygen level is given.

4–16. Insulating oil handling operationsDe-energize oil-insulated equipment, if possible.Observe the following additional precautions duringoil-filtering, oil-reclaiming, and other oilhandlingoperations:

a. Always de-energize potential and currenttransformers before taking oil samples from them.

b. Have appropriate fire extinguisher(s) readilyavailable.

c. If necessary to process oil in an energized powertransformer, conduct a job hazard analysis, preparea written work procedure, and take appropriate pre-cautions.

5–15–15–15–15–1

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

PART TWO

EXTERIOR SYSTEMS

CHAPTER 5

OUTDOOR SUBSTATIONS

5–1. Substation workSafety precautions to be used in maintaining elec-trical apparatus and lines found in those outdoorareas must be observed.

5–2. System familiarityA substation provides a protected area where equip-ment and lines permit switching power circuits andmay allow transforming power from one voltage toanother. A substation presents a potential safetyhazard because usually only portions of the appara-tus concerned can normally be de-energized. For safeoperation, a thorough knowledge of the system, in-cluding aerial and underground line connections, isnecessary. Systems are designed to be safe to oper-ate if maintained properly. Operating safely requiresmaintenance to be done in a manner that eliminatesrisks and requires knowledge of the work area, itshazards, and its design operating rationale.

a. Diagrams and schematics. Electrical dia-grams and schematics of the substations should beavailable at the facility’s engineering office andshould be updated. Diagrams and schematics shouldbe studied to understand the operation of the sys-tems and the location and connections of all circuits.Protective devices, alarms, and interlocking circuitsall operate to protect the system. The worker mustunderstand where, why, how, and when blocking pro-tective devices will maintain safe working conditions.However, only a supervisor can authorize blocking.

b. Engineering guidance. Diagrams and sche-matics should be kept up to date under the supervi-sion of the facility’s engineering staff. Staff guidanceshould be sought when performing maintenance oncomplex systems. Staff input is mandatory if themaintenance work involves additions or changes tothe power and control systems involved.

c. System operation. System single line dia-grams should be permanently mounted at each sub-station. When Safe Clearance switching operationsare performed, mimic buses on switchgear are help-ful as a visual indication of the lines or equipmentserved.

(1) Protective devices. Protective deviceswithin the system, such as relays and fuses whichare to be worked on or replaced, must retain respec-tively their correct coordination settings or be of theproper size and type. Always record previous data sothat changes in system coordination are not made.

(2) Alarms. System alarms, if blocked duringmaintenance, must be returned to their correct op-erating conditions.

(3) Interlocking. Interlocking is provided tomaintain proper electrical operation in the case of acircuit loss or switching change. Interlocking provi-sions should be known so as to eliminate any dan-gers of electrical feedback from another source. Pos-sible paralleling of two unsyschronized sources. Orother unsafe operation.

d. Abnormal conditions. Any maintenance doneafter fault conditions have interrupted normal ser-vice, imposes more than normal maintenance risks.Faulty energized equipment and lines should alwaysbe de-energized before any work is done. All abnor-mal operating equipment and electrical componentsshould be de-energized and tagged.

e. Defective equipment. If an apparatus whichis to be worked on is found to be in a dangerous con-dition or not working properly, it should be removedfrom service immediately and tagged. Then, a com-plete report of the condition of the equipment shouldbe provided by the worker to his/her foreman or su-pervisor the same day.

(1) Defective equipment removed from service,such as distribution, potential, and current trans-formers; capacitors; and surge (lightning) arrestersmust positively be identified by the foreman beforethey are put in storage. Any existing defective equip-ment in storage or at any other location must also beidentified.

(2) Identify defective equipment by painting alarge red X on the body, not on the top of the equip-ment. The red X must remain on such equipmentuntil it has been repaired or until it has been prop-

5–25–25–25–25–2

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

erly disposed of.

(3) It should be considered gross neglect of dutyand willful disobedience of instructions for a workerto deface in any way the red X on defective equip-ment or to place such equipment in service while soidentified. The worker in charge of repairing anypiece of defective equipment should be the only per-son authorized to remove such identification and thenonly after all repairs have been made and the equip-ment has met all necessary tests.

(4) In cases where defective or reclaimed equip-ment is repaired and tested by electrical facility work-ers, they may then remove the defective identifica-tion marking.

5–3. Work area controlControl of the work area is mandatory to accidentprevention. Procedures for specific maintenance mayvary but certain rules are basic to all work.

a. Previsit briefing. A previsit briefing will becarried out to familiarize workers with the work area.The briefing will include the status of the equipment,what part if any is energized, location of ground, whatthe limits of the working space are, what openswitches disconnect the equipment from any sourceof supply, and system operating aspects. If for anyreason there is an interruption in the work, or con-ditions change, another conference briefing will beconducted to familiarize all of the workers with thenew conditions.

b. Clearance access. When entering an attendedstation, workers not regularly employed in the sta-tion must report immediately tot he operator incharge, stating their names, offices, purpose of thevisit, and their planned activities. For unattendedstations, workers must be escorted by installationpersonnel. Unattended station doors must always bekept closed and locked.

c. De-energizing work areas. When it is neces-sary to work on or near any electrical circuits or ap-paratus, the Safe Clearance procedures prescribedin paragraph 3–8, as well as pertinent rules given inthis chapter, must be carefully followed. If work mustbe performed on energized lines, it is mandatory thatthe requirements given in paragraph 3–12, be fol-lowed.

(1) Switching. Station operators must notifymaintenance workers before doing any switching thataffects their work.

(2) Lockout and tagout. Lockout and tagout

all power sources and circuits to and from the equip-ment and circuits in the work area. All controls willbe made nonoperative and all feedback circuits, suchas from potential transformers or other sources, willbe cleared.

(3) Barriers and barricade tape. Temporarybarriers will be placed between the space occupiedby workers and the energized equipment, both as aprotection and a reminder of the limits of the work-ing space. The person holding the Safe Clearance isresponsible for barricade locations and they are tobe moved only under that person’s direction. Afterthe work is finished, that person will remove thebarriers prior to releasing the Safe clearance.

(a) Use of barricade tape. It is recom-mended that solid red barricade tape be used to en-close work areas and a white-with-a-red-stripe bar-ricade tape be used to isolate temporary hazard ar-eas. Only active workers may enter the solid redtaped area until the hazard has been corrected. Atemporary hazard could be a faulty but energizedline.

(b) Placement of barricade tape. Tapeshould completely enclose the work area, be visiblefrom all approach areas, and be at an effective bar-rier level. The area enclosed should be large enoughto provide worker safety and arranged so any testequipment can be operated outside the taped area.

(c) Nonpermittted use. Temporary barriersand barricade tape will not be used as a substitutefor guard railings, for work platforms, or for protec-tion for holes in the floor. Information tags or otherwarning devices will be provided to identify a haz-ard that is not obvious.

(4) De-energizing proof testing. All lines andequipment on which de-energized work is to be per-formed will be tested to be sure they are de-ener-gized before protective grounds are applied.

(5) Grounding. After indication that all cir-cuitry in the work area is de-energized, provide pro-tective grounds as covered in paragraph 3–11. Placeground so that each ground is readily visible to atleast one member of the crew. Stay clear of cablesand connecting devices while ground are being ap-plied.

(6) Adjacent energized equipment pro-tection. When work is to be done on or near ener-gized lines, all energized and grounded conductorsor guy wires within reach of any part of a worker’sbody will be covered with rubber protective equip-

5–35–35–35–35–3

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682ment. Bare communications conductors will betreated as energized lines and will be protected ac-cordingly.

(a) Flexible blankets will not be used at gradelevel without protecting them from physical damageand moisture by means of a tarpaulin, canvas, orprotective mat.

(b) To avoid corona and ozone damage, rub-ber protective equipment will not be allowed to re-main in place on energized lines or apparatus over-night or for more than one 8-hour period, unless ap-proved by the supervisor in charge.

(7) Worker protection. Personal protectiveapparel will be worn as deemed necessary be thesupervisor or foreman in charge, as recommendedby the manufacturer for the tool being used, or asotherwise directed in this manual. Protective toolswill be used as appropriate to the work being done.

d. Working area housekeeping checks. Check theworking area to ensure safe conditions and eliminateor protect against such hazards which can includethe following—

(1) Equipment hazards such as lack of guardsor safety devices.

(2) Material hazards such as sharp, worn, slip-pery, corroded, or rough items or areas.

(3) Work station weather hazards such as wind,rain, ice, or dust.

(4) Arrangement hazards such as congestion,unsafe storage in place, or improper worker’s toolprovisions and storage.

(5) Lack of fire prevention and first aid equip-ment and inadequate working equipment and tools.

(6) Insufficient testing equipment, protectiveapparel and equipment, and safety forms and tags.

e. Installation precaution. All apparatus andlines should be legibly marked for identification andto match diagrams and schematics before any workis done. Markings should not be placed on remov-able parts. Where permanent markings are not pro-vided, temporary markings may be utilized on theunderstanding that follow-up permanent markingswill be provided for all devices and circuits opera-tion at voltage levels above those used for controlcircuitry.

5–4. Safety rules checklistThe following minimum requirements are manda-tory to ensure worker or equipment safety:

a. Communication channel availability. Somemethod of communication to summon emergencypersonnel or medical assistance will be provided andwill be functional through the period which work isperformed.

b. Lighting level. The lighting level will be suf-ficient for safe work. Temporary self-contained light-ing systems will be provided where normal naturalor installed lighting is not sufficient, available, orsafe.

c. Working period. Normally no worker willwork more than a standard 8-hour period with suit-able breaks. Under emergency conditions a maximumof 12 hours may be necessary but the work periodwill be preceded and followed by a minimum of 8hours off.

d. Technical direction. On all cases of special-ized work a qualified person will provide technicaldirection.

e. Co-worker requirement. No one will workalone.

f. Worker qualification. Workers must be quali-fied to do the work in question; must be fully cogni-zant of all safety procedures and equipment condi-tions; and must be alert and in good health.

g. Equipment preparation. In addition to pre-vious requirements of this chapter check the follow-ing:

(1) All control power must be de-energized andall stored-energy mechanisms must have been dis-charged.

(2) All stationary (bolted or plug-in)nondrawout type circuit breakers must be de-ener-gized on both the line and load side.

(3) All drawout circuit breakers must bechecked to be sure that interlocks (which prevent thecircuit breaker from being withdrawn in the closedposition) have not been defeated or bypassed.

5–5. Testing safety rulesWhen performing electrical tests at any voltage theperson in charge of the testing must, in addition toother applicable instructions in this manual, takethe following precautions:

5–45–45–45–45–4

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

a. Use only devices which have been checked andfound to be properly calibrated both immediatelybefore and immediately after the test.

(1) When testing live circuits or equipment, alltemporary leads used in testing must be securelysupported to prevent interference with other work-ers or injury to the tester.

(2) Protect testing personnel and others, par-ticularly their eyes, from flashovers.

b. When performing mechanical tests, keep theoperating personnel and others at a safe distance, orin a safe location by means of barricades, to preventinjury resulting from the failure of the equipmentbeing tested.

c. Use an approved voltage detector when test-ing for blown fuses on low-voltage circuits. Do notuse fingers as the test for blown fuses.

d. A test indicating absence of voltage on the sec-ondary side of a transformer or regulator must notbe considered as a positive indication of the absenceof voltage on the primary side.

e. When it is necessary to test transformers andother equipment for short circuits, open circuits, andgrounds, and a step-up test transformer is used, thefollowing procedure must be followed:

(1) In the low-voltage circuit of the step-uptransformer, use fuses rated not larger than 10 am-peres unless large equipment is being tested. Con-trol the circuit with a double-pole switch, so that allwires feeding the step-up transformer will be de-en-ergized when the switch is open. The medium-volt-age leads from the test transformer to the appara-tus being tested must be kept insulated from thesurface on which test personnel are standing. Themedium-voltage wire to be handled during the testmust be attached to the end of a 6-foot (1.8-meter)live-line safety tool, and personnel handling the toolmust hold it near the opposite end.

(2) in testing large transformers, use a testingtransformer and fuses large enough to handle thecharging current of the transformer being tested.

(3) Workers are positively prohibited from han-dling live medium-voltage wires with their hands.The step-up transformer circuit must be de-energizedeach time it is necessary to handle the wires formaking connections incidental to the test, unless thewire is attached to the insulating stick.

5–6. Switching safety rulesOpening/closing a power switch may expose the op-erator to some degrees of hazard. An accident mayoccur if a switch is closed when a fault is still presenton the line. The supervisor, before writing the switch-ing orders, must prepare the switching sequence andall load isolation requirements. All switches operatedin the switching sequence must be correctly identi-fied and the instruction manuals of the switches mustbe provided. The worker must read the instructionmanual to be familiar with the switch operation. Allsafety steps listed in he instruction manual must bescrupulously followed before opening/closing aswitch.

a. Air switches. Most switches today are airswitches. Many switches cannot be opened if thereis a load on the line, if there is a large transformermagnetizing current from transformer, or if there isa heavy charging current from an unloaded trans-mission line. Always know the interrupting capabili-ties of the switch you are opening or closing.

(1) Disconnect switches. Disconnect switchesof the nonload break type will not be used to inter-rupt loads and magnetizing currents, unless specificapproval has been given that the disconnect will in-terrupt the current safely or unless the switch is ofthe loadbreak type. Switch sticks providing the mini-mum working and clear hot stick distance are usedto manually operate switches and they should be usedfor no other purpose. Always assume that disconnectswitches are not of the load break type, unless youhave positive proof otherwise and then operate onthe following basis:

(a) Disconnect switches may be used withcare to open a live line, but not under load.

(b) Disconnect switches may be used withcaution to open sections of de-energized lines, wherethese lines parallel other medium- or high-voltagelines. Under certain conditions induced voltages canbuild up in the de-energized line and can be danger-ous to switching operations.

(c) Be aware of dangers when using discon-nect switches to open a tie line or to break two paral-lel medium- or high-voltage lines.

(2) Airbreak switches. Gang-operatedairbreak switches equipped with arcing horns maybe suitable for loadbreak operation, or they may beonly capable of interrupting the magnetizing currentof transformers, the charging current of lines, or tomake and break line parallels. Airbreak switch use

5–55–55–55–55–5

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682should be specifically stated. The handle of the switchshould be of the permanently insulated type and beeffectively grounded when operated. Ground matsshould be provided for the operator to stand on withboth feet. Either fixed or portable small iron-meshmats should be used. The mats must be electricallyconnected to the operating rod and the substationground grid to equalize the ground gradient and pre-vent any potential differences in case of insulationfailure or flashover. Rubber gloves should be wornby the operator.

(a) The hinges of airbreak switches shouldbe sufficiently stiff (and kept in this condition) sothat when the blades have been turned into the openposition they will not accidentally fall back on theirline-side energized clips.

(b) The switch should be inspected after ithas been opened to see that all blades have openedthe proper distance. Single-throw airbreak switchesshould be opened to the maximum amount. Double-throw airbreak switches should be opened so thatthe blades clear both sides of the switch by the sameamount.

(c) Locks will be provided for all airbreakswitch operating mechanisms and they will alwaysbe kept locked, except when opening or closing theswitch.

(3) Interrupter switches. Interrupter switchesare designed to be opened under load. Metal-enclosedloadbreak switches are used in place of circuit break-ers as a more economical switching method.

(4) Inching. Inching is a method of openingmanually-operated nonloadbreak disconnects in agradual manner, when the operator believes there isno load current. If a small arc occurs from the charg-ing current, it may be considered that a cautionsopening would allow the arc to be broken. Inching isdangerous and this practice is prohibited.

b. Oil switches. The consequences of operatinga faulty oil switch or closing into a faulted circuitwith a oil switch are likely to be devastating andpossibly fatal. Switching procedures must be devel-oped at each facility to make sure that no energizedoil switch is operated while workers are in the vicin-ity. Unless the switch has been equipped to operatefrom a remote location at least 20 feet (6 meters)away, the switch must be completely de-energizedbefore switching. Switch position and ground condi-tions must be verified before operation. In addition,no medium-voltage oil switch is to be operated un-less routine maintenance, including oil testing, has

been performed within the past year. Oil switchesmust incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent inad-vertent operation ground. Any abnormalities or de-fects discovered in any oil switch should be reportedto the supervisor.

c. Similar switching section. When switch bays,cells, or compartments are similar to adjacent sec-tions, the separation barrier between sections mustbe painted an appropriate color to prevent the possi-bility of pulling the wrong blade.

5–7. Fusing safety rulesAlways remember that a fuse is a single-phase de-vice. Fuses can be subject to partial melting or dam-age by currents which may not be of sufficient mag-nitude to blow the fuse.

a. Fuse handling. Fuses should normally not behandled, except when they need to be replaced. Re-move them completely and as speedily as possible.When replacing fuses in primary fuse cut-outs, donot use your free arm to shield your eyes from pos-sible flashes. Always use safety glasses. The personchanging the fuses must stand firmly on a level sur-face and, where operating in an elevated position besecured with a safety belt to prevent a slip and fall ifthere is a flash. Fuse sticks must be used in all in-stances.

b. Operation of energized fuses. Open all linesprotected with energized fuses in the same manneras for air switches. De-energize nonloadbreak instal-lations. For loadbreak installations provide a timedelay after fuse replacement, in order to allow thefuse to interrupt any fault condition that was notcorrected at the time of the fuse replacement.

c. Open fuse holder. Do not leave outdoor fuseholders open for an extended period of time, as wa-ter damage or warpage from the elements may makeclosing them dangerous or degrade their protectiveability.

d. Closed-position fuse locking. Follow the fuseand or switch manufacturer’s instructions, as appro-priate, to be sure that the fuse is securely locked,latched, and held fast in a closed position.

e. Bypassing. Do not bridge fuses or fuse cut-outs internally. Where it is necessary to bypass fusedconductors, use plainly visible external jumpers andremove them as soon as possible.

5–8. Energy-storing protective devicesafety rules

5–65–65–65–65–6

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Protective devices such as surge arresters, chokecoils, and capacitors store electrical charges as a by-product of their protective mechanism. This storedcharge must be discharged to ground before suchdevices can be considered de-energized. Always weareye protection when de-energizing or energizing thesedevices.

a. Surge arresters. A surge arrester limits overvoltages and bypasses the related current surge to aground system which absorbs most of the energy. Theovervoltage condition can be caused by a fault in theelectrical system, a lightning strike, or a surge volt-age caused by switching loads. All surge arresterequipment must be considered as loaded to full cir-cuit potential, unless it is positively disconnectedfrom the circuit. Be sure the permanent ground con-ductor is intact before any work is done.

(1) High-voltage substation or at grade surgearresters should always be provided with screens orfences to prevent possible contact while parts of thesurge arresters may be alive. The screen or fenceshould have a gate large enough to permit the re-moval of individual units. The gate should be pro-vided with a lock and the key should be kept by anauthorized person.

(2) Surge arresters must never be touched orapproached, unless they are completely disconnectedfrom all line lines and live equipment and until allparts have been discharged to ground and effectivelygrounded.

(3) Horn gap switches must be opened andseparated from all live lines and equipment, when-ever it is necessary to work near a surge arrester.

(4) If the first attempt to disconnect a surgearrester is unsuccessful, wait 2 or 3 minutes beforemaking a further attempt so as not to cause an in-ternal fault.

b. Choke coils. Choke coils are inductors whichoperate in a manner similar to surge arresters, ex-cept that they operate on overfrequency rather thanovervoltage.

c. Capacitors. Capacitors consist of an electri-cal condenser housed in a suitable container. Powercapacitors provide for power factor correction. Cou-pling capacitors are used for coupling communica-tion circuits to metering circuits. Because capacitorscan hold their charge, they are not electrically deadimmediately after being disconnected from an ener-gized line. Capacitors on electric lines should be pro-vided with discharge devices for draining the elec-

trical charge to 50 volts or less in 5 minutes, afterthe capacitors on electric lines should be providedwith discharge devices for draining the electricalcharge to 50 volts or less in 5 minutes, after the ca-pacitors have been completely disconnected from thecircuit.

(1) Discharge circuits. The operation of theseunits must not be depended upon for safety, sincethey may be burned out or not functioning as de-signed. Line capacitors removed from service fromany purpose must be considered at full voltage orhigher until the terminals have been short circuitedand discharged to ground by approved method. Donot short circuit terminals until capacitors have beende-energized for at least 5 minutes. Capacitors madebefore 1979 usually contain PCBs. Precautions listedin paragraph 3–4 on the handling of hazardous ma-terials must be followed if the case is ruptured orliquid is visible on the outside of the case.

(a) It is not safe to use fuses or disconnectswitches to disconnect large capacitor banks or 60kilovolt-reactive single-phase, 180 kilovolt-reactivethree-phase, and larger. Circuit breaker must beused.

(b) After disconnecting all capacitor banks,wait 5 minutes. Short-circuit and ground all termi-nals. All operations must be performed using rubbergloves or a hot stick. On eye-connected banks, theneutral may or not be floating. In either case, it mustbe grounded.

(c) Safe practice requires that the ground andshort-circuit placed on capacitors be left on until workhas been completed. When working on or testing ca-pacitors in the shop, the work area must be barri-caded as a safety measure for other workers.

(2) Coupling Capacitors: A little known char-acteristic of coupling capacitors makes them espe-cially hazardous to personnel if not properlygrounded. This characteristic is their extremely highresistance, which results in a long discharge period.

(a) During shipping or storage a couplingcapacitor must always have a shorting wire.

(b) During maintenance, a grounding wiremust be connected to each exposed metal terminalthat anyone can contact. Grounding wires must beleft in place for the entire duration of maintenanceto ensure discharge.

5–9. Instrument transformer safety rulesInstrument transformers reproduce a primary cir-

5–75–75–75–75–7

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682cuit voltage or current in a low-voltage secondarycircuit for use in metering or relaying the primarycircuit.

a. Voltage (potential) transformers. These unitsprovide a means of obtaining low voltage from ahigher voltage circuit. To serve their intended pur-pose they must be designed and selected within cer-tain accuracy limits and burdens. Units procured asreplacements must have characteristics identicalwith the original units. There are certain hazardsinherent in the maintenance and removal of theseunits. A voltage transformer has a constant voltagemaintained on both the primary and secondary, al-though there is a fixed difference between the twovoltages. If by accident the secondary is short cir-cuited, a very high current will flow in both wind-ings, causing the windings to overheat very quickly.The case and one of the windings of the low-voltageside of voltage transformers will be grounded beforeenergizing the transformer.

(1) Replacing a blown primary-winging fuse ispotentially dangerous when the circuit to the trans-former is energized. The secondary fuses must beremoved to prevent the possibility of energizing thevoltage transformer from the secondary side. A thor-ough investigation must be made in either case todetermine the probable cause of the trouble, beforeattempting to install a new primary-winding fuse.Ordinarily, trouble in the transformer is apparentfrom visual evidence in the form of a smoked orburned case, damaged bushing, or the condition ofthe fuse. Also, before any inspection or replacementis done, be sure the service to the primary side of thevoltage transformer is disconnected. A dark lamp,connected on the low-voltage side of a voltage trans-former, is not a positive indication of the condition ofthe high voltage side. Voltmeters, in addition tolamps, must be connected to the low-voltage side.Lamps must first be connected while the voltmeteris used as an extra check. On most modern switchgeara drawout arrangement usually automatically dis-connects and ground the transformers, when accessto the fuses is necessary.

(2) A supervisor should give instructions forreplacing a blown primary winding fuse on a distri-bution voltage transformer located within switchgear,or where it is impossible to use a standard 6-foot (1.8-meter) puller.

(3) Whenever a circuit breaker or asectionalizing switch is not provided to isolate thevoltage transformer, the worker must report the situ-ation to his/her supervisor immediately. The super-visor must arrange for a feeder breaker opening. Re-

placing primary fuses when the transformer is ener-gized is not authorized.

b. Current transformers. These units provide amethod of obtaining a lower amperage at a low-volt-age from a higher-voltage circuit. Current trans-former cases and secondaries will be grounded be-fore energizing any current transformer. The mainrisk involved with the maintenance of current trans-formers occurs when the secondary side is uninten-tionally opened while the primary side is energized.Opening the secondary side causes a very high volt-age to be set up in the secondary winding, whichstresses the insulation an presents a serious person-nel hazard. The secondary circuit of a current trans-former must not be opened while the primary side isenergized. Before opening the secondary circuits ofany current transformer, the secondary leads mustbe short-circuited and grounded at some point be-tween the current transformer and the location atwhich the secondary circuit is to be opened.

5–10. Power transformer and regulatorsafety rulesPower transformers change voltage levels. Voltageregulators apply needed control for variation s inloads whose effect on line-voltage drop exceeds thatwhich is acceptable. Both require regular servicingbut their protective and circuit disconnecting meansare not necessarily similar. See paragraph 6–11 foradditional power transformer safety requirements.

a. Transformers. Consider all transformers en-ergized and at full voltage, unless they are discon-nected from primary and secondary wires, or unlessthey are disconnected from the primary wires andthen short circuited and grounded. The secondaryneutral will be considered a sufficient ground, pro-vided there is a grounding conductor which is inter-connected with the common central, the transformercase, and a ground electrode. Always check continu-ity of this ground connection. When removing trans-formers, the case and neutral grounds must be dis-connected last. Under no conditions will transformercovers or handhole plates be removed, nor will anywork be done on the inside of transformers until theseinstructions have been complied with.

(1) When transformers are installed or re-placed, the secondaries will be checked for correctvoltage and, where applicable, for phase rotation.

(2) When transformers are installed, and be-fore they are energized, the ground connection willfirst be made to the case and to the neutral whenapplicable.

5–85–85–85–85–8

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(3) When working on or in the vicinity of anythree-phase wye-connected transformer bank, checkwhether the transformer neutral is grounded. If notgrounded then the neutral is floated and it is pos-sible to have full phase-to-ground voltage on the neu-tral.

(4) Unless transformers are load-tap-changing(LTC) type, tap changers will be operated only whenthe transformer is de-energized. When re-energiz-ing, maintain a safe distance of at least 20 feet (6meters) to assure that internal switching was suc-cessful.

(5) When relieving pressure on transformers,the pipe plug, pressure relief device, or inspectioncover place will be loosened slowly, so that the inter-nal pressure of the transformer will dissipate gradu-ally. Pressure relief valves will not be opened whenthere is precipitation or high humidity, except onfailed transformers and when re-fusing.

(6) Transformers or tanks will not be enteredunless forced ventilation or an air supply containinga minimum of 19.5 percent oxygen is present andmaintained in the work area.

(7) Energized padmounted transformers andequipment will be locked or otherwise secured whenunattended.

(8) Properly control connected leads or jump-ers before transformers are raised, lowered, or repo-sitioned.

b. Voltage regulators. Voltage regulators areinstalled with bypass and disconnect switches. Neveropen or close a regulator bypass switch, unless theregulator is set on its neutral position and the con-trol switch is open, or automatic control is otherwiseinactivated according to the manufacture’s recom-mendations. When regulators are maintained asspares in substations, their bushings must be short-circuited and grounded.

5–11. Metalclad switchgear safety rulesMetalclad switchgear is inherently safe to maintainso long as manufacturer’s instructions and the fol-lowing rules are adhered to.

a. Prior to the drawout of a circuit breaker oper-ating mechanism—

(1) De-energize switchgear (including controlpower) and ground as much of the switchgear as per-mitted by operating conditions.

(2) Trip the circuit breaker open and dischargethe stored-energy mechanism if provided.

(3) Check that protective interlocks are func-tioning to protect against closed-position circuitbreaker drawout.

(4) Assure that all crew members know you areracking out.

b. Maintenance can now be performed. Access toswitchgear terminals through portholes in circuitbreaker cells will be limited to the following—

(1) When both sets of portholes in a cell arede-energized, that is line and load or bus to bus.

(2) After both are de-energized, the access toswitchgear terminals through the portholes will bepermitted for cleaning, inspecting, and maintenanceof terminals and bushings.

(3) Use an approved ground and test device foraccess to terminals. Such access may be for applica-tion of protective ground, phase identification on de-energized circuits, and phasing tests on live circuits.The use of a ground and test device positively andeasily grounds the incoming cables and theswitchgear bus. It also permits easy external con-nection points to the bus or cable for testing.

c. After providing required maintenance of theracked-out mechanism, the following precautions willbe taken as a minimum:

(1) Check that the cubicle is free of foreign ob-jects.

(2) Check that control circuits are de-energizedby pulling fuses on control circuits.

(3) Ensure that the drawout mechanism is inthe open position.

(4) Assure that all crew members are aware ofthat you are racking in.

(5) Close the cubicle door before closing the cir-cuit breaker.

5–12. Network protector safety rulesA secondary network system provides a high degreeof continuity of service in heavy-load density areas.A grid of interconnecting low-voltage cables is sup-plied by two or more medium-voltage feeders throughtransformers having secondary network protectors.Network protectors are used in large buildings with

5–95–95–95–95–9

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682heavy loads since the loss of one point of supply doesnot cause loss of service.

a. Closing. Do not close a network protectormanually, unless specifically instructed to do so, andthen only when it is certain that the medium-volt-age feeder is in service and that the transformer isenergized and in the proper phase relation. Whenclosed by relay, the operation should be performedonly by a worker properly qualified in maintenanceof network protectors.

b. Maintenance safety.

(1) Always perform appropriate electrical testsusing a three-phase network protector test kit, be-fore performing any installation or operation of thenetwork protector.

(2) Network protectors are designed to operatewithin the current and voltage limitations given ontheir nameplates. Do not apply these units to sys-tems with currents and/or voltages exceeding theselimits.

(3) To perform work on network protectors re-quires personnel with training an experience on en-ergized equipment. Only qualified electrical work-ers, familiar with the construction and operation ofsuch equipment and the hazards involved should bepermitted to work on network protectors.

(4) There are several interlocks on a networkprotector for personnel and or equipment protection.Under no circumstances should they be made inop-erative.

(5) Roll out the network protector’s removableelement before making any adjustments or doingmaintenance of any nature.

(6) Never energize the network protector with-out its arc chutes and barriers in place.

(7) Always be sure that all network protectorhardware is in place and bolted tightly before plac-ing a network protector into its housing for opera-tion.

(8) Since network protectors are used where alarge amount of power is distributed to heavy-loaddensity areas, a short circuit in the system involvesvery high fault currents. Extreme care should beexercised.

(9) The extensive use of barriers and interlocksas a part of the network protectors, provides greater

safety to maintenance personnel. Keep barriers inplace and immediately replace any that have beenbroken. Although barriers and interlocks are pro-vided, insulated tools or insulated gloves are requiredto remove the rollout unit from the enclosure, and toremove fuses, or at the initial installation of the net-work protector on the system.

(10) Before performing maintenance or remov-ing a network protector from service, de-energize thenetwork protector.

c. After maintenance. On the first trial opera-tion, or on the first operation of a network protectorafter repairs have been made on its mechanism orcircuit breaker, the door of the network protectorshould be closed, when practicable. Always have anetwork protector blocked open, when installing orremoving secondary fuses, to prevent the possibilityof the network protector closing automatically.

5–13. Storage battery safety rulesElectric storage batteries emit hydrogen and oxygen,particularly while being charged. This forms a highlyexplosive mixture.

a. Smoking or the use of any open flame, such astorches, will not be permitted around batteries. Whensoldering or lead burning is done, the battery roommust be well ventilated, the battery cell vent plugsmust be removed, and the excess gas above the elec-trolyte must be blown out of those cells near the workarea.

b. Cleaning batteries or terminals with brushesor other devices which may short out the cell willnot be permitted. The ignition of the hydrogen-oxy-gen mixture in cells by a spark from a short on ter-minals has caused cells to explode.

c. When doing work on batteries where contactwith the electrolyte can be made, a container withbaking soda and water must be provided for workersto neutralize the electrolyte on hands and tools.

d. When making up electrolyte for storage bat-teries, a worker must always pour acid into the wa-ter. The reverse may cause an explosion.

e. Acidproof gloves, sleeves, aprons, and gogglesshould be worn by personnel while repairing batter-ies.

f. Do not store sulfuric acid in places where freez-ing temperatures can occur.

g. For further information on servicing and main-

5–105–105–105–105–10

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

taining storage batteries, see the manufacturer's in-structions.

5–14. Safety requirements for phasing orconnecting of circuitsUse phasing testers when it is desired to tie two ormore circuits together. Never tie two circuits togetherwithout first checking their phase relations on allphases.

6–16–16–16–16–1

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

CHAPTER 6

OVERHEAD LINES AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

6–1. Aerial line workThis chapter includes specific rules for poles andstructures and the aerial lines they support alongwith their necessary pole-mounted equipment. Therules cover pole handling and erection, climbing andworking on poles, stringing of lines, working require-ments around pole-mounted lighting, equipment andtool handling, and tree and brush trimming requiredfor foliage which impinges upon aerial line right-of-ways.

a. Working in elevated positions. Additionalsafety requirements are imposed on aerial line work.Workers must not only recognize electrical hazardsbut be trained not to fall. Not all work can be accom-plished from aerial lifts. Workers must be trained insafe climbing procedures for situations when limitedstructure access prevents use of an aerial lift andthe structure design cannot accommodate positivefall protection load requirements. Only workers whomeet “Qualified Climber” requirements should bepermitted to do work which requires climbing polesor trees.

b. “Qualified Climber” requirements. Each fa-cility should establish these requirements both forfacility and contract personnel. They should applyto all persons whose work involves climbing.

(1) Physical fitness required for climbingshould be documented one only by an annual physi-cal, but also be validated by supervisory observation.

(2) Climbing duties should be a part of routinejob activities, not an occasional occurrence.

(3) A minimum of 2 years of documented climb-ing training should be completed. Experience shouldinclude hazard recognition and hands-on-trainingincorporating appropriate safe climbing practices andrescue training.

(4) Demonstrated proficiency is required onstructure types similar to those which are to beclimbed and should show that these structures havebeen climbed on a routine basis within the last 5years.

(5) A worker in training may function as quali-fied only when working under the direct supervisionand observation of a “Qualified Climber.”

6–2. Pole handling operationsPrecautions are necessary in handling poles safely.Poles are long, heavy, and preservative-treated, thusthey pose hazards to the workers involved in instal-lation and dismantling operations. Any mistreatmentof poles during installation will degrade their abilityto meet service requirements and endanger thoseworkers who climb them.

a. Direction. The foreman must direct the han-dling of poles and give all signals when poles arebeing lifted or handled Poles should, whenever pos-sible, be handled starting from the top and the endof the stack. Workers must roll poles away from themusing cant hooks or bars. Poles must not be caughtwith cant hooks while in motion. Whenever possible,carrying hooks should be used when carrying poles.

b. Pole contact precautions. Creosote, which isusually applied to poles as a preservative, can causeskin burns on contact. The following precautionsshould be taken to avoid burns.

(1) Never roll up sleeves when handling poles.

(2) Always wear gloves, and keep your neckwell covered with a collar or a handkerchief.

(3) Always keep trousers well down over yourankles as much as practical.

(4) Never rub your eyes or wipe perspirationfrom your face with your hands or shirt sleeves whenthey have been exposed to creosote.

(5) Where direct contact with creosote is apt tooccur, the hands, arms, and face may be rubbed witha preparation made up of one part gum acacia or gumtragacanth and three parts lanolin. If this prepara-tion cannot be obtained, satisfactory protection canbe provided by petroleum jelly (Vaseline). First aidtreatment must be obtained immediately if you comein body contact with creosote.

c. Facility receival. Poles are usually shipped tothe facility's pole storage yard on flatbeds to whichthey are secured by skids, stakes, slings, and bind-ing. Removal is safe if done properly. The objectiveis to unload poles so that none is broken and the polesdo not roll onto any worker.

6–26–26–26–26–2

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(1) Skids, rope lines, and slings should prefer-ably be 1/2-inch or 5/8inch (12.5 to 16 millimeters)wire rope. These should be inspected to ensure theyare sufficiently strong enough for the operation.

(2) All binding wire, stakes, and other fasten-ings will be inspected for weakness or breakage be-fore unloading.

(3) Always place necessary lines to restrainloads when stakes and binding wires are cut.

(4) The supervisor will determine that all pos-sible persons are safely in the clear before binders orstakes are cut.

(5) Binding wires will be cut with long-handledwire cutters. Never cut binders from the top of theload.

(6) Only one person should be permitted on topof a loaded car at a time. No one should be allowedon top of a carload of poles to cut wires or after anywires or braces have been cut or removed.

d. Ground handling. Once on the ground thepoles can be positioned by the use of cant hooks. Spe-cial precautions should be taken while using thesehooks.

(1) Hooks must be sharp and should be pro-tected when not in use.

(2) The hook bolt must be inspected occasion-ally to detect wear. When a worn hook bolt breaks inuse, a sudden and severe fall can result.

(3) Injuries may result when the handle breaksor the hook comes out. Therefore, make sure the hookis firmly set in the pole.

(4) The cant hook is a one-worker tool and fre-quently breaks when two workers double up. If thejob requires two workers, two cant hooks must beused.

(5) Before moving the pole, make sure thatthere are no tripping hazards behind any workers.

(6) Stand so the pole is rolled away from you.Pulling the pole toward you can allow the pole to rollon your foot or even crush your leg. Also watch to seethat the pole does not roll up a hump, as the polecould roll back when the grip and position of the hookis changed.

e. Temporary pole storage. Storage of poles must

ensure that they will not deteriorate because of mis-handling.

(1) Poles that are stored for considerable peri-ods should be stacked above the ground on rackswhich provide sufficient ventilation and can be prop-erly blocked to keep them from shifting or rolling.

(2) Poles should never be stored with cross-arms, braces, steps, and hardware attached.

(3) Poles should be stored according to size tomake them as accessible as possible.

(4) An area of at least 10 feet (3 meters) aroundstored poles must be kept free of grass and weeds.There should be sufficient space under the poles topermit removal of leaves and debris. The foreman isresponsible for these activities.

(5) Poles stored temporarily on or near road-ways, before erection or removal, should be placedas close as possible to the curb or edge of roadway asis safe. Never store poles at points in the road wherethere are sharp turns. Place each pole so that its topfaces the direction of traffic. Poles stored on high-ways should not have crossarms attached.

f. Hauling poles. Pole hauling must be done soas not to endanger workers and or the public.

(1) Poles, after being loaded on a vehicle, mustbe secured in at least two places and in a mannerthat ensures poles will not be released in travelingover rough terrain. Never use a chain smaller than3/8 inch (9.5 millimeters) diameter.

(2) A minimum of at least two people (a driverand a helper) should be assigned to haul a load ofpoles. The helper should assist the driver by watch-ing traffic both from the sides and the rear. The helpershould also see that there is ample clearance whenturning corners, entering highways, or crossing in-tersections. If necessary, the helper should act as flag-man to warn and guide traffic.

(3) Poles must not be hauled at night except inemergencies.

(4) Poles extending more than 4 feet (1.2meters) beyond the back of a truck or trailer will havewarning devices attached. Provide a red flag by dayand a red light by night to the rear end of the polesbeing hauled. The red flag or light must be visible inany direction. State highway regulations must be ob-served when poles are transported on state highways.

6–36–36–36–36–3

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Figure 6–1. Pike pole method

Table 6–1. Average size of crew required to raise poles of differentlengths by piking.

feet

25

30

35

40

45

50

(meters)

(7.5)

(9.0)

(10.5)

(12.0)

(13.5)

(15.0)

Size ofcrew

5

6

7

8

9

10

No. ofpikers

3

4

5

6

8

8

No. ofjourneyman

1

1

1

1

1

1

No. ofpeopleat butt

1

1

1

1

1

1

Pole length in

(5) Poles temporarily dispersed along streetsand highways must be laid near the curb or in park-ways between the curb and sidewalk, where they willnot interfere with traffic, driveways, or walkways.When laid on an incline, poles must not be placedwhere they will interfere with drainage. The fore-man must decide whether or not danger signs by dayand red lights at night are required.

(6) When moving a pole by hand, with a polecart or with the truck derrick, warn those nearbywho might be struck accidentally. Station a workerwith a red flag to warn or stop traffic as necessary.

6–3. Pole installation requirementsPoles will normally be installed for new aerial lineconstruction by contract workers. However, facility-installed poles may be needed for short line replace-ments of storm-damaged lines or because of pole de-cay. Remember that poles and guys must be locatedrelative to local facility property line requirements.

a. Pole holes. If new poles are to be set adja-cent to existing poles to be dismantled, new holesmust be dug. Power tools are available for digging,such as power borers or augers and should be usedby qualified personnel. Rock cutting drills are avail-able, as a safer alternative to the use of explosives,where rock is encountered. Most facility-providedpole holes will probably be dug by hand when powerdiggers are unavailable or cannot be used.

b. Digging holes. Digging pole holes does not in-volve any great hazard, but does contribute to a greatnumber of minor injuries, such as eye injuries fromflying dirt and rocks; blisters on hands from the useof hand tools (blisters can be partially eliminated byusing gloves); and foot and leg injuries resulting fromfalling over tools left too close to the pole hole, par-ticularly shovels that have been left turned up.

c. Hole covers. Cover all open pole holes as soonas they are dug, except when the pole is to be setinto the hole immediately after digging. Hole coversmust be at least 30 inches (750 millimeters) in di-ameter. Covers may be made of 1-inch (25 millime-ters) lumber with two cross braces not smaller than1 inch by 4 inches (25 by 100 millimeters). Four orfive shovels of soil should be put on the cover after itis placed over the hole.

d. Hole casings. Casings may be required insand or swampy soil to prevent the sides of a holefrom caving in. Casing covers are required if polesetting is not done immediately.

e. Setting poles. Pole setting is a hazardous job

even with the best equipment and experienced per-sonnel. The methods authorized for setting poles areby piking, using the winch line method, or using agin pole.

(1) Pike pole method. Figure 6–1 illustratesthe pike pole method. This is the earliest method ofraising poles and should be employed when a truckcannot be brought in. A jenny initially supports thepole and a cant hook keeps the pole from rolling. Thebumpboard protects the wall of the hole from beingcaved in by the pole butt. Pikers, lift the line pole, bypunching into the pole the steel spikes of the pikepoles. The number of pikers required increases withthe pole length as shown in table 6–1.

(a) Before setting a pole the foreman must en-sure a clear working space and verify that all mov-able obstacles are removed from the area. Personnelmust not wear safety belts and climbers when set-ting poles. Tools or other items must not be substi-tuted for bumpboards. Always use a jenny to sup-port the pole until it is high enough to use pikes.Only experienced workers should use the jenny. Theangle of contact between the pole and jenny shouldbe maintained as close to 90 degrees as possible.

6–46–46–46–46–4

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Figure 6–2. Winch line method

(b) At least three experienced workers mustbe used in addition to the supervisor. One personshould handle the butt of the pole and a minimum oftwo side pikers are needed. Unexperienced workersused in this work must be thoroughly instructed onthe hazards involved. A two-legged jenny must beused. It is the responsibility of the supervisor to as-sure that all polelifting tools are always in good con-dition.

(2) Winch line method. Figure 6–2 shows thewinch line method.

(a) When erecting poles by truck winch andwinch line, rig as shown with all workers in the clear.At least three experienced workers must be used inaddition to the supervisor. For safe erection, the ginsor maneuverable rigging assembly must have enoughteeth to handle the pole. Pikes will not be used incombination with a winch.

(b) Side guys used in setting poles or struc-tures will be attached to pencil bars driven into theground. Tie lines or other guy lines will never bewrapped around any worker's body. The supervisormust concentrate on supervising the work to assurethat it is being safely performed.

(3) Gin pole method. In setting extra-heavypoles or those of 45 feet (12.5 meters) or longer, use atackle block attached to another pole (either exist-ing or specially set for the purpose of raising the newpole) rather than the pike pole method. The pole usedas a gin (maneuverable rigging point) to raise thenew pole, must be guyed sufficiently with not lessthan 5/8-inch (16-millimeter) diameter rope to holdit erect under the strain of the load. When the newpole is raised by car or truck, the temporary guy mustbe run from a snatch block at the bottom of the ginpole to a substantial anchor. This prevents the ginpole from slipping at the ground line. Otherwise thegin pole must be set in a hole 1 or 2 feet (0.3 to 0.6meters) deep.

(4) Pole setting truck precautions. Pole settingtrucks should be parked, when practicable, so thatthe steel boom will not be closer than 10 feet (3meters) to energized overhead conductors. When thework is to be done around energized conductors andit is impossible to lower the boom sufficiently to bein the clear, the conductors must be de-energizedbefore work is begun. When work is being done withthe boom close to energized conductors, all person-nel must not touch the pole and must keep away fromthe frame of the truck. Never touch (with bare handsor with any part of the body) a pole which is beingset in an energized line. A cant hook or dry rope

around the butt of the pole may be used to guide itinto the hole.

(5) Energized lines. A lineman-A must be usedto guide poles through energized conductors.

(a) When a pole of any type is being set orremoved between or near conductors energized atmore than 600 volts, the pole, winch cable, and truckframe must be effectively grounded with protectivegrounds. Lines must be covered with rubber protec-tive equipment to prevent poles from touching ener-gized parts and, workers must use rubber gloves.Attach a protective ground to the frame of allwinches. If the pole is to be erected by hand (pikes),the protective ground must be attached to the pole(using an approved grounding band) approximately15 feet (4.5 meters) from the butt end. In all cases,exercise extreme care to keep the pole from contact-ing conductors.

(b) Wood poles must not be considered as pro-viding insulation from energized lines.

(6) Backfilling. Backfill the hole after the polehas been placed. Use the pikes to align the pole whilebackfilling. Pikes must not be removed until suffi-cient tamping has been done to prevent the pole fromfalling.

f. Dismantling poles. Many people have been fa-tally injured or permanently crippled from accidentsduring improperly performed pole dismantling.

(1) The following methods must be strictly ad-hered to. Each pole must be guyed in at least threedifferent directions by guy ropes before any workproceeds on the pole. This can be done by the follow-ing procedure:

(a) Make two turns around the pole with asling and tie securely.

6–56–56–56–56–5

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(b) Tie three guy lines around the sling atthe proper angles.

(c) Insert pike poles under two sides of thesling well up the pole.

(d) Snub off securely by pencil bars driveninto solid ground or by any other substantial snub.

(2) Always check the pole to see if additionalsupport may be necessary because of pole conditionsor strains.

(a) Determine the condition of the pole buttbefore removing guys or wires and support with ad-ditional pike poles or temporary guys if necessary.

(b) When an old or reinforced pole is to bedismantled, guy it sufficiently to withstand any al-tered strain on it and to support the weight of per-sonnel who are to work on it.

(c) When changing the strain on a pole, theforeman should see that it is sufficiently guyed tostand the altered strain. The foreman should notpermit workers to climb a pole which is under anabnormal strain. The foreman will be responsible forthe placing of guys to prevent any pole from falling.

(3) A truck equipped with an “A” frame andbacked up to the pole can be used to restrain thepole. The top of the “A” frame can be tied by the winchline to the pole. The pole at the groundline level canbe securely tied off to the truck.

(4) In locations where poles cannot be loweredwith a rope or derrick, a guideline must be attachedso that the pole falls in the desired direction.

(5) All members of a crew, who are not actu-ally engaged in removal of a pole, must stand clearto avoid possible injury if the pole should fall. Wherenecessary, stop all pedestrians and traffic during poleremoval.

(6) When a pole is being removed, dismantlethe pole before beginning excavation around the butt.

6–4. Climbing and working on polesWorkers should be familiar with general rules forclimbing poles and approaching the overhead workarea; the impacts of climbing wood poles as opposedto steel towers; and the dangers of crossing struc-tures from one side to another.

a. Climbing and working general rules. Exceptin emergencies or when unavoidable, do not work at

the base of a structure or a pole while people are atwork above. Before climbing a pole the worker mustfirst determine and ensure—

(1) What circuits are energized and at whatvoltage, and any unusual conditions which mightpose a hazard.

(2) Types and positions of circuits and the di-rection of feeds.

(3) The best climbing space to avoid all livewires, grounded wires, and signal circuits.

(4) That there is an ample supply of rubber pro-tective equipment on hand to completely protect theworker on the pole from all live wires, groundedwires, and signal circuits.

(5) That not more than one worker will descenda pole at the same time. The first worker will be inplace on the pole or down on the ground before thenext worker ascends or descends the pole. When itbecomes necessary for one worker to work above theother, they will exercise extreme care.

(6) Before climbing poles, ladders, scaffolds, orother elevated structures; riding span wires, mes-sengers or cables; or entering cable cars, boatswainchairs or similar equipment; the worker will firstverify that said structure or device is strong enoughto safely sustain his/her weight.

b. Type of pole. The type of pole to be climbedwill affect the precautions that the worker must takein regard to climbing equipment and procedures.However all types of poles must be safe to climb, interms of being strong enough to bear the weight ofthe particular climbers and their tools and in pro-viding adequate climbing space. Before allowing any-one to climb on a pole, the foreman will make surethat the pole is inspected and that it can be safelyclimbed based on the following determinations:

(1) Age, treatment, and physical condition ofeach pole must be tested according to the applicableprovisions of TM 5-684. Poles unsafe for climbingmust be reported to the foreman so that they may bebraced or guyed before climbing.

(2) Configuration of conductors or equipmenton the pole must provide adequate climbing space.

(3) Changes in stress resulting from removalof supporting conductors or guys do not affect thesafety of workers.

6–66–66–66–66–6

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(4) Poles to be climbed are in such conditionand are supported in such a way as to safely supportworkers on such poles. Pikes will not be used as asupport method while personnel are working onpoles.

6–5. Pole climbing equipmentUsually pole climbing will be done on wood polesrather than on concrete or steel poles. The two ma-jor differences between these types of poles are thatwood poles are not grounded poles (although theyshould not be counted as providing protective insu-lation) and climbing wood poles (along with trees)requires climbers (gaffs) rather than step bolts orladders. All workers need to be provided with bodybelts and safety straps when climbing and whileworking more than 6 feet (1.8 meters) above groundlevel. Positive fall protection may also be appropri-ate.

a. Responsibility. A full set of climbing equip-ment must be supplied to each worker who is autho-rized to climb. Never loan or borrow a set of climb-ing equipment.

(1) Climbing equipment should be carefully in-spected daily. Leather should be checked for cuts,cracks, and enlarged buckle tongue holes. Metal partsshould be checked for cracks, wear, or loose attach-ments. Climbers (gaffs) should be regularly checkedfor proper cutting edges, length, and shape.

(2) It must be understood by all personnel thatthe foreman, or a properly delegated worker, willinspect all tools, safety devices, and other equipmentweekly. Any item that is not considered safe will becondemned, regardless of ownership, and must notbe used.

(3) Body belts, meeting the requirements ofOSHA Standard 1926.959, with straps or lanyards,should be worn to protect personnel working at el-evated locations on poles, towers, or other structures.If such use creates a greater hazard to the safety ofthe workers, other safeguards must be employed.Body belts and straps should be inspected before useeach day to determine they are in safe working con-dition.

(4) Positive fall protection. Provide positivefall protection where the strength of the pole (steel/concrete) permits meeting OSHA requirements. Ex-ceptions are ascending or descending by a qualifiedclimber or situations where a job hazard analysis sowarrants. On wood structures consider adding posi-tion fall protection when transitioning obstructions,if a job hazard analysis indicates a fall arresting point

will provide adequate strength.

b. Wood-pole climbing equipment. Equipmentsets each consist of a body belt, a pole strap, andclimbers (an assembly of gaffs, leg straps, and pads).The Edison Electric Institute provides an excellentdocument entitled “Use and Care of Pole ClimbingEquipment” which should be used as part of the train-ing for pole climbing certification.

(1) Climbers should meet the following require-ments:

(a) Leg iron (shank) to be made of springsteel.

(b) Gaff (spur) to be forged from tool steel.

(c) Leg iron length, sizes range from 15 to 18inches (380 to 460 millimeters) from instep to end ofshank.

(d) Leather straps, two each of 1-1/4 inches(26 millimeters) wide, at least 22-inches (560 milli-meters) long.

(e) Pads, for protection of calves.

(2) Climbers and pole straps or other leatheritems which have any of the following defects mustnot be used until repaired:

(a) Cracked, dry, or rotten leather.

(b) Leather which is worn thin.

(c) Cuts or worn places which are of suffi-cient depth to weaken the leather.

(d) Broken stitches or loose rivets at buck-les, D-rings, or snaps.

(e) Snaps which have weak springs behindthe tongue, or loose rivets which hold the tongue.

(f) Loose tongues in buckles.

(g) Buckles, D-rings, or snaps which showconsiderable wear or which have been cracked orbent.

(3) Leather equipment should be cleaned anddressed every 3 months. This period should be short-ened when equipment is frequently wet from rain,perspiration, or covered with dirt or mud.

(a) Wipe off all surface dirt and mud with a

6–76–76–76–76–7

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

sponge dampened (not wet) with water. Never usegasoline or other cleaning fluids as they tend to dryout and harden the leather.

(b) Wash leather with a clean sponge in clearlukewarm water, and a neutral soap (free from al-kali), preferably Castile soap. Thoroughly wash theentire length of the leather and work the lather wellinto all parts. Place in a cool area to dry.

(c) Leather should be oiled about every 6months. Use a small quantity, about 4 teaspoonsful(20 milliliters) of pure neatsfoot oil per set of equip-ment, and apply it gradually with the hands, usinglong light strokes while the leather is still damp fromwashing. Leave in a cool place to dry for 24 hours,and then rub the leather vigorously with a soft clothto remove all excess oil.

(4) When safety belts and straps are not in use,they must be stored in proper compartments on theelectric truck or in other suitable places to protectthem from being damaged. When stored, climbersshould be wrapped in pairs and fastened with theirstraps.

(5) Climbers, straps, and pads must be kept ingood conditions at all times. Gaffs must be at least1-1/4 inches (26 millimeters) long, measuredfrom the point of the gaff to the point of contact withthe stirrup on the under side. Sharpen climbers us-ing a gaff shaping bit as follows—

(a) Place the climber between wood in a visewith the leg iron horizontal and the gaff on the topside.

(b) Use a smooth cut file and finish with asharpening stone. Never grind with an emery wheel,as this takes the temper out of the metal.

(c) File only at and toward the point of thegaff and only on the outside. Never file the front orflat side except for a slight touching up.

(d) Do not file a long sharp point. The sharppart of the point should be about 1/8 inch 13 milli-meters) long.

(e) Never use a climber with a gaff shorterthan 1-1/4 inches (26. millimeters), as measured onthe flat side.

(6) Climbers should not be worn when—

(a) Working on the ground,

(b) Traveling to and from a job.

(c) Piking poles,

(d) Walking through underbrush or roughterrain.

(e) Riding in motor vehicles.

c. Concrete/steel pole climbing. Positive fall pro-tection should always be considered. OSHA stan-dards (29CFR1926) requires fall protection for cer-tain working heights above grade. Generally fall pro-tection has been accepted as the use of a body belt.However with the development of positive fall pro-tection devices, a positive fall protection systemshould be provided whenever the anchor pointstrength requirement can be met.

(1) Requirement. A fall arresting deviceshould always be considered whenever the workerwill be working more than 6 feet (1.8 meters) aboveground level on line or substation structures/equip-ment where a feasible anchor point is available.Workers should be secured for fall arrest, while climb-ing or changing work positions, and for position se-curity while working in place. Where both hands arerequired for working from a ladder, the requirementsfor either fall arrest, position security, or both, willbe applied dependent upon the working height.

(2) A proper anchor point must be identifiedand evaluated by qualified personnel before an ap-propriate system can be selected. OSHA regulationsindicate that pad eyes, bolt holes, and other sturdystructures, capable of supporting 5,000 pounds (2,200kilogramg) per attached worker, are acceptable.

(3) Positive systems all have in common an an-chor point independent of the support method, a beltor harness to hold the worker, and a connecting de-vice between the anchor point and the belt or har-ness.

(a) Belts and harnesses should only be usedfor the personal protective purpose for which theyare designed. Their misuse could result in seriousinjury or death. In addition to fall-arrest harnesses,there are fall-arrest/positioning, fall-arrest/suspen-sion, fall-arrest/retrieval, and retrieval/positioningharnesses.

(b) The choice of a belt or a harness is deter-mined by the impact limits for a fall-arrest system.A belt may be used for impact forces up to 900 lbs(400 kilograms) while a harness has a higher forcelevel of up to 1,800 pounds (800 kilograms). All items

6–86–86–86–86–8

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

of the complete fall arrest system must be taken intoaccount, not just the belt or the harness.

(c) Manufacturers instructions in regard toheight and weight should be followed for sizing ofthe belts or harnesses and their connecting devicesand for inspection and maintenance of the completesystems. All equipment must be taken out of serviceand inspected for damage after being subjected to afall impact.

(4) Workers authorized to climb must have acomplete set of approved tools. The number of toolscarried in tool belts must be kept to a minimum.

6–6. Pole climbing and work precautionsOnly after determination of the pole's safety, collec-tion of necessary climbing equipment and work tools,and assurance that the line is de-energized andgrounded, or that hot-line work is authorized to becarried out, can the worker start climbing. Protecthands and arms by wearing gloves and long sleeveshirts.

a. More than one climber. If more than oneworker needs to work on the pole at the same time,the first worker must reach working position beforethe next worker leaves the ground. Ordinarily, noworker is to work directly under another worker onthe same pole, except in emergencies. When this con-dition is necessary, take extreme care to prevent toolsor other objects from being dropped on the workerbelow.

b. Necessary wood-pole climbing precaution. Al-ways proceed as follows—

(1) Seat the gaffs securely. Be especially vigi-lant when the pole is ice or sleet covered.

(2) Use pole steps whenever they are available,but only after checking that they can be used safely.

(3) Use the climbers carefully on the pole toavoid injury to another worker on the pole.

(4) Every precaution must be taken to avoidweather cracks, checks, knots, shakes, rots, and hardplaces, which might cause gaffs to cut out. Removeany tacks or nails which may impede safe climbing.

c. Concrete/steel pole or tower climbingprecautions. Workers may be required to climb con-crete/steel poles with the same equipment as woodpoles. Climbing towers to work on obstruction lights,marker lights, and similar devices may be required.Before climbing the situation must be surveyed to

get a good idea of what work is to be done and wherethe climbing will take place. The great majority offalls are due to slick work gloves or slick shoe soles.Ice or wet weather conditions increase the hazards.Always make sure that gloves and shoe soles are ingood condition and free from grease or other inhibi-tors. Rough cord sole shoe or boots are recommended.Careful inspection and attention must be given tothe safety belt's condition and positioning, as steelor concrete surfaces can cause a belt to wear out orbreak due to cutting action. Climbing safety devicesmust be used where installed.

d. General pole climbing precautions. The poleclimber will observe the following rules:

(1) Both hands must be free for climbing.

(2) The worker must not stand on mail boxes,signs, fire alarm boxes, or similar equipment whichmay be attached to the pole or located near it.

(3) Racing up and coasting down poles is posi-tively prohibited.

(4) Safety straps must be used from the groundup.

(5) When climbing over slippery or ice-coatedcrossarms or timbers, where the hands are apt toslip off, two safety straps should be used. The use ofrope safeties is prohibited.

(6) All signs must be removed from a pole be-fore any worker climbs or does any work above themon a pole. It is not desirable to have signs on poles,but street signs may be necessary at times. Wherestreet signs are removed they must be replaced af-ter all work is completed.

(7) Climb on the high side of a raked or lean-ing pole if possible, but do not climb on the side wherethe ground wire is attached. Avoid grasping pins,brackets, crossarms, braces, or other attachmentsthat might pull lose and cause a fall.

(8) Never slide down any type of pole or anyguy wire. If it is impossible to use climbers for as-cending and descending such places, ladders or othermeans must be used.

(9) Do not ride overhead guys or cables. (Thisdoes not apply to cables installed for river crossingsor otherwise intended to support workers in suitableconveyances.)

e. Working on poles. Never change the amount

6–96–96–96–96–9

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

of strain on a pole by adding or removing wires untilyou are sure that the pole will stand the alteredstrain. If in doubt, consult your foreman. Observethe following safety precautions..

(1) Safety belts must be used by workers at alltimes while handling wires or apparatus on a pole orstructure. The following precautions must be taken:

(a) Be careful in attaching snaps to D-rings.Visually ensure that the snap keeper is fully closedin the correct ring before any weight is applied tothe safety strap.

(b) Always be sure that safety straps are nottwisted while in use.

(c) Never depend on a crossarm or crossarmpins and braces for support.

(d) Never attach safety straps above thecrossarm in the top gain or around insulator pins,crossarm braces, transformer hangers, pole steps, orguy wires. If there is no crossarm in the top gain, thestrap must not be placed closer than 2 feet (0.6meters) to the top of the pole. In this case take pre-cautions to assure that the belt does not slip off. Ide-ally the strap should be below the top pole attach-ment, except where that attachment is above eyelevel.

(e) Do not permit any worker to fasten bothsafety belt snaps in the same D-ring in order to reachout farther on the pole. An extension safety strapmust be used or the safety belt let out so that workcan be performed with the safety belt snaps fastenedone in each D-ring.

(f) Workers must not attach metal hooks, orother metal devices to body belts. Metal chains andkeepers should not be used. Use leather straps orrawhide thongs with hard wood or fiber keepers. Caremust be taken to prevent the snaps on the safetybelts from coming in contact with anything that mayopen a snap. The tongue of the snap on the safetybelt must face away from the body.

(2) Take the following precautions when hoist-ing or lowering materials:

(a) Junked material which cannot be loweredsafely may be dropped only if there is no danger toworkers or the public.

(b) Workers engaged in hoisting tools andmaterials should be positioned so that they will notbe injured by an accidental dropping of the tool load.

(c) Materials and tools must not be left in aninsecure overhead position. Large objects must besecurely lashed.

(d) Minimize the number of tools carried intool belts. Secure tools returned to a tool belt. Keepall other tools on the ground until they are required.Then tools should be raised and lowered by means ofa canvas bucket attached to a handline. If a tool istoo large to be safely raised in this manner, it shouldbe raised by means of just a handline.

(e) Carry a handline up a pole uncoiled withone end attached to the rear of the worker’s bodybelt. When climbing with a handline, take care toprevent the handline from fouling on any pole at-tachments.

6–7. Crossing structuresWhen it is necessary to climb half-way across acrossarm to inspect middle phase insulators, theworker may climb the rest of the way across, pro-vided that, a safety belt can be kept strapped arounda timber as a safeguard. To get from one side of adouble-pole supported structure to the other, theworker must descend to the ground and go up theother pole unless there are adequate handholds andadequate clearances from live parts to allow safecrossing along the structure.

a. Crossing open air switches. Never crossthrough an open air switch, one side of which is en-ergized. Energized portions of the structure must beblocked off with barriers and, if advisable, anotherworker should be stationed to warn anyone approach-ing about the danger zone.

b. Balancing support. Never hold onto airswitch arcing horns for support in walking timbers,as these horns break easily and a fall might result.

c. Climbing H-frames. Never walk along an H-frame crossarm with the line energized.

6–8. Stringing or removing de-energizedconductorsBefore stringing or removing de-energized conduc-tors a briefing must be held to discuss the plan ofoperation, the type of equipment to be used, any ad-jacent energized lines, needed grounding devices andprocedures, use of crossover methods, and the SafeClearance authorization required. Overhead groundwires require the same safety precautions.

a. Work precautions. Observe the followingwork precautions for stringing or removing lines andfor all aerial line work:

6–106–106–106–106–10

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(1) Adjacent to energized lines. When pullingwire over or near energized conductors, the workerattending the payout reel must wear rubber glovesand be positioned on an insulated stand of a sizeequivalent to or larger than a standard rubber blan-ket. The payout reel must be grounded. Any devia-tion on grounding payout reels requires special per-mission from the supervisor. A bull line, which mustbe of dry polypropylene rope not smaller than 1/2inch (13 millimeters) diameter should be placed inposition to pull the wire before attempting to stringit. The bull line must be of sufficient length to reachthe distance the wire is to be pulled. Fasten the wireto the end of the bull line and pull it into position. Acar or truck should be used to pull the wire so thatthe driver can see the signals of the reel operator.Both in pulling in the wire and in sagging it, thepulling must be slow and steady to prevent swing-ing the wires into the energized conductors. The wiremust be watched carefully to prevent its hanging upon tree limbs, weeds, and other obstructions. Noworkers should be permitted to touch any conduc-tors or wires on the ground without rubber gloves.

(2) Over, under, or across energized lines. Whenwires are strung and sagged over, under, or acrossconductors carrying a voltage of 5,000 volts or less,personnel handling the wire will wear rubber glovesand use other necessary protective devices. Conduc-tors carrying more than 5,000 volts must be posi-tively and constantly grounded during the stringingoperation. As soon as the wire is ready to bedeadended, it must be grounded with standardgrounding devices.

(3) Weather. Electrical charges may appear onthe line from a lightning strike or from induced staticcharges from a very dry atmosphere. Discontinueoperations when there is any indication of lightningin the surrounding area.

(a) Fallen wires. All personnel must look forfallen wires. A worker finding a fallen wire will standby it to protect all street and highway traffic andpedestrians from the hazards. As soon as possible,another worker must be directed to telephone thefacilities engineer or the appropriate superintendentto have the wire de-energized. The worker findingthe fallen wire must not leave until instructed bythe supervisor in direct charge.

(b) Fire. Electric lines close to a fire shouldbe de-energized to protect the firemen. The lines mustnot be re-energized until all danger has been re-moved. Where lines were located close to the fire,the lines, ground wires, and guying must be in-spected. Inspect insulators for cracks and crossarms

and poles for charring before the lines are restoredto service.

(c) Vehicular protection. Wires being strungalong or across streets or highways must be keptsufficiently elevated to eliminate vehicular collisions.The foreman should delegate a competent person toact as flagman. Traffic should be blocked when thisline elevation is not possible.

b. Grounding. Requirements for grounding ofde-energized lines are covered in chapter 3, para-graph 3–11. Other grounding requirements shouldbe as follows—

(1) Permanent ground wires. Permanentground wires are installed to protect workers. Re-member that the metallic case, covering, or mount-ing support of any energized piece of electrical equip-ment must be considered energized at full voltage ifit is not properly grounded. All permanent groundsmust be installed according to the requirements ofthe NEC or the NESC as applicable.

(a) Ground wires must be installed clear ofall metallic line equipment (except that which is nor-mally grounded), hardware, or street lighting fix-tures.

(b) Ground wires on distribution wood polesmust be protected with wood molding for the entireworking length of the pole and protected to preventguy wires from cutting the ground wires. The entireworking length of the pole is from the point whereground wire terminates near the top of the pole to 5feet (1.5 meters) below the lowest crossarm orbracket, and from the ground line to 8 feet (2.5meters) above the ground line.

(c) Never cut an overhead ground wire orneutral wires of any kind because of the need for lineor equipment replacement, unless specifically in-structed by your supervisor to do so. Also, avoid open-ing a joint in such a wire without first bridging thejoint with wire of a suitable size.

(2) Common neutral systems. Fuses of alltransformers will have been opened before-work canbe done on a transformer bank where the groundedneutral wire is used for both primary and secondaryneutrals. The connections from the transformer tothe grounded neutral will be made before the con-nection from the transformer to the phase wire ismade. The connection from the transformer to thegrounded neutral wire must never be disconnectedwhile the transformer is energized.

6–116–116–116–116–11

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(3) Protective grounding equipment. Protectivegrounding equipment must be maintained in goodcondition and must be inspected immediately beforebeing used. Use only approved screw-type groundclamps. Grounding equipment must be connected toground point first, then to the item to be grounded.

c. Handling and stringing. ANSI/IEEE 524 pro-vides general recommendations on the methods,equipment, and tools used for the stringing of over-head line conductors and ground wires. The follow-ing safety precautions are mandatory:

(1) Reels. Adequate braking must be used tostop all payout reels. Personnel must not otherwisetouch or attempt to stop the revolving reel.

(2) Conductors. The inside end of the coilwire, where accessible, must be securely fastened tothe reel to prevent the wire from getting loose whenthe wire has been payed out. If the inside end of thecoil cannot be secured, a tail rope must be fastenedsecurely to the wire before the end is reached to pre-vent its getting loose.

(3) Grounding. Bond and ground all string-ing equipment, such as reel stands, trailers, pullers,or tensioners.

d. Primary line installation. Lines must bestrung to clear the ground by an amount not lessthan that specified in the rules of the NESC. Theseminimums depend upon whether the line is above astreet (consider its street traffic classification), abovea pedestrian way, or over or near other structures.Wire and guys which are being strung should be keptclear of any possible interference with public trafficof any type. Where it is necessary to block traffic tem-porarily while wires and guys are being installed,one or more members of the crew should be assignedto direct traffic.

(1) Stringing wire. Stringing by facility per-sonnel will normally be done by the tension method,since this keeps the conductor clear of energized con-ductors and clear of obstacles which might cause sur-face damage to the wire. Slack stringing may be ap-propriate for new short line extensions. In either caselines must be sagged to meet the requirements ofthe NESC.

(a) In stringing wires do not put kinks intoany part of the line. Kinks reduce the strength of thewire and may result in fallen wires later.

(b) Before changing the strains on a pole byadding wires, engineering guidance should be re-

quested to ensure that the pole will safely stand thealtered strain.

(2) Clipping in or tieing wires. This involvesthe transferring of sagged conductors from theirstringing travelers to their permanent insulator po-sitions where they may either be clamped or tied toinsulators.

(a) Wires should be securely tied-in at all tie-in type insulators to prevent the possibility of wiresbecoming loose at points of support and falling tothe ground. Where double arms are provided, linewires should be well tied-in to insulators on each arm.This applies to pin- and post-type tie-top insulatorwork. Clamp-type insulators must have the clampstightened to meet the manufacturer's requirements.

(b) When it is necessary to connect two par-allel circuits at one or more points on the line, thephase wires should be tested with a potential trans-former or other means, to make sure that the phasewires of one circuit are being connected to the corre-sponding phase wires of the other circuit. (See para-graph 3–5)

(c) Care should be taken to see that phasewires are not crossed when turning the vertical angleon three-phase lines, that is, phase wires should takethe same position leaving an angle as coming into it.

e. Secondary line installation. Secondary linesmust be installed to meet line clearance requirementsof the NESC. Lines may be single or triplex wires.Secondary lines with insulation must be handledwith the care insulated wire requires. Workers mustbe particularly careful in stringing secondary ser-vices, to avoid any undue hazard in close proximityto primary lines. Locations where the service wiresmight fall across conductors of a higher voltage arenot permitted.

(1) Before stringing secondary wires, nearby oradjacent energized lines must be de-energized andgrounded. As an exception, service wires may be in-stalled near overhead energized lines provided thefollowing operations are carried out in the followingorder. Connect service wires to the building; attacha handline to the other end of each wire and care-fully raise the wire to its position on the pole; andthen attach service wires to the bracket or crossarm.While these operations are being performed, work-ers must wear rubber gloves and use insulation toprevent shock from unintentional contact betweenthe service wires and the primary lines. Personnelon the ground must not attempt to install meters orother secondary connections while these operations

6–126–126–126–126–12

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

are being performed.

(2) In the handling and stringing of weather-proof-covered wires, care must be taken not to in-jure the weatherproof covering.

f. Removing lines. Removing or salvaging wiresrequires the same precautions as stringing wires. Thewire to be removed should be pulled out and laid flatbefore coiling the wire by hand or on a nonpower-driven reel.

(1) A worker should never change the strainson a pole by removing wires until certain that thepole will safely stand the altered strain. Where a polewill be weakened by the removal of the wires, itshould be guyed before these wires are removed. Allwires should be lowered with a handline. If this isnot possible, before cutting a wire aloft care shouldbe used to avoid contact with other wires.

(2) Lines which are being cut or rearrangedshould not be allowed to sag on, or be blown againstother electric power lines, signal lines, signal equip-ment, metal sheaths of cables, metal pipes, groundwires, metal fixtures on poles, guy wires, and spanwires.

(3) Wires which have been cut, or which arebeing arranged, should not be allowed to fall near oron a roadway where there is danger to traffic. Whereit is impossible to keep these wires clear of the road-way by at least 10 feet (3 meters) or more' (depend-ing upon the voltage of the adjacent lines) all trafficshould be blocked. All persons working on lower lev-els of poles, where cutting is taking place, and allpersonnel on the ground should be notified well inadvance of the cutting so that they may stand clear.

g. Guying. No installation or removal of guysshould ever be attempted without engineering guid-ance.

(1) Installation. Install guys to meet the fol-lowing requirements:

(a) When insulators are used they should beconnected into the guy wire line before the guy wireis set in place. In new work, guys should generallybe installed before line wires are strung. In recon-struction work, guys should be installed before anychanges are made in the line wires and care must betaken not to place excessive pull on the pole and wiresalready in position.

(b) Guys should be installed so that there isminimal interference with the climbing space and

guys should clear all energized wires.

(c) Guy strain insulators should be provided,wherever necessary, to secure the required amountof insulation to applicable codes.

(d) Guys should be installed to the correcttension. Where necessary, a guy hook may be usedto prevent the guy from slipping down the pole. Thesehooks should be so located that they do not interferewith climbing and so placed that they will not be usedas steps. Where guys are liable to cut into the sur-face of a pole, the pole should be protected by a guyplate at the point where the guy is attached. Theplate must be well secured to the pole to prevent thepossibility of injury to a worker climbing up or downthe pole.

(e) All guys should be installed so that theydo not interfere with street or highway traffic. Guyslocated near streets, or highways, should be equippedwith traffic guards. Traffic guards are sometimescalled "anchor shields”. Guy guards (traffic shieldsor anchor shields) should be yellow.

(f) Guy wires should be installed so that theywill not rub against messenger or signal cables.

(g) Guy wire containing snarls or kinksshould not be used for line work. It is preferable touse guy wires of the correct length to avoid unneces-sary splices.

(2) Removal of guys. Before guys can be re-moved, the condition of the pole must be determined.If the pole is weak, it should be securely braced be-fore any changes in pole strains are made.

(a) Where the removal of guys from a polewill change the strain and present a dangerous con-dition, the pole should be braced temporarily to makesuch a changed condition safe.

(b) Where it is not possible to install sideguys, poles may need to be braced to be self-support-ing. The pole bracing should be installed so that itwill not interfere with climbing or with street or high-way traffic. Pole braced guys should not be used onpoles which will be climbed.

h. Insulators. Pick up insulators by their tops toavoid cutting gloves or hands on insulator petticoats.Do not screw down insulators too tightly because theirtops may break off, cutting gloves or hands.

6–9. Energized line workRefer to energized line work requirements covered

6–136–136–136–136–13

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

in paragraph 3–15. The rules of this paragraph am-plify those requirements and cover work on aeriallines, however the nature of live line maintenancework makes it difficult to govern by hard and fastrules. Therefore, the foreman must devise safe meth-ods on the points not covered by rules given in thismanual.

a. Live-line work safety rules. Overhead linesshould be worked deenergized when this can be done.However, live line maintenance, carefully done byindustry-approved standards, has proved to be aneffective method for work on electric power circuits.Recognize that energized line work demands maxi-mum attention to safety rules by all personnel. Uti-lization of insulating equipment in the applicationof basic principles of isolation must be followed.

(1) The foreman must supervise the workersclosely, and advise them as necessary. The entire re-sponsibility for the safety of personnel engaged inlive line work, as well as the enforcement of the fol-lowing rules, rests with the foreman:

(a) Safe working distance from all energizedwires must be maintained by workers at all times.See table 3–3 covering qualified worker minimumclearance distances. In congested locations where thisis impossible, a Safe Clearance must be obtained (re-fer to paragraph 3–8).

(b) When it is necessary to work on energizedlines carrying more than 750 volts between conduc-tors, gloving or live line tools must be used accord-ing to table 3–5. The safety of the work depends onthe integrity of the tools and protective rubber equip-ment. Continual inspection, in service care, and re-quired testing are mandatory to maintain workersafety.

(c) Close cooperation must be obtained fromevery worker on the job. High-tempered or fractiouspeople should never be assigned to live line work.

(d) Unnecessary conversation must not be al-lowed, as this would distract attention, cause confu-sion, and create a hazard.

(e) Haste inconsistent with safety must notbe permitted.

(2) A careful check will be made to see that thecondition of the structure and lines at the point ofthe work is such that the job may be performed safely.In addition, the adjacent spans and structures willbe carefully checked for defects in conductors, tiewires, insulators, and other equipment. Other pre-

cautions include the following:

(a) Live line maintenance work will never bedone at night or in wet weather.

(b) Under no circumstances will a worker de-pend on another worker to hold a live conductor clearof him/her.

(c) When moving heavy conductors, wire tongblocks clamps will be used on the live-line tools sothat these lines may be moved slowly and carefully.

(d) While live-line work is in progress, noother work of any nature will be performed on thesame pole or structure.

(e) For circuits on wood poles or attached towooden structures, all wood members should be con-sidered to be at ground potential.

(3) When working on energized equipment pro-vide these precautions:

(a) Workers should, whenever possible, placeall protective devices and do all work from a positionbelow live conductors or apparatus.

(b) When it is necessary to change positionon a pole, a worker must climb below energized un-protected conductors and apparatus to a positionbelow live conductors and apparatus and then up tothe new position. If two workers are on the pole, nowork may be done on energized conductors until theworker changing position has reached the new loca-tion.

(c) When handling of energized lines andequipment is being done on a pole or structure, ahandline must be carried up the pole and securelyfastened before any work is done.

(4) Standard requirements for tools and pro-tective equipment. The following requirementsshould apply:

(a) When the minimum working distancemust be reached because the nature of the work re-quires close access, calibrated insulated measuringsticks or equivalent will be used to verify the dis-tance. Telescoping fiberglass measuring sticks, al-ternately yellow and red striped at 1-foot intervals(0.l-meter intervals with a black stripe at every 1meter interval) are recommended for monitoringminimum distances. Marking of live-line sticks toidentify the minimum phase-to-ground safe workdistance as listed in table 3–3 for the circuit being

6–146–146–146–146–14

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

worked is recommended. Alternatively, each livelinestick should be equipped with a standard flexiblerubber hand guard to indicate how far out a workercan safely hold a stick.

(b) Personnel performing structure-type live-line maintenance should not carry hand tools in theirbelts, particularly when working from ladders. Handtools should be raised to a worker on a structure incanvas tool bags. Hand tools should be returned totheir canvas tool bags each time their use is com-pleted.

(c) Use tested fiberglass-reinforced plastic(FRP) hotsticks. Wooden hotsticks are not recom-mended.

(d) Observe all rules for aerial rope use cov-ered in paragraph 6–12.

(e) Only hook ladders made of FRP will beused in live-line maintenance. FRP hook ladders willbe equipped with nonconductive safety ropes alongboth outside rails. Personnel on a ladder will main-tain their safety straps around the ladder exceptwhen mounting or dismounting, and will have theladder snap on their safety strap snapped to a rungof the ladder when they are in a working positionand when the ladder is being moved.

(5) Link stick lines should be handled as fol-lows—

(a) In removing link stick (fuzz lines) fromenergized conductors, the worker must take hold ofthe link stick rope and pull the link stick in beforegrasping the stick.

(b) When untying conductors workers mustcut the tie wires off short or roll them up in a ball sothey will not contact pins, crossarms, poles, groundwires, or any other conductor.

(c) When untying or tying conductors on pintype insulators, one worker at a time should workand the other should steady the conductor with a tiestick. The foreman must check the condition of tiewires and pins on poles adjacent to the one beingworked on to make sure they are safe. Before mov-ing the conductor, the foreman must verify that ad-equate clearance exists between the conductor andany object or wires crossing under the line in adja-cent spans.

(d) Link stick lines must be tied off to a suit-able anchorage on all regular live line setups. In nocase will they be tied to a car or truck unless the

motor is stopped, the ignition key removed, and thebrakes set.

(e) If the work to be done is on an angle, theforeman must arrange to take care of strains by pro-viding sufficient tackle. In addition to anchoring thelink stick lines, blocks must be used on the ends ofthe link stick ropes so the conductor can be movedslowly and carefully.

(f) Workers must not allow rope to lie acrossenergized conductors.

(6) Work on 0 to 750 volts nominal, phase-to-phase circuits must be done as follows—

(a) When working on energized secondaries,rubber gloves (Class 0) with leather protectors mustbe worn.

(b) Each worker working on energized linesand apparatus must be qualified for the highest volt-age class of all conductors within reach.

(c) Work must be performed on only one con-ductor at a time.

(d) All other energized or grounded conduc-tors and equipment within reach must be coveredwith rubber or other approved protective equipment.

(7) Work on 750 to 17,000 volts nominal, phase-to-phase circuits must be done as follows—

(a) Where gloving is permitted by table 3–9use gloves table 3–10 and wear leather protectors.

(b) At least two workers, fully qualified forthe voltage range (including other conductors withinreach) must be available.

(c) Only one wire on the same structure is tobe worked on at a time, although it is recognized thatthree-phase lifting tools may be used.

(d) For lines and apparatus belonging to thisvoltage group, use protective equipment of the propervoltage rating. Before starting work, carefully inspectthe protective equipment to make sure that it is ingood serviceable condition. Workers must begin theirwork of covering up on the lowest or nearest conduc-tor, as the case may be. They must never work overor reach past unprotected conductors or energizedequipment, either in covering up other conductorsor in connection with the work itself.

(e) When working on energized conductors

6–156–156–156–156–15

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

or parts, conductors within the working area mustbe covered with approved protective equipment.Grounds within the working area must be coveredor removed from the work area, when work is beingdone which exposes the workers to a phase-to-groundcontact. The working area is considered as the areawherein contact can be made with any conductors orother energized parts by the workers or any conduct-ing object or tool the workers are handling.

(f) Work above energized conductors is per-mitted only where these conductors can be ad-equately covered with protective equipment or wherethey can be moved a sufficient distance to allow safeworking space.

(g) When protective equipment is to be re-moved, that farthest away must be removed first.Equipment closest to the workers is to be removedlast so that the workers will not have to reach pastunprotected conductors.

(h) Do not remove any protective equipmentuntil all workers are in a position where it is impos-sible for them to make contact with conductors orother energized parts after protective equipment hasbeen removed.

(i) When work is being done near an ener-gized conductor using an aerial bucket, either groundthe truck or barricade the truck and work area. Es-tablish a definite method of communication betweenthe workers in the bucket and those on the ground.Do not move the boom when anyone is in contact withthe truck.

(8) Work above 17,000 volts to 36,000 volts,nominal phase-to-phase, other than the replacementof fuses and switching, on energized lines or appara-tus operating at this voltage range is prohibited.Switching and fusing energized circuits in this volt-age classification must be performed under the fol-lowing conditions:

(a) Must be approved by and be under thedirect supervision of a qualified person devoting fulltime and attention to the workers and the safety ofthe workers.

(b) Must have at least two qualified workersavailable.

(c) Must use live-line tools of the proper volt-age for lines and apparatus belonging to this voltageclass and maintain the minimum clearance from liveparts as listed in table 3–3.

(9) Other work above 17,000 volts and all workabove 36,000 volts must be done by contract person-nel if it is done live-line.

(10) All live-line work regardless of the volt-age level, requires that normally, no worker is per-mitted to approach or take any conductive objectcloser to exposed energized parts than shown in table3–3. Exceptions are—

(a) The tool or object has an approved insu-lating handle.

(b) The worker is insulated or guarded fromenergized parts. (Glove and sleeves rated for the volt-age involved are considered insulation of the workerfrom the energized part).

(c) The energized part is insulated or guardedfrom the worker and any other conductive object ata different potential.

(d) The worker is insulated or guarded fromany other conductive object.

b. Live-line bare-hand work. Live-line bare-hand work is not permitted.

c. Washing of insulation on energized lines. Wash-ing of energized insulators requires maintainingminimum water resistance, minimum working dis-tance, and minimum nozzle pressure. Also see IEEE/ANSI 957 on cleaning energized insulators. Conformwith the minimum requirements of the facility's lo-cal utility company. Minimum values are given inIEEE/ANSI 957 but these are admittedly only guidesbecause of the great variety in conditions, practices,contamination possibilities, and electrical systemdesigns used by different utilities.

6–10. StreetlightingStreetlighting circuits can be either low-voltagemultiple circuits or mediumvoltage series circuits.It is important that the type of circuit be identifiedbecause of the voltage level differences. There shouldbe no reason that streetlighting circuits cannot bede-energized for daytime work.

a. Precautions. Streetlighting line wires andstreetlighting fixtures and wires, not under construc-tion or grounded, must be considered energized andmust always be worked with rubber protective equip-ment, unless a Safe Clearance is obtained and theline grounded. The voltage of streetlighting circuitsshould be treated as that of the highest voltage oc-cupying one or more poles on which the streetlightingcircuit is run. This is necessary because streetlighting

6–166–166–166–166–16

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

wires sometimes become crossed with live voltagewires during a fire or during the day when not inuse.

b. Multiple streetlighting circuits. Multiplestreetlighting circuits will be considered to be at thesame voltage as the circuits to which they are con-nected, unless the circuit is on the same structurewith a higher voltage wire, in which case it must beconsidered to be at the higher voltage level.

c. Series streetlighting circuits. Before a seriesstreetlighting circuit is opened and work is per-formed, the following procedures will be followed:

(1) A circuit will be disconnected from thesource of supply by opening disconnecting switchesor other absolute voltage cutouts, and a Safe Clear-ance will be attached to such disconnects or cutouts.Do not depend on time switches or other automaticdevices.

(2) A circuit will be properly jumpered to avoidan open-circuit condition.

(3) In replacing lamp globes in series street-lighting brackets, there is danger of an arc develop-ing and causing serious damage and possible injuryif the spring clips in the receptacle do not make con-tact. These springs may have been heated to the ex-tent that they have lost their temper, or for someother reason do not close the circuit when the lampsocket is pulled out. Approved changers with at least6-foot (1.8-meter) handles will be used for replacinglamps on series streetlighting circuits. Workers mustwear rubber gloves when removing or installinglamps where lamp changers cannot be used.

d. Climbing space. Maintain safe access byhanging streetlighting fixtures clear of the climbingspace. All bolts, lag screws, and other hardware usedin securing the fixtures will be carefully trimmed.

e. Time switches. When winding time switches,or working on automatic time switches, do not tripthe switch ''on" without first pulling the transformerdisconnects or making sure that lighting circuits willnot be energized. On time clocks with medium-volt-age connections, workers will wear rubber gloves inwinding, resetting, and otherwise maintaining theclock.

6–11. Working on or around pole-mountedequipmentSee paragraphs 5–6, 5–7, 5–8, and 5–10 for variousequipment rules. These rules are the basic equip-ment safety rules. The rules in this paragraph apply

to precautions applicable to equipment that ismounted above grade. Be aware that some statesafety orders do not permit grounding of enclosurecases on wood poles, if there is a possibility that anaccidental contact with bare aerial lines might oc-cur. Transformers connected to an energized circuitwill be considered as being energized at the full pri-mary voltage unless they are adequately grounded.

a. Surge arresters. Check that the permanentground connection is intact before any work is done.Do not climb or strap off to surge arresters. Weareye protection when connecting, disconnecting, or dis-charging surge arresters.

b. Switches and fuses. The maintenance ofswitches and fuses may require temporary line modi-fications to permit repairs where service continuitymust be maintained. Both sides of fuses must be de-energized for repair work to proceed. Engineeringguidance is required in preparing a step-by-stepmodification procedure.

c. Capacitors. Refer to paragraph 5–8 for dis-charging capacitors. Individual capacitor banks mustbe grounded if insulated capacitor mounting racksare not used. Provide discharging method in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instructions.

d. Power transformers and voltage regulators.Check poles and crossarms before installing a trans-former or regulator on an existing pole. Consider thatthe following transformer requirements apply toregulators where applicable. Only qualified person-nel should climb poles to fuse, inspect, and test trans-formers and equipment. When transformers are in-stalled or replaced, their secondaries must be checkedfor voltage and phase rotation when necessary. Whendistribution transformers are installed and beforethey are energized, the ground connections must bemade to the case, secondary neutral, and then to theprimary neutral when used, in the order named.

(1) Energized work. Except for testing, re-placement of fuses, and switching, work on energizedpole-mounted transformers and lines is prohibited.

(2) Installation. To meet these requirements,engineering guidance may be necessary.

(a) All frames and tackles used in erectingpole-type transformers should be carefully inspectedeach time before use. Defects should be repaired be-fore the frames and tackles are used.

(b) Wherever possible, junction poles, subsid-iary poles, and streetlighting poles should not be used

6–176–176–176–176–17

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

as transformer poles. When it is necessary to installtransformers on junction, subsidiary, orstreetlighting poles, take care to maintain properclimbing space and to avoid crowding of wires andequipment.

(c) Transformers must be installed only onpoles strong enough to carry their weight. Trans-former poles must be straight and, where necessary,guyed to prevent leaning or raking of the pole afterthe transformer is hung.

(d) When transformers are raised or lowered,all crew members must stand clear and traffic mustbe detoured if necessary. In congested traffic, the polespace must be roped off. Personnel on the pole mustplace themselves on the opposite side from that onwhich the transformer is being raised or lowered. Polesteps and other obstructions in the path of ascent/descent of large transformers should be removed.

(e) When transformers are installed, the poleclimbing space should be carefully maintained so thatit will not be necessary for climbing workers to cometoo close to the transformer case.

(3) Connection. Pole-type transformersshould not be installed until they are supplied witha sufficient amount of good quality oil.

(a) When a three-phase bank of pole-typetransformers is replaced, the new transformersshould be carefully checked for phase rotation be-fore service is restored, so that the new service con-nections will be the same as before the change. Anymotorized equipment revolving in the wrong direc-tion because of incorrect phase rotation is danger-ous.

(b) Rubber gloves or hot sticks must be usedwhen installing a poletype transformer. First con-nect the primary leads from the transformer to theprimary cutouts; second, make sure that secondaryleads from the transformer are in the clear; third,make connections from cutouts to primary line;fourth, close primary cutouts; fifth, make polaritytests on secondaries and connect permanently. Whenremoving transformers, open cutouts and disconnectsecondaries to prevent danger of “backfeed”.

(c) Where one or more transformers feed intoa common secondary or are paralleled on the low-voltage side, caution should be exercised in refus-ing, as the higher voltage terminals will be energizedby stepping up the secondary voltage which is sup-plied by the other transformer.

(4) Inspection and maintenance. Only “Quali-fied Climbers” should be allowed to climb poles toinspect and test pole-type transformers. Never standon or otherwise contact transformer cases, whileworking on or near energized circuits.

(a) Before changing or replenishing oil, allenergized connections to transformers must be dis-connected and a Safe Clearance provided from alllive circuits.

(b) When opening transformers, do not uselighted matches or open flames of any kind.

(5) Fusing. When installing fuses, workersshould be careful to avoid contact with any live lines,or with any grounded surfaces (grounded lines, thecasings of grounded transformers, streetlighting fix-tures, signal lines, signal equipment, the metalsheathing of cables, metal conduits, span wires, andguy wires).

(a) Before installing fuses in new cutouts, re-placing fuses, or opening disconnects, workers mustprotect their eyes by wearing goggles and by turningtheir heads. They should use their arms to furtherprotect their eyes and faces from any flashes or arcsthat may occur. It is mandatory for the workers towear rubber gloves or to use a “hot stick” as appro-priate to the voltage level. Workers must securethemselves to the pole with their safety belts.

(b) When fuses are taken out of the circuitthey should be removed entirely from the fuse enclo-sures or cutouts.

(c) In phasing out a transformer or in test-ing it for polarity, small size fuses should preferablybe used.

(6) Service connections. Do not string servicewires from a transformer pole if it is at all possibleto install them at some other location. Service wiresmust never be installed on transformer poles, un-less a minimum separation meeting code require-ments can be maintained between the service wiresand the energized primary conductors or apparatus.

(a) Two workers must be used in stringingservices from a transformer pole where primaryjumpers energized at 5,000 volts or more extend be-low the secondary wires.

(b) When a worker is making connections tosecondary buses, the neutral wire must be connectedfirst and energized wires connected last. The proce-dure must be reversed when disconnecting services.

6–186–186–186–186–18

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(7) Testing. Testing of transformers, au-totransformers, and similar equipment should beperformed by qualified personnel under appropriateengineering guidance. All temporary leads used intesting such as secondary leads of potential trans-former, thermometer leads, and recording voltmeterleads, should be securely supported on the pole andshould clear all traffic. The positions-of these leadsshould not interfere with the climbing space or withmaintenance work which may be required while thetesting is in progress.

6–12. Aerial rope useRopes are used by workers working on aerial lines.Rope qualities and use in rigging for general liftingis covered in chapter 4, paragraph 4–9. See table 4–1which gives approximate safe working loads for ropes.

a. Conductivity. Always use properly main-tained polypropylene synthetic rope (not natural-fi-ber rope) for aerial lines, handlines, and taglines forlive-line work which meetg ANSI/IEEE 516 require-ments. Keep rope stored in a clean, dry location andprotected from damage and contamination. Lines willbe without wire reinforcement and, at least 1/2 inch(13 millimeters) in diameter.

b. Rope use terms. Rope line terminology apply-ing to aerial line work is as follows—

(1) Handlines raise and lower light materialsand tools They may be used for holding small trans-formers away from the pole during raising or lower-ing.

(2) Throw lines are used to pull a larger ropeinto place for performing a task beyond the capacityof a hand line. They are small diameter ropes thrownover support objects such as crossarms or tree limbs.

(3) Bull ropes are used when a handline is notstrong enough to raise heavier equipment. They areused also for fastening temporary poles, for holdingout heavier transformers, and for lowering trunksor heavy limbs in tree trimming operations.

(4) Running lines are used for pulling severalspan lengths of wire at one time.

(5) A sling is a looped rope assembly used tohoist heavy equipment, for lashing tools or materi-als in place, attaching a block or a snatch block to apole, making temporary installations such as lash-ing an old pole to a new pole, or tying up line wires.

(6) A safety line is used only for lowering aworker to the ground.

(7) A snatch block is a rope sheave and hookwith one side of the sheave open to avoid threadingthe rope through a hole.

6–13. Tool useAerial line work involves the use of portable powertools and the different miscellaneous tools requiredin the performance of the work.

a. Portable power tools. Only approved portablepower tools will be used on poles, towers, or struc-tures.

(1) Electric tools and all supply lines connectedthereto will be kept a safe distance under the levelof all circuits or apparatus energized in excess of 750volts, phase to phase. Supply lines will be adequatelyinsulated and properly secured to prevent acciden-tal contact with any conductor.

(2) Air and hydraulic-driven tools will not beused in any position where their unprotected con-ducting parts can come closer to any energized con-ductor or apparatus than the minimum working dis-tance given in table 3–3. Cover the energized con-ductors or apparatus with approved protective equip-ment for the voltage involved where reduced clear-ances are required. Supply hoses will be noncurrent-carrying material throughout, properly maintainedand, when in use, secured to prevent accidental con-tact with any energized conductor or apparatus.

(3) Power saws will be secured in an approvedmanner when used in an elevated position on a pole,tower, or structure.

(4) Except as permitted otherwise, noncurrent-carrying metal parts of hand-held portable electricpower tools will be grounded. Approved double insu-lated tools and tools fed from ungrounded isolatedpower supplies need not be grounded.

b. Miscellaneous tools. Observe the followingprecautions in their use.

(1) Pike pole handles must be sound and freefrom splinters. Spear points (gaffs) must be sharpand securely fastened to a pole. When carried ontrucks, pike poles must be placed so that injury isprevented.

(2) Always maintain cant hooks and carryinghooks in a safe condition.

(3) Never use jennies with cracked or brokenlegs, dull teeth, or loose bolts. Use only approved jen-nies.

6–196–196–196–196–19

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(4) Never use pole jacks with defective releases,or jacks which slip when loaded.

(5) Always use approved bumperboards. Theseshould be either 2 by 6 inch (50 by 150 millimeters)board, 6 to 8 feet (1.8 to 2.4 meters) long or 1 1/2 by 6inch (38 to 150 millimeters) channel iron, at least 6feet (1.8 meters) long.

(6) Never use wire reels showing any defects.All wire reels must have suitable brakes.

(7) Never leave closing-type knives open whenplacing them in tool boxes or other storage contain-ers. Open knives must be kept in scabbards whennot in use.

(8) Always maintain personal tools in good con-dition.

(9) Always maintain hot line tools in good con-dition. Tools must be kept clean and dry at all times.

6–14. Aerial lifts and insulated bucketsThe use of aerial lifts and insulated buckets is cov-ered in paragraph 4–11. See also table 3–9 for volt-age levels where their use is mandatory.

a. Requirements. Workers involved in electricaloperations with aerial lifts must observe the follow-ing instructions:

(1) Lift controls must be tested each day be-fore use to determine that such controls are in safecondition.

(2) The insulated portion of an aerial lift mustnot be altered in any manner that might reduce itsinsulating value.

(3) Be aware that the vehicle may become en-ergized (or grounded) when the boom or the aerialbasket itself comes in direct contact with energized(or grounded) conductors or equipment.

(4) Do not depend upon the truck, boom, oraerial bucket to be "electrically insulated'' withoutdaily proof that each item is insulated to the neces-sary value. No one will be permitted to touch thetruck or equipment when aerial equipment is oper-ating in or near energized conductors. The vehiclemust be grounded or considered as energized and, ifenergized, properly barricaded.

(5) The rules governing the requirements foruse of rubber or other protective equipment whileworking on poles and structures also apply to work

from aerial buckets.

(6) A body belt having a secured safety strap(or approved equivalent) must be used for any workfrom an aerial bucket and must be attached to theboom.

(7) Bucket liners must be used if the bucket isdesigned to be used with a liner and must be testedaccording to paragraph 4–11 requirements.

(8) A safety hat and suitable clothing must beworn at all times by personnel when working fromthe aerial bucket and by all ground personnel.

(9) Unauthorized or unqualified persons willnot be permitted to operate the aerial bucket boom.

(10) Insulated aerial lifting devices used forworking on energized electrical systems must be spe-cifically designed for that sole function. The aeriallift must be used only for electrically-related work.

(11) All personnel must stay clear of pressur-ized oil or air escaping from a ruptured line or fit-ting. The pump, compressor, or engine must bestopped as soon as a leak is detected.

(12) The manufacturers load limits of the boomor buckets must be posted on the unit and they mustnot be exceeded.

(13) All hydraulic and pneumatic tools that areused on or near energized equipment must have non-conducting hoses rated for normal operating pres-sure.

(14) An aerial crew must include a minimumof two qualified workers.

b. Travel procedures: Drivers of aerial buckettrucks must be constantly alert to the fact that thevehicle has exposed equipment above the elevationof the truck cab and be sure that roadways providethe necessary clearance. They must avoid moving thetruck into the opposing traffic stream by planningthe order of the work to eliminate this hazard. Whenpossible the following precautions should be ob-served:

(1) Any backing of the truck must be doneslowly and under the direction of one person on theground who has an unobstructed view of the intendedpath of the vehicle and its driver.

(2) A truck must not be moved with the boomelevated in working position.

6–206–206–206–206–20

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(3) When traveling to and from job sites, pin-on type buckets must either be removed and storedon the truck, or secured in a horizontal position tothe boom, to avoid obstructing the driver's vision.

c. Setting up and knocking down at the job site.Upon arriving at the work area, legally park the truckwhile the vehicle and pedestrian warning signs,lights, and barricades are being placed. Give carefulconsideration to the location of overhead conductorsand the surrounding conditions before the truck ismoved into the work position. Make every effort toplace the truck so that all work areas at that loca-tion may be reached by the boom without movementof the truck. Take the following precautions:

(1) Available footing for the truck wheels andoutriggers must be examined carefully and extracaution exercised if there is snow, ice, mud' softground, or other unusual conditions. Blind ditches,manholes, culverts, cesspools, wells, and other simi-lar construction must always be considered as addi-tional possible hazards.

(2) Before lowering the stabilizers, outriggers,or hydraulic jacks, the operator must be certain thatno one is close enough to be accidently injured.Chocks or cribbing may be needed to ensure stabil-ity of the truck body.

(3) When working on an inclined road or streeteach outrigger or jack must be checked to make surea stable setup has been achieved. The truck shouldbe approximately level as viewed from the rear.

(4) A warm-up period is needed at the begin-ning of each day’s work. This time may vary withdifferent makes and models, and with different tem-peratures.

(5) When lowering the boom to a cradled posi-tions, workers will stand clear of the path of thebucket and boom.

(6) When work is completed the bucket mustbe lowered and the boom cradled and secured by anapproved tie-down.

d. Operating at the job site. Observe proper pre-cautions before and while raising the bucket. Work-ers will obey the applicable rules for working aloft orworking at ground level.

(1) One worker must be responsible for all op-erations required in placing the bucket in operatingposition, use of the bucket, and restoring it to thetraveling position.

(a) That operator must check to be sure thatthe outriggers or stabilizers are in the down posi-tion, truck hand brake set, and rear wheels of thetruck chocked where necessary.

(b) If the operator has any doubt as to thestability of the truck, due to terrain, then theoutriggers or stabilizers must be checked fro safeoperation before a load is lifted.

(c) When the boom must be maneuvered overa street or highway, necessary precautions must betaken to avoid accident with traffic or pedestrians. Aflagman must be used when necessary.

(d) workers will enter the bucket only withthe bucket resting in the position for which it is de-signed.

(2) the operator should always face in the di-rection in which the bucket is moving so that all ob-structions are noted and avoided when the bucket orboom is raised, lowered, or rotated.

(a) the operator must follow the proper se-quence prescribed by the manufacturer in raising theboom section.

(b) Before reaching any area containing ob-structions, the operator must test controls of theboom and bucket to ensure that they are in properworking order.

(c) the operator must suspend operations iftests indicate the unit is not working properly.

(d) Raising the bucket directly above ener-gized conductors equipment should be kept to a mini-mum.

(3) Protection for workers aloft will be providedby locating buckets under or to the side of lines, toavoid contacting any conductors or equipment.

(a) If necessary to get within reach of ener-gized conductors or equipment, a worker must beproperly protected with rubbed sleeves and rubbergloves, if appropriate to the voltage level.

(b) Energized conductors and equipmentmust be covered with protective devices, if necessaryto perform the work safely.

(c) Adequate clearance must be maintainedso that protruding tools will not come in contact withconductors, tree limbs, or other obstructions.

6–216–216–216–216–21

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(d) A worker must not stand on top of thebucket or on planks placed across the top of thebucket, while performing work.

(e) A worker must not belt onto an adjacentpole, structure, or equipment while performing workfrom the bucket.

(f) the operator must make sure thathandlines and tools do not become entangled withthe levers that operate the boom.

(g) When working aloft, secure all tools notin use.

(4) When the bucket is being used in any man-ner which might result in contact between an ener-gized conductor and the bucket, boom, or any attach-ment thereto, the vehicle must be considered ener-gized at line potential, and the following safe prac-tices observed fro ground operations.

(a) Materials or tools must not be passedbetween a worker on the vehicle and a worker on theground, unless both workers wear primary rubbergloves and use other required protective devices.

(b) Workers operating ground controls mustbe on the vehicle or insulated from the ground usingprimary rubber gloves an other protective equipment.

(c) Before entering or leaving the vehicle, aworker must make sure that the boom or bucket isnot in contact with or near energized equipment.

(d) Workers on the ground must not workdirectly below the work area of the bucket.

(e) Tools or materials must not be thrown toor from the elevated bucket.

6–15. Aerial cable heating material re-quirements.See paragraph 7–6 for safety requirements. Observethe following additional requirements.:

a. Soldering tools must be kept at grade levelexcept when actually in use aloft.

b. When solder is being used aloft, an approvedsolder catcher must be placed directly under the pointof soldering.

6–16. Tree trimming and brush removalTree trimming and brush removal is done to main-tain the integrity of electric lines and apparatus and

provide right-of-way clearance.

a. Training qualification. Workers who climbtrees must be certified as “Qualified Climbers.” Work-ers in aerial lifts must be qualified for that work. Ifusing ladders, review the requirements for their safeuse in paragraph 4–6. In all cases, when workers areengaged in work near energized lines, they must bequalified to do so. Any trimming must be done in amanner that does not damage the tree, and meetsANSI Z133.1 requirements. The worker must bequalified to do tree trimming.

b. Public Safety. Erect suitable signs and bar-riers to prevent the public from passing under treesin which personnel are working and to prevent stum-bling over brush on the ground. Brush must not bepiled on sidewalks nor left on streets and highwaysovernight.

c. Tool Safety. Raise and lower tools with ahandline. Only saws and pruning knives or shearsare used for cutting limbs. Do not carry unnecessarytools up the tree. Tools must not be hung or storedon tree limbs.

d. Working near energized lines. Be aware thatlines may not always be de-energized fro tree trim-ming operation. Review the rule for live line safetyand for climbing and working on a pole especially inregard to being knowledgeable of the energized linesin the area and the relevant dangers. Workers intrees will use belt and safety straps. When workingnear energized lines, arrange your safety line so thata slip or fall will carry you away from the energizedlines.

e. Climbing and working on trees. Climbingtrees should be avoided unless ladders or aerial liftswill not provide the necessary access. Workers intrees must use every precaution to prevent contactwith aerial electric and telephone wires, and dam-age thereto. Ensure that the following precautionsare taken.

(1) If climbers are used, make sure they aretree climbers approved for the bark thickness of thetree being climbed. Never use pole climbers.

(a) Use a belt and safety strap of life line.Place the strap around a tree limb of sufficient sizeto hold the worker’s weight, but never around thetree limb being cut.

(b) Do not stand on tree limbs too small tosupport your weight. Extreme care should be exer-cised when working in trees which have brittle wood.

6–226–226–226–226–22

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(2) Before felling trees inspect tools to be used(such as ropes, tackle, ladders, and chain saws) toensure they are in proper condition.

(a) Place signs warning pedestrian and ve-hicular traffic of the danger from work being per-formed. Station flagmen where necessary.

(b) Inspect each tree for possible dangers(conductors and fences) in the line of fall. Have ener-gized conductors de-energized if possible.

(c) Check each tree for dead or broken treelimbs when climbing. Remove unsound tree limbsduring the climb.

(d) Lower cut-off tree limbs with a rope. Fall-ing tree limbs can cause injury and property dam-age.

(e) Trees greater than 25 feet (7.5 meters) talland 8 inches (200 millimeters) truck diameter musthave ropes attached before felling. Passing workersto the ropes to guide the tree as it falls.

f. Power trimming equipment. Chain-saw opera-tors will follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-tions and will carefully inspect and maintain theirsaws prior to use. Chain saws are very dangerous.Observation of the following operation and mainte-nance safety rules will assist in the avoidance of in-jury.

(1) Operate only if authorized and observe thefollowing operator precautions:

(a) Before starting to cut, the operator mustclear away brush or other material that might inter-fere with cutting operation.

(b) Operators will wear personal protectiveequipment as prescribed by the designated author-ity. Eye, ear, hand, foot (safety shoes) and leg protec-tion are required as a minimum unless specificallywaved by the designated authority.

(c) the idle speed will be adjusted so that thechain does not move when the engine is idling.

(d) The operator must be sure of his/her foot-ing before beginning cutting operations.

(e) the operator will hold the saw with bothhands during all cutting operations. Grip the chainsaw properly. Place one hand on the top handle withthe thumb curled under the handle. Place the other

hand on the control handle.

(f) The operator must stand to the side of thechain saw, not directly behind it, to keep the bodyaway from the path of the guide bar if kickback oc-curs. Be alert to conditions. That can cause the chainsaw to kick back. Kickback occurs when a solid ob-ject (such as a tree limb above the cutting area) con-tacts the chain at the guide bar nose. This causesthe saw to be thrown violently up and back towardthe operator.

(g) The chain saw must never be used to cutabove the operator’s shoulder height.

(h) The operator will shut off the saw whencarrying it over slippery surfaces, through heavybrush, and when adjacent to personnel. The saw maybe carried running (idle speed) for short distances ofless than 50 feet (15 meters) as long as it is carriedto prevent contact with the chain or muffler.

(i) Never operate a chain saw when physi-cally tired or under the influence of alcohol, medica-tion, or other drugs.

(j) When felling a tree, clear a path of retreatwhile assuring that the fall does not damage any-thing.

(2) Chain saws must be kept clean and sharpat all times, and kept in sound mechanical condi-tions with all guards, spark arresters, mufflers,handles, and other items properly installed and ad-justed. Observe the following equipment precautions:

(a) Fuel for chain saws must be stored inapproved vented containers that are marked to showtheir contents. Never store the fuel near flammablematerials. Keep the containers clean. Always wipethe spout clean before filling the chain-saw tank.Filtering the fuel mixture will ensure continuedsmooth engine operation.

(b) make sure that a proper mixture of fuel(gasoline and oil) is used. Check the fuel tank andchain oiling reservoir for proper levels before use.The filler caps for the fuel tank and chain oiling res-ervoir must be clearly marked and securely attachedduring operation and storage.

(c) the chain saw will not be started within10 feet (3 meters) of a fuel container.

(d) the chain saw will not be fueled whilerunning, hot, or near an open flame.

6–236–236–236–236–23

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

g. Right-of-way brush removal. Brush clearanceshould be performed as part of electrical maintenancework only to clear right-of-ways. Wear personal pro-tective equipment when using power trimming equip-ment. Recognize the hazards from poor work prac-tices to workers and to the environment and observethe following rules.

(1) Cutters felling heavy brush or small treesmust give sufficient warning to other personnel.Never work so close that one worker could injureanother with a swinging ax or hook.

(2) Brush chippers will be operated only if au-thorized and by standing to the side of the chipperchute while feeding the butt end of brush into thechipper first. Use the automatic shut-off/stop con-trol at the operator’s station in an emergency.

(3) Tools such as saws, axes, bush hooks, prun-ing shears, scythe blades, and pitch forks, must notbe thing in bushes or small trees nor stored hiddenfrom easy view of other workers.

(4) Personnel assigned to remove or pile brush

must stay a safe distance behind workers using cut-ting tools.

(5) When burning brush, be careful at all timesto see that the fire and sparks are under control.Cover hot ash piles with dirt or douse them withwater. Obey local laws concerning open fires. Theburning of poison ivy, poison oak, and poison sumacis prohibited. Smoke from burning these plants isvery toxic; even the windward side of the fires maynot be safe.

(6) Workers assigned to right-of-way cuttingshould be taught to recognize poison ivy, poison oak,and poison from these plants and should keep awayfrom the vices and leaves. If workers do contact thesepoisonous plants, they should report to the foremanwho will immediately render appropriate first-aidtreatment to prevent a rash from breaking out onthe worker’s skin. A first-aid kit should always be athand.

(7) Workers must always be on the alert forsnakes when cutting right-of-way. A standard snake-bite kit must be carried on every such job.

6–246–246–246–246–24

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

7–17–17–17–17–1

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

CHAPTER 7

UNDERGROUND CABLES, STRUCTURES, AND ASSOCIATED ELECTRICALCOMPONENTS

7–1. Underground workUnderground electrical work applies to manhole,vaults, and handholes; duct lines and trenches; cable;and ground-mounted and underground equipmentassociated with underground electrical lines.

7–2. Work area protectionWork area protection is the safeguarding or protect-ing of pedestrians, motorists, facility workers, andequipment by the use of barriers, warning signs,lights, flags, traffic cones, high-level standards, bar-ricade rope, and flagmen. Protection is required forapproaches to work areas, excavations, open man-holes, and parked equipment. An approved fire ex-tinguisher in good operating condition and immedi-ately accessible for underground work is mandatory.

a. Protection methods. Work area protectionmethods will provide safety for workers, equipment,and the public without excessively impeding publictraffic.

(1) During any period in which apparatus mustbe left open and energized, a suitable enclosure willbe erected around the apparatus, or a qualifiedworker must be stationed at the location to ensurethe safety of the public.

(2) All temporary cable installations must bemade in a manner providing safety for workers andthe public.

b. Impact of vehicular traffic flow. The amountand speed of the traffic will influence the work plan-ning. Where work will require excavation in roadsand highways, the appropriate traffic authorityshould be consulted to maintain safe traffic flow. Thepublic must be warned in advance, then regulatedand guided safely through or around the work area.

c. Work space consideration. The extent of thework and the lineup of traffic will effect scheduling,which should be done to cause the least interferenceto traffic and, minimize the possibility of accidents.Good housekeeping in the storage and equipmentspace necessary for the work should always be anongoing concern but especially wherever it impingeson public right-of-ways. It is of the utmost impor-tance that the work area be properly identified and

the warning devices clearly convey the appropriatemessage to the traveling public, well in advance ofarrival at the work area. This same good housekeep-ing applies to protection of workers.

d. Barricades and warning precautions. Trafficcontrol requires the use of barricades and warningprecautions.

(1) Devices. Only those signs, standards, bar-ricades, flags, and cones which conform to State orlocal codes will be used. All State and local trafficcodes will be followed when providing work area pro-tection.

(a) During night operations or in periods ofreduced visibility, special precautions will be taken.Adequate warning equipment will be used includingflashing lights, flares, or area illumination.

(b) Warning devices and equipment will beremoved as soon as the hazard is eliminated.

(c) Warning devices and equipment not in usewill be stored in a proper manner or removed fromthe work area.

(d) Barricades of materials having protrud-ing nails will not be permitted.

(2) Flagmen. Flagmen or other appropriatetraffic controls will be used whenever there is anydoubt that the use of signs, signals, and barricadesis ineffective.

(a) Flagmen will wear a red or orange warn-ing vest or garment. Warning garments worn at nighwill be of a reflectorized material.

(b) Flagmen using hand signaling equipmentwill ensure signals provide sufficient warning to pro-tect themselves and the work site. Signal flays willbe red and at least 24 inches (60 centimeters) square.Sign paddles (Stop and slow) will be on a 6-foot (1.8-meter) staff. In periods of darkness or reduces vis-ibility, red lights will be used.

(c) Flagmen will place themselves in a pro-tected position to reduce possibility of injury fromtraffic.

7–27–27–27–27–2

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(d) Flagmen will ensure that they can fullyobserve the operation and will guide vehicular traf-fic in such a manner as to minimize the possibility ofaccidents or injury.

(e) When flagmen are used at both ends of ajob site, reliable communications or prearranged sig-nals will be used to insure proper traffic flaw.

(f) Flagmen will face traffic when giving sig-nals.

(g) Flagmen will give positive, direct signalswhich leave no doubt as to their meaning.

(3) Barriers and barricade tape. See chapter5, paragraph 5–3 for requirements.

(4) Caution and danger signs. The followingare approved signs:

(a) Danger, High Voltage—Various sizes

(b) Danger—Keep Away—12 by 24 inches(300 by 600 millimeters)

(c) Danger—Personnel Working Overhead—12 by 14 inches (300 by 350 millimeters)

(d) Wear Goggles When Grinding—Varioussizes

(e) Danger, Drive Slowly—Personnel Work-ing—15 by 15 inches (380 by 380 millimeters)

(f) Danger—Blasting—15 by 15 inches (380by 380 millimeters)

(g) Caution—check for Feedback—5.5 by 2inches (140 by 50 millimeters)

(5) Preparing a manhole work area requiresproper use of warning devices.

(a) During the time that manholes or vaultsat the sidewalk or street level are open, suitable bar-ricades, traffic cones, warning signs, flags, and lightswill be used and maintained.

(b) When working in vehicular traffic areasmanholes, traffic cones must be used to guide trafficaround the danger area. Great care must be exer-cised not to obstruct traffic. In addition, a blinkinglight may be used on the traffic side of the hole, aswell as sawhorse type barricades around the hole.

(c) For sidewalk manholes and vaults, the

barricades must provide pedestrians and onlookerspositive protection against falling over material orinto the manhole. At night all open manholes mustbe outlined with either flashing or nonflashing lights.

e. Excavation, trenching, and back-filling. Workin increments to minimize open trenches. On a dailybasis, remove spoil to an area where it will not con-stitute a safety hazard.

(1) All equipment and materials, stored wherepedestrian or vehicular traffic might be endangered,must be marked with red flags by day and red lightsby night, or both. Do not store equipment or materi-als where they will obstruct fire alarm boxes, hy-drants, or fire apparatus.

(2) Keep tools, stones, and dirt away from theedge of a trench. Excavated material removed fromtrenches in streets should be kept on the traffic sideof trenches, whenever possible, until it can be usedfor fill or removed.

(3) Carefully refill excavations until such timeas permanent paving can be done. See that all refill-ing is well tamped.

(4) Provide ditching machines with suitablewalkways, footboards, railing, and proper safeguardsover gears, chains, and other moving parts. Do notstand near digging buckets while the machine is inoperation.

(5) Protect all open holes along streets andhighways or other frequented places by suitable cov-ers.

(6) In excavations which workers may be re-quired to enter, excavated or other material will bekept at least 2 feet (0.6 meters) or more from theedge of the excavation.

(7) When workers are required to be in trenches4 feet (1.2 meters) deep or more, at least two sepa-rate and adequate means of exit, such as ladders orsteps, will be provided and located requiring no morethan 25 feet (7.5 meters) of lateral travel.

(8) Sides of trenches 5 feet (1.5 meters) or morein depth will be shored, sloped, or otherwise ad-equately supported to protect those working withinthem.

(9) Suitable gloves will be worn when using anyequipment or tools to excavate, expose, or handledirect-burial cables.

7–37–37–37–37–3

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

f. Cable pulling protection. Workers will nothandle pull-wires or pulling-lines within reachingdistance of blocks, sheaves, winch drums, and take-up reels. Workers will not remain in a manhole dur-ing pulling operations.

(1) Wire rope will not be used to pull cable in aduct already occupied by conductors.

(2) A nonmetallic duct fishing wire or devicewill be used when fishing ducts containing energizedconductors.

(3) Ducts will always be fished in the directionwhich presents the least hazard. A worker will bestationed at each end when required.

(4) Avoid parking tool carts and reels on in-clined streets. Where this cannot be avoided, equip-ment should be placed at a slight angle to the curbso that the curb serves as a chock. Chock all wheelswith blocks or other suitable items and install a well-fastened upright brace at both the front and rear ofthe vehicle. Where more than one reel is parked atthe same location, lag the reels together. Place andfasten chock blocks and braces so that they cannotbe easily dislodged.

7–3. Existing obstruction protectionWhen obstructions are encountered in digging, theforeman should be notified immediately, so that dam-aging or hazardous contact with energized cables maybe avoided. The following additional rules also ap-ply:

a. Locating buried facilities. Use area utilitymaps to locate existing utilities as accurately as pos-sible.

b. Direct-burial electrical cable work. Extremecare will be used in excavating near or exposing di-rect-burial electric underground cable. Before exca-vating the location of the cable must be determined.If the depth of all direct-burial cable is definitelyknown, power digging equipment may be used forexcavating all but the last 12 inches (300) millime-ters) of cover over the cable. The remaining coverwill be removed by use of shovels with woodenhandles or similar hand-digging tools. Where thedepth of direct-burial cables is not established, powerdigging equipment should not be used, except tobreak and remove the surface pavement.

(1) Probe rods or bars will not be used to locateany underground direct-burial cables.

(2) When uncovering direct-burial cables, ex-

treme care must be observed to avoid damaging thecable insulation.

(3) All exposed cables in a work area will beprotected against damage by boards or other non-conductive materials. When it is necessary to weldadjacent to cables, suitable nonflammable protectivematerial will be utilized.

(4) Under no conditions will workers stand, sit,kneel, or lean on unprotected direct-burial cables.

c. Digging restriction. Mechanical excavatingequipment will be used only in areas where there isno known danger of contacting or damaging buriedutilities. Elsewhere excavation will be done only byhand digging.

d. Handling damage to existing utility lines. Ifany existing utility lines are damaged then certainsteps must be taken dependent upon the type of line.

(1) If electric cables are damaged the facilityshould de-energize the damaged line and take im-mediate steps to repair it.

(2) If health and safety hazard lines such asgas, steam, or hot water are damaged, the hole willbe left open until any utility line flow has been dissi-pated safely. All possible sources will be shut off.Extreme care will be taken to eliminate the possibil-ity of igniting any escaping gas. Any workers or resi-dent of the area will be warned, when necessary, andthe public will be kept out of the area. The local firedepartment and the appropriate maintenance facil-ity will be notified immediately.

(3) Environmentally hazardous lines, such assewer, and oil, will be handled according to the ap-plicable health and safety hazard requirements.Environmental cleanup will be initiated as soon aspossible.

(4) Other lines, such as communication, water,or storm drainage, will be repaired as soon as pos-sible by the appropriate maintenance department.

7–4. Preparation for work in undergroundstructuresUnderground structures consist of manholes,handholes, an vaults. The word manhole applies tothe other structures as appropriate to their size andaccess.

a. Manhole covers. Before entering a manhole,place all warning signs needed for protection of thoseworking in and around the manhole, for drivers of

7–47–47–47–47–4

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Figure 7–1. Steps in removing a manhole cover.

vehicles, and for pedestrians. Before entering themanhole test for oxygen deficiency and dangerousgases. If there is an oxygen deficiency, or if any toxicor combustible gas is entering the manhole, provideadequate ventilation while there are workers in thesestructures. Smoking is not permitted in manholes.

(1) Removing a manhole cover. A manholecover may weigh from 200 to 350 pounds (90 to 160kilograms). Two persons, each with a manhole coverhook, are required to remove a cover. They shouldlift the cover with the leg and arm muscles, and withtheir feet placed so that they will be clear if the covershould be accidentally dropped. Figure 7–1 shows themethods and stops for removing a circular manholecover.

(a) If snow, ice, or other surface conditionscause insecure footing around the manhole cover, ei-ther clear the working area with a shovel or broom, orspread sand or other suitable material around the coverto ensure firm footing. Do not strike the manhole coverwith a steel or iron tool. Use a hardened bronze coldchisel to remove ice from a cover. A bronze cold chiselwill not produce sparks in striking the manhole cover.Do not use an open flame or salt to thaw ice around orover the cover. An open flame may cause an explosionif a combustible gas mixture is present in the manhole.A salt solution seeping into the manhole may contrib-ute to cable corrosion. Make test holes in the ice to lo-cate the edge of the manhole cover. A line or cable loca-tor is useful in finding manhole cover locations whenrecords are inadequate or when marking points arecovered with ice and snow. If the exact location of themanhole is not known, a small channel may be cut fromthe outer edge of the general location tot he center ofthe area where the cover should be. If the manhole coveris icebound, use enough hot water to melt the ice aroundthe edge of the cover.

(b) If the manhole cover does not lift readily,first check to be sure the cover is not secured by alocking device. If a locking device is not holding themanhole cover, loosen the cover by placing a block ofwood on the cover near the rim and striking the woodwith a heavy hammer. Insert a manhole hook intoone of the manhole cover holes. Pry the cover whilethe block of wood is being struck at several differentpoints around the circumference of the cover.

(c) Do not leave a manhole cover in a loca-tion where it will present a hazard. If the cover can-not be left near the manhole opening, skid the coverto a safe location. If necessary, place a warning de-vice near the removed cover.

(d) In a traffic area, the manhole cover is

removed in a direction that will prevent personnelfrom falling into the path of traffic should the man-hole cover hook slip during the cover removal. Theremoval position must permit observation of oncom-ing traffic. When possible, insert manhole cover hoodsin the hook holes on the side away from moving traf-fic. When this is not practical, insert the manholecover hooks in the holes which permit the cover to bemoved in the direction of traffic. Keep the oncomingtraffic under careful observation.

(e) Before removing a manhole cover, markthe cover and the frame with a piece of chalk so themanhole cover may be replaced in its original posi-tion. Improper alignment of the cover within theframe may cause considerable noise when vehiclescross over the covers. When the noise condition doesexist, place a thin layer of oakum (or similar mate-rial) in the cover seat of the frame.

(f) Place the covers of opened manholes onthe side away from traffic, when conditions permit.In case of two section covers, place one section oneach side of the opening.

7–57–57–57–57–5

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(2) Replacing manhole covers. Use the samecare as used for removing them.

(a) Be careful that manhole covers are prop-erly seated when replaced.

(b) The bearing surfaces must be free fromdirt or ice which might prevent them from fittingproperly.

b. Testing before entering structures. The struc-ture must be tested to assure that the atmosphere issafe for workers. Entering a manhole with an oxy-gen deficiency can cause sudden unconsciousness anddeath by hypoxia (blood starvation). Manholes con-taining less than 19.5 percent oxygen are not to beentered without a supplemental oxygen supply.

(1) Hazardous conditions. Toxic or combus-tible gases may be present or there may be a lock ofoxygen in unventilated subsurface structures.

(a) Toxic or combustible gases. Since sub-surface structures are subject to the accumulationof combustible or toxic gases, they must be consid-ered hazardous until proven clear by test. Combus-tible gases found in manholes or vaults are usuallynatural gas or hydrocarbon fuels. Toxic gases usu-ally encountered are hydrocarbon fuels. Toxic gasesusually encountered are hydrogen sulfide, carbondioxide, or mangrove gas.

(b) Lack of oxygen. No one is permitted inunvented vaults or manholes unless forced ventila-tion is provided or the atmosphere is found to be safeby testing for both oxygen deficiency and the pres-ence of explosive gases for fumes. Provisions mustbe made for a continuous supply of air when neces-sary.

(2) Testers. The manhole or unvented vaultwill be tested with an approved tester prior to enter-ing, after the worker first determines that the in-strument is in proper working order and correctlycalibrated. These tests will be made as soon as themanhole cover is removed.

(a) Oxygen deficiency tests can be performedwith a safety lamp or an oxygen deficiency indicator.The safety lamp cannot be used to indicate the pres-ence of carbon dioxide. Operation of the indicator in-strument should be in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions.

(b) For the detection of “toxic gases,” one ofthe simple effective colormeteric detectors (colorchanges to indicate concentration) may be used. Hy-

drogen sulfide can be detected at concentrations aslow as one part in 1,000,000. These detectors can beobtained commercially, and a universal test kit isavailable which will detect concentrations of carbonmonoxide, hydrogen sulfide, and other gases. An ap-proved portable unit should be used to measure theamount of combustible and toxic gases in the man-hole atmosphere.

(3) Elimination of combustible or toxicgases. Never enter a manhole until test results in-dicate that the manhole is free of combustible or toxicgases.

(a) Satisfactory test. If tests made upon re-moving the manhole cover indicate that the atmo-sphere is satisfactory, the manhole or vault may beentered and worked in. Additional tests must be madewhen each crew begins work; the test interval mustnot exceed 8 hours. When the manhole is coveredwith a tent or tarpaulin, the test interval must notexceed 2 hours. Place the tent or tarpaulin so thatan opening is left in the covering for ventilation.

(b) Unsatisfactory test. If more than theallowable trace of gas is found on the initial test,ventilate the manhole or vault with a power blowerfor a minimum of 10 minutes, then make a secondtest with the blower running. If the test is satis-factory, the manhole or vault may be entered. Makethis test away from the direct blast of the blower.If gas is again found on the second test, continueto ventilate the manhole with a power blower un-til the test is satisfactory. Work can then be startedin the manhole, provided adequate power blowerventilation is continued. There must be enoughventilation to hold the quantity of gas in the man-hole to an allowable value until the work has beencompleted and the cover is replaced. While work-ing in a manhole being ventilated with a powerblower because of previous gas detection, test theatmosphere every hour. If the blower stops, leavethe manhole at once and do not re-enter until ven-tilation has been restored and the atmosphere testis satisfactory. Operate the blower outside of amanhole tent or tarpaulin.

(4) Structure condition change retestingrequirements. Pumping out structure water or re-moving duct line plugs can allow gas into the struc-ture.

(a) After a manhole has been pumped, theremovable of the water may permit gas to flow intothe manhole. Make the test just above any openducts. If a test indicates that gas is entering, venti-late the manhole.

7–67–67–67–67–6

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Figure 7–2. Sail method of manhole ventilation

(b) Immediately upon the removal of the ductplugs, make a test just above the opened duct. If gasis entering, ventilate the manhole.

(5) Emergency entrance. If, in an emergency,it becomes necessary fro a worker to enter a man-hole or vault where gas is present, the worker willuse a supplied air respirator or an approved gas maskif adequate oxygen is present and a safety harnesswith an attached life line attended by another workerstationed at the manhole or vault opening.

c. Ventilation of structures. There are threemethods that can be used to ventilate a structure.They are the forced air, sail, and natural methods.

(1) Forced air. The forced air method consistof a power blower, blowing air into the manhole. Theblower hose is placed into the manhole, forcing freshair to circulate and oxygen-deficient air to be forcedout. This is the best method of ventilating a man-hole.

(2) Sail method. The said method (figure 7–2), ventilates the manhole by using the wind. A pieceof plywood or some other material is placed over themanhole. The edge of the plywood facing the wind islifted up until the plywood forms about a 45 degreeangle with the manhole opening. The wind entersthe manhole, forcing possible contaminated air outof the manhole.

(3) Natural method. This method consists oftaking the manhole cover off and letting the inter-nal air escape as much as it can. This method of vent-ing a manhole is the least effective because a gasheavier than air could remain in the bottom of themanhole. Use this method of venting a manhole onlyas an emergency measure.

7–5. Work inside underground structuresWork inside underground structures requires spe-cial attention to general safety rules, familiarity withthe cable and equipment being worked on, and rulesapplying to such underground work.

a. General safety. All work must be done in amanner that observes the following precautions:

(1) Continuous adequate ventilation is re-quired.

(2) While work is being performed in manholesor vaults, a worker must be available on the surfacein the immediate vicinity to render emergency as-sistance if required.

(3) A ladder will always be used when enter-ing or leaving a manhole or vault. Climbing into orout of manholes or vaults by stepping on cables orcable supports is forbidden. Manhole ladders, whennot in use, must be placed as not to be a hazard toworkers, pedestrians, or vehicular traffic. Hard hatsare required when entering or working in manholes.

(4) Tool handling must be done in a mannerthat protects the workers and work area.

(a) Always place tools or materials a safe dis-tance from manhole openings, where they will notcause a stumbling hazard or come in contact withenergized conductors or equipment.

(b) Do not throw tools or materials into orout of manholes. Use canvas buckets or hand linesfor lowering tools or equipment into and removingthem from manholes. Warn workers before loweringtools.

(c) Consider providing a windless handcranksubsurface worker rescue assembly or an approvedretracting lifeline system.

(5) Before starting work, an inspection shouldbe made to determine if there are any dangerous con-ditions such as burnt or cut cables or loose or defec-tive ladders. Use of portable ladders is preferred. Lad-ders in manholes, if provided, may have rusted andbecome unsafe. Before using open flames in manholesor ecavations where combustible gases or liquids may

7–77–77–77–77–7

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

be present, such as near gasoline service stations,the atmosphere must be again retested and foundsafe or cleared of the combustible gases or liquids.When open flames must be used in manholes, extraprecautions must be taken to provide adequate ven-tilation.

(6) Use only flashlights or facility approvedlighting units for illumination in manholes.

(7) Low-voltage (less than 600 volts) equipmentis especially hazardous in or around subsurface struc-tures. Motor frames and equipment cases may beenergized by electrical conductors with frayed ordamaged insulation. The faults may occur only mo-mentarily or may be prolonged through high-resis-tance grounding paths. Contact with energized equip-ment surfaces and the damp and will-grounded floorsand walls often results in electrocution. It is recom-mended that only pneumatic tools and low-voltage(24 volt) lighting systems be used in maintainingsubsurface vaults and facilities.

b. Precautions before commencing work. Theworker must be familiar with the system and thenproceed to any necessary tagging of cable and equip-ment.

(1) Every possible precaution will be exercisedto correctly identify voltage, circuit, and phase ofcable or apparatus to be worked upon.

(b) The external appearance of medium-volt-age and low-voltage cables is often similar. For thisreason, a very careful check should be made of ductlocations and tag numbers before starting work. Anyerrors found in the tagging of cables or in the man-hole records or maps should be immediately reportedto the supervisor. Under no circumstances should anidentification tag be removed or placed on a circuitwithout direct permission from the supervisor.

(2) Refer to paragraph 3–8 for requirements forde-energized work Safe clearance procedures.

(a) Where cables are being de-energized tobe worked on, all instructions pertaining to the clear-ing of circuits, tagging, and grounding must be com-plied with.

(b) Standard practice for cable work is toprovide complete isolation of cable and protectionagainst premature energizing. An absolute check toensure that no potential exists must be made priorto cutting into any cable. Remove the cable (lead orother) sheathing and test for voltage. Use only ap-proved voltage detectors.

(3) Working on cable and equipment shouldnormally be done after de-energizing the cable orapparatus to be worked on, whenever possible, andconsistent with facility mission requirements.

(4) The cable or apparatus will be consideredenergized and worked with adequate protective de-vices until the following steps have been taken:

(a) The item has been tested with an ap-proved device and proven to be de-energized.

(b) The item has been grounded from all pos-sible sources of power (including transformer second-ary backfeeds).

(c) The item has been proved de-energizedat the work location. Grounds may be omitted or re-moved for test purposes with the approval of the su-pervisor in charge after the circuit has been testedand proven to be de-energized. Omission of groundswill only be permitted if their application increasesthe work hazard.

(d) Before working on any section of cable orapparatus to which cable is connected, care must beexercised to ensure the cable has been grounded fora sufficient length of time to drain off any staticcharges.

(5) The procedure for proving cables de-ener-gized at the work location will be as follows—

(a) For positively identified cables normallyenergized at 600 volts or less, phase to phase, re-move the insulation to expose a spot on the conduc-tor for direct metallic contact and test with an ap-proved voltage detector.

(b) Cables normally energized at more than600 volts, phase to phase, or any cable whose volt-age or identity is questionable, will be proved to bede-energized by following the rules given for medium-voltage work de-energized proving.

(6) Medium voltage work can be proved to bede-energized using an approved test device on cableterminals or apparatus which are equipped with ca-pacitive test points or have bare exposed parts. Me-dium-voltage cable terminals and apparatus whichcannot be proved de-energized with an approved testdevices will be proved as follows—

(a) The item will be grounded from all pos-sible sources of power and positively traced from thegrounded point to the work location.

7–87–87–87–87–8

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

(b) Grounding can be done by the cable spikemethod which uses a wire tong or C-clamp deviceattached to a hot stick to provide a proven ground.Do not use a pike pole as a spike for this groundingmethod, as the pike does not have the rating of a hotstick. A temporary ground should be placed on thecable before splicing takes place. This allows the dis-sipation of any capacitance charge and helps to en-sure the cable is de-energized.

c. Requirements for working on cables andapparatus. All workers must maintain the workdistance given in table 3–7 as appropriate to the volt-age level and whether the item being worked on isenergized or de-energized. Be aware of what itemsare de-energized and what items are energized.

(1) De-energized work. All cable and appara-tus must be tagged properly.

(2) Protection. When a worker is in proxim-ity to live parts, rubber blankets or other suitableinsulating barriers must be placed in the correct po-sition to prevent accidental contact.

(3) Working procedures. Avoid hazards byobserving the following procedures:

(a) The secondary voltage of any transformerfed from a de-energized feeder cable should bechecked. The cable must be grounded on each side ofthe work location.

(b) Neural conductors will not be openedwithout the prior installation of suitable bypass con-ductors.

(c) Energized underground cables will bemoved with extreme with extreme care to avoid dam-age to the cable insulation. Moving will be done onlya the discretion of the foreman in charge. Lead-sheathed underground cables will be moved onlywhen approved by the supervisor. Prior to movingenergized electric underground cable, they will beexamined for any defects which might result in fail-ure if the cable is moved. No energized cable may bemoved where such movement requires changingbends. All energized cables will be handled with rub-ber gloves or hot-line tools as appropriate to the volt-age level.

(d) Before separating or connecting a dead-break type separable connector, the circuit must bede-energized and tested dead utilizing the associatedcapacitive test point and an approved test device.Only suitable live line tools will be utilized in sepa-

rating or connecting these separable connectors,unless the circuit is tested de-energized and ground.

(e) Avoid sparks in connecting or disconnect-ing cable, apparatus, or switching devices.

(4) Before operating a primary groundingswitch, the authorized operator must make certainof the following—

(a) Personnel are at the correct location.

(b) The tags on the feeder cable and equip-ment in the vault or manhole bear the same numberas shown on single line drawings.

(c) Network protectors are in the open posi-tion or, in the case of radial transformers, that thesecondary fuses have been removed and transformersecondaries are dead.

d. Cutting of cable. Before making an openingin or removing a part of the sheath or sleeve or acable, the line will be grounded at the first possiblegrounding point on each side of the work location.

(1) Always wear rubber gloves when sawinginto a cable or removing the sheathing. Install ametallic jumper between two sides of the locationwhere a cable sheath is to be removed or cut.

(2) When a medium-voltage cable is to be cut,a short section of the shielding, if any, will be re-moved completely from around the cable. Tests willbe made with two statoscopes or other approved test-ing devices, to determine whether or not the cable isde-energized. If no indication of a live cable is ob-tained, the worker may proceed with the work.

(3) When opening a splice in a medium-volt-age cable, the sleeve over the splice will be cut com-pletely around near the splice and then cut length-wise and removed. No effort will be made to removethe compound. Workers will then test over each sideof the conductor with two statiscopes or other ap-proved testing devices. If no indication of a live cableis obtained, the compound will be removed. If shield-ing tape is then encountered, it will be removed andanother test made over each side of the conductorwith two statiscopes or other approved testing de-vices. If no indication of a live cable is then obtained,the splice will be cut through until the saw touchesone of the conductors. Before sawing further astatiscope test will be made on the blade of the saw.

(4) When cutting or opening splices on low-volt-age cable, the same procedure as outlined above for

7–97–97–97–97–9

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

medium-voltage cables will be followed, except intesting. To determine whether the cable is energizedthe insulation will be cut away to the conductor andtested with an approved tester. On multiple-conduc-tor cables, only one conductor will be cut into at atime and tests made on at least two conductors be-fore proceeding with the work.

7–6. Heating materialsHeating materials and equipment used in splicingcable will be heated in such manner as to preventany hazard to the those working in manholes orvaults and to vehicular or pedestrian traffic.

a. Hazard elimination. Observe the followingprecautions to protect yourself, others, and the work-place:

(1) Gloves will be worn while heating or work-ing with hot insulating compound.

(2) Furnaces and tanks containing liquefiedpetroleum gas, such as butane or propane, will notbe placed in a manhole or vault.

(3) Heating pots for solder, oil, or compound willbe safely positioned so that the contents cannot en-ter the vault or manhole in case of spillage.

(4) Torches or furnaces must be kept at a safedistance from flammable materials.

b. Work rules. The following work rules applyto the use of torches, furnaces, pots, and solderingdevices. Only workers who are familiar with the useof torches and furnaces will be allowed to use them.

(1) Only approved soldering pots, furnaces, andladles in good condition will be used.

(2) Keep lighted furnaces or torches 4 feet (1.2meters) or more from manhole openings whereverpracticable and where they will be the least possiblehazard to property, workers, and the public. If nec-essary to use torches or furnaces in manholes, ad-equate ventilation must be provided to support com-bustion and provide sufficient air for workers.

(3) Solder ladles must be heated before use. Besure that scraps of cold solder are dry before remelt-ing. Moisture and molten metal must never come incontact with one another because this will cause asplash of hot metal. Bars or pigs of solder, tools, and

ladles should be heated over the furnaces before be-ing put into a pot of hot solder. New workers shouldbe cautioned about this hazard.

(4) Furnaces must be lighted carefully andguarded with a three-sided windshield at all timeswhen burning in public places. Never light or burnfurnaces in dangerous locations and never leave themunattended. Lighted or hot torches or furnaces mustnot be transported in trucks or other moving vehicles.

(5) Always take special care not to splash sol-der on any person or equipment.

(a) Soldering pots must not be placed on fur-naces without a pot guard.

(b) Never attempt to do soldering unless afellow worker is stationed on the ground as a guard.If necessary, rope off a safe distance.

(c) Before lowering hot solder or compoundinto a manhole, warn those in the manholes to standclear. Do not lower anything until given instructionsfrom below to do so.

(6) If compound kettles have no breathers,punch holes through the top crust of the compoundto the bottom before heating so that air and mois-ture can escape. Heat the compound slowly.

(7) Place compound kettles on the goods orplates provided and never directly on top of the fur-naces.

(8) Do not allow paraffin to reach a tempera-ture exceeding 390˚ F (198˚C).

c. Procedures for use of bottled liquidfuels. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions forinstalling the torch on and removing it from fuel cyl-inder, lighting the torch and using it, and cleaningthe torch orifice.

(1) Always remove the torch from the fuel cyl-inder after the job is completed and it is no longerneeded.

(2) Observe the following precaution:

(a) Operate only in well-ventilated areas.

(b) Do not store full cylinders near heat orfire, or in living spaces.

7–107–107–107–107–10

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

This page is blankWill not print.

8–18–18–18–18–1

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

PART THREE

INTERIOR SYSTEMS

CHAPTER 8

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

8–1. Interior medium-voltage workAdditional knowledge is required to provide protec-tion from the electrical hazards of specialized elec-trical equipment used in interior medium-voltageelectrical systems.

a. Applicability. The same safety backgroundrequirements covered in chapter 5 for outdoor me-dium-voltage substations will be applied. Consult themanufacturer’s instruction manual and review theapplicable safety directions given in chapter 5 for thetype of apparatus being maintained. Only electricalworkers with training and experience on medium-voltage circuits are qualified for the job. Unless spe-cifically approved, work is not permitted on energizedcircuits. Temporary ground wires should be used todrain off all induced voltages and currents from livecircuits, stored energy devices, and equipment metalguards before starting work.

b. Associated guidance. The worker should befamiliar with the following pertinent facility main-tenance manuals: TM 5-683/NAVFAC MO-116/AFJMAN 32-1083, chapter 12; TM 5-684/NAVFACMO-200/AFJMAN 32-1082, chapter 1, section 2 and3, and chapter 5 section 2; and, TM 5-685/NAVFACMO-912, appendix E.

8–2. Medium voltage safety backgroundReview the applicable directions covered in chapter5 for the type of apparatus being maintained beforestarting work. Additional specific equipment safetyconcerns should be covered by the manufacturer’sinstructions. All such instructions require the use ofqualified electrical workers with training and expe-rience on medium-voltage circuits who are familiarwith the work to be performed. Equipment must bede-energized and grounded and worked on only byqualified facility maintenance personnel if accidentsare to be avoided.

8–3. Motion hazardsRotating electrical equipment such as motors andgenerators need guards to protect workers from ac-cidental contact with live electrical parts, rotating

parts, and such areas where operating conditionsprovide hot machine surfaces. Rotation may loosengrounding connections and hold-down bolts and grayflexible or cord connections. Sparking of brushes canoccur as well as insulation failures causing flame ormolten metal to be ejected from open type motors orgenerators. Consider all these dangers when deal-ing with motors and generators.

8–4. Working on indoor equipmentWorking on indoor equipment involves checking thesafety aspects imposed by applicable codes for build-ing premises.

a. Limitation of space Space is usually at a pre-mium. Clearances provided are usually less gener-ous than for outdoor installations. Changes in NECrequirements may mean that older installations donot meet current clearance and entrance require-ments for electrical rooms. Where installation do notconform to current NEC/OSHA requirements, addi-tional safety instruction must be provided to main-tenance workers. Ensure special attention is givento additional guarding of live parts where currentNEC clearances are not met. Ensure that emergencyexit routes are provided if clear exits do not meetcurrent NEC requirements.

b. Grounding systems. Test that existing perma-nent electrical systems grounds are adequate forpersonnel protective grounding and provide addi-tional temporary grounding to meet requirementsgiven in paragraph 3–11.

c. Interconnection with other electric powersources. Check single line diagrams to assure thatall inputs and interconnections to any electric powersource are locked and tagged open. Verify single linediagram connections with the actual line connectionsof the applicable equipment.

d. Other existing systems. If the room’s ventila-tion system is affected by the work, ensure that ad-equate temporary ventilation is provide. Fire pro-tection and fire alarm systems, as they apply to theequipment and its installation space, may require

8–28–28–28–28–2

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

temporary power and any interference with thesesystems must have the approval of the local firemarshal.

e. Other work area requirements. Noise abate-ment below that required by paragraph 3–3, may berequired so as not to disturb personnel working inspaces adjoining the area where the maintenancework is required. The custodial service should be in-formed when they will be locked out of certain areasand of any additional trash removal for which theirservice will be responsible.

9–19–19–19–19–1

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

CHAPTER 9

LOW-VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

9–1. Interior low-voltage workThere are additional devices for which facility work-ers must have qualified training to safely maintainlow-voltage systems.

a. Applicability. The same safety backgroundrequirements covered in chapters 5 and 8 should beapplied. Only electrical workers who are familiarwith the NEC and have experience on low-voltagecircuits are qualified for the job. Only in an emer-gency, such as loads requiring continuous electricpower, may a worker be allowed to work energizedcircuits; but only with appropriate personnel protec-tive apparel and the presence of another worker orhelper.

b. Associated guidance. The worker should alsobe familiar with the following standards and perti-nent facility maintenance manuals: TM 5-683/NAVFAC MO-116/AFJMAN 32-1083, chapter 12; TM5-685/NAVFAC MO-912, appendix E.

9–2. Low-voltage safety backgroundThe same safety background requirements given inchapter 8 apply. In most cases complex controls orspecial equipment will be maintained by contractpersonnel or specially trained facility workers, oth-erwise, observe the precautions set forth in this chap-ter. As a part of their qualified training in safelymaintaining low-voltage systems, workers will alsobe familiar with the following requirements.

a. Battery rooms. Be familiar with storage bat-tery safety rules given in paragraph 5–13. In addi-tion, ensure that the following conditions are metbefore any work is done:

(1) Check that there is adequate ventilation,forced or natural, to prevent buildup of explosivemixtures.

(2) Check that warning signs are securely at-tached and in legible condition.

(3) Check that eyewash apparatus is in oper-able condition. If none is permanently installed pro-vide temporary eyewash apparatus.

(4) Verify that cell ventilation openings areunobstructed.

b. Fire alarm systems. Maintaining fire alarmsystems with their appropriate safety requirementsrequires special training. Workers must have thefollowing or equivalent training:

Factory trained and certified.

(2) National Institute for Certification in En-gineering Technologies Fire Alarm certified.

(3) International Municipal Signaling Associa-tion Fire Alarm certified.

(4) Certified by State or local authority.

(5) Trained and qualified personnel by an or-ganization listed by a national testing laboratory forthe servicing of fire alarm system.

c. Motors and generators. For maximum safety,each motor and generator should be of the type andsize required for the load and for the conditions un-der which it must operate. See paragraph 8–3.

(1) After work has been performed on circuitsto rotating machines, check direction of rotation.

(2) Always take positive steps to ensure thatrotating equipment being repaired cannot be set intomotion.

(3) A megohmmeter (megger) can be used tocheck insulation of motor and generating windingsusing a current of high voltage and low amperage.Never start a megohm test if there is nay externalvoltage in the test circuit.

d. Solid-state equipment. Variable frequencymotor controllers and uninterruptible power supply(UPS) equipment are complex solid-state deviceswhich should generally be maintained bymanufacturer’s personnel on a contract basis. Facil-ity personnel are not normally trained for such work.Even with initial training, maintenance work is usu-ally done on such an infrequent basis that subse-quently workers cannot be considered fully qualified.Such installations should contain adequate precau-tionary labeling warning workers of the electric shockdangers involved in operating and maintenance ofsuch equipment.

9–29–29–29–29–2

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

9–3. Review of low-voltage work precau-tionsPersonnel should assume that all parts of electriccircuits are energized. Workers must personally in-spect circuits before starting work for assurance thatcircuits are de-energized or that they can be safelyworked on while energized.

a. Repair work rules. Whenever possible, cir-cuits operating at less than 300 volts between con-ductors will be de-energized before repair work isbegun.

(1) No work will be performed on energizedinterior electrical circuits or equipment operating atmore than 300 volts between conductors.

(a) The supply or line side of switches or fusescan be energized when all work to be performed onthe load side of such switches or fuses, provides suf-ficient clearance between energized and de-energizedparts so that work can be done safely.

(b) Before beginning work on de-energizedcircuits or equipment, a reliable voltage detectormust be used. Where considerable work is to be per-formed, it is good practice to short-circuit and groundcircuits or equipment.

(c) Approved testing may be performed on en-ergized interior electric circuits or equipment oper-ating at more than 300 volts between conductors.

(2) When working on or near energized circuits,workers must stand on a dry surface, other than ce-ment or masonry, or wear electrician’s rubber foot-wear.

(3) When using fish tape near energized parts,cover live parts with rubber protective equipment.

(4) When working near running machinery, useextreme care, and provide barricades where neces-sary.

(5) Place all tools clear of machinery beforestarting machinery. Never use a wrench on runningmachinery.

(6) Provide adequate illumination.

(7) Use extreme care when working in crampedplaces to avoid injury to your head, arms, and otherparts of your body.

(8) Wear goggles hen soldering larger joints ortinning lugs on connectors.

(9) Remove tripping hazards.

(10) Do not work on slippery surfaces.

(11) All electrical apparatus requiring frequentattention must be capable of being completely iso-lated electrically.

(12) Provide ventilation, particularly where ob-noxious fumes are present. Take particular precau-tions if explosive or toxic vapors are present or sus-pected.

(13) Never use flame in any form until satisfiedthat explosive vapors are not present.

(14) Use extreme care when using torches toavoid igniting combustible material. Never leavetorches unattended.

b. Installation. Proper selection and installationof electrical equipment will help to prevent accidents.

(1) Each worker should become familiar withthe applicable electrical codes and standards. Theforeman must be notified when equipment does notmeet the requirements of these codes and standards.

(2) All electrical equipment should be installedto provide adequate working space in accordance withthe NEC and local codes. Install equipment so thatthe possibility of accidental contact with energizedconductors is reduced to a minimum.

(a) Tape or cover bare or exposed places onone energized conductor before exposing anotherenergized conductor.

(b) Never leave joints or loose ends of wireuntapped or otherwise unprotected.

(3) Equipment should be installed in the lesscongested areas of a plant, in special rooms, or beprovided with suitable guards or barriers.

(4) Warning signs should be displayed nearexposed current-carrying parts and in hazardousareas such as medium-voltage installations.

c. Switches. An open knife switch is hazardousbecause of the exposure of live parts and because ofthe arc formed when the switch is opened. Suchswitches should be enclosed in grounded metal cabi-nets having the control lever operable from outsidethe cabinet.

(1) A knife switch should be mounted so that

9–39–39–39–39–3

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

the blades are dead when the switch is open, andshould be installed so that gravity will not tend toclose the switch.

(2) Double-throw switches should be mountedhorizontally so that their operation will not be af-fected by gravity. Double-throw switches installedvertically will be provided with a locking device tohold moveable blades in the correct position.

d. Fuses and circuit breakers. Fuses or otherovercurrent devices should be provided according tothe NEC and should be of a size and type that willinterrupt the current flow when it exceeds the ca-pacity of the conductor.

(1) Substitution of copper wires or other con-ductors for fuses will not be permitted.

(2) When it is necessary to remove a cartridgefuse, the operating switch, if provided, should beopened to remove the load. Take fuses entirely out ofholders when removing them from circuits. The fuseshould be pulled only with an insulated fuse puller.On circuits 300 to 600 volts, use both fuse tongs andrubbed gloves.

e. Control equipment. The space behind theswitchboard should not be used for storage andshould be kept clear of rubbish.

(1) Good illumination should be provided forthe front and rear of switchboards.

(2) Switchboard framework and metal parts ofguards should be grounded according to the NEC.

(3) connections, wiring, and equipment ofswitchboards should be arranged in an orderly man-ner. Switches, fuses, and circuit breakers should beplainly marked, labeled, or arranged to afford readyidentification of the circuits or equipment suppliedthrough them.

f. Grounding. Low-voltage electrical accidentsare most frequently caused by a failure to understandthe hazards of low-voltage wiring. By far the mostmisunderstood subject is the “theory of grounding.”

(1) Each worker should carefully study andunderstand the grounding requirements of the NEC.

(2) Use properly grounded portable electrictools, particularly in damp locations or near groundedequipment or piping.

(3) Do not open a ground connection to a waterpipe or ground rod until the ground wire has beendisconnected at the equipment.

9–49–49–49–49–4

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

A–1A–1A–1A–1A–1

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

APPENDIX A

REFERENCES

Government publications and formsDepartments of the Army, Navy, and Air Force

Publications

AR 25-400-2The Modern Army Record-keeping system

(MARKS)

TB 43-0142Safety Inspection and Testing of Lifting De-

vices.

TM 5-683/NAVFAC MO-116/AFJMAN 32-1083Electrical Interior Facilities.

TM 5-684/NAVFAC MO-200/AFJMAN 32-1082Electrical Exterior Facilities

TM 5-685/NAVFAC MO-912Operation, Maintenance, and Repair of Auxil-

iary Generators.

TM 5-811-1/ARM 88-9Electrical Power supply and Distribution

Prescribed Forms

DA Form 5140Caution Tag. (Prescribed in para 3-8c(10).)

DA Form 5168-RSafety Clearance Order (Electrical Facilities)

(Prescribed in para 3–8c(1).)

DA Form 7407-RCaution Order (Electrical Facilities) (Prescribed

in para 3–8c(5).)

DA Form 7408Danger Tag. (Prescribed in para 3–8c(9).)

Other Government Publications

Code of Federal Regulations (CFR): Superintendentof documents, U.S. Government Printing Office, Wash-ington, DC 20402

29 CFR 1910Occupational Safety and Health, General Indus-

try Standards

29 CFR 1926Occupational Safety and Health, Safety and health

Regulations for construction.

30 CFR part IIRespiratory Protective Devices; Tests for Permis-

sibility.

Federal highway Administration (FHWA): 6300Georgetown Pike, McLean, VA 22101.

MUTCDManual on Uniform Traffic control Devices for

Streets and Highways.

Non-Government Publications

American Burn Association (ABA): 525 East 68thStreet, Room 706, New York, NY 10021.

Listing of Certified Burn Centers.

American Electrician’s Handbook by Terrell Croft andWilford J. Summers, McGraw hill, Inc., 1221 Avenueof the Americas, New York, NY 10020-1001.

American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 11West 42nd Street, New York, NY 10036.

ANSI B30.9Slings.

ANSI C2National Electrical Safety Code.

ANSI S3.19

Method for Measurement of Real-Ear Protectionof hearing Protectors and Physical Attenuation of EarMuffs.

ANSI Z88-6Respiratory Protection, Respirator use, Physical

Qualification for Personnel.

ANSI/IEEE 141Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distri-

bution for Industrial Plants.

B–1B–1B–1B–1B–1

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

APPENDIX B

SAMPLE SAFETY EXAMINATION

B–1. Examination development.The appendix provides a listing of items from which

a proficiency examination can be developed to reviewthe workers’ understanding of safety rules.

B–2. General knowledgeThe examinee should demonstrate general knowl-

edge. Test questions developed for a specific testshould include determining the examinee’s familiar-ity with basic safety requirements.

a. List your personal responsibilities fro yoursafety, for your co-workers’ safety, and for the public’ssafety.

b. List your classification, the work you are quali-fied to do, and the safety methods applying to thework you do.

c. List work area hazards applying to the workyou do.

d. List minimum safe approach distances for thework you are qualified to do.

e. List safe grounding practices for electrical de-energized work and safe working practices fro ener-gized electrical work for which you are qualified.

f. List safety-tagout procedure requirements.

g. If you are qualified for energized line work,list the safety requirements for the voltage levels forwhich you are qualified.

h. List your knowledge of the safety precautionsto be taken for general work area control.

B–3. specific knowledge.The examinee should demonstrate specific knowl-

edge. The topics developed for a specific test shouldbe based on those needed to be reviewed to meet cur-rent facility safety problems. Test questions as givenbelow can determine the breadth of the examinee’sspecific safety awareness.

a. Discuss your knowledge of the inspection,maintenance, and testing requirements for lineman’sand cableman’s tools and equipment and the electri-cal testing devices noted in the topics list for thistest.

b. Discuss your knowledge of the safe handlingrequirements for the materials noted in the topicslist for this test.

c. Discuss your knowledge of the basic safety pre-cautions applying to the safety items noted in thetopics list for the test.

d. Discuss your knowledge of the safety rules in-cluding the safety checklist requirements for the ap-paratus noted in the topics list for this test.

e. Discuss your knowledge of the safety rulesapplying to the type of overhead line work noted inthe topics list for this test.

f. discuss your knowledge of the safety rules ap-plying to the type of underground work noted in thetopics list for this test.

g. Discuss your knowledge of the safety rules ap-plying to the type of interior medium-voltage worknoted in the topics list for this test.

h. Discuss your knowledge of the safety rules ap-plying to the type of interior low-voltage work notedin the topics list for this test.

i. Discuss your knowledge of the first aid proceduresto be applied for emergency treatment of the physicalimpairments noted in the topics list for this test.

C.

PIN:005282-000

B–2B–2B–2B–2B–2

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

A–2A–2A–2A–2A–2

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

ANSI S3.19Method for Measurement of Real-Ear Protection

of hearing Protectors and Physical Attenuation of EarMuffs.

ANSI Z87.1Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and

Face protection.

ANSI Z87.1Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and

Face protection.

ANSI Z88.2Respiratory Protection.

ANSI Z89.1Personal Protection, Protective Headwear for In-

dustrial Workers, Requirements.

ANSI Z133.1Tree Care Operations, Pruning, Trimming, Repair-

ing, maintaining, and Removing Trees, and CuttingBrush, Safety Requirements.

ANSI/IEEE 516IEEE Guide for maintenance Methods on Ener-

gized Power Lines.

ANSI/IEEE 524IEEE Guide for Installation of Overhead Trans-

mission Conductors.

ANSI/IEEE 935IEEE Guide on Terminology for Tools and Equip-

ment to be used in Live Line Working.

ANSI/IEEE 957IEEE Guide for Cleaning Insulators.

ANSI/SIA A92.2Vehicle-Mounted Elevated and Rotating Aerial

Devices.

ANSI/UL 711UL Standard for Safety Rating and Fire Testing

Fire Extinguishers.

American Red Cross (ARC): 17th and D streets NW,Washington DC 20006-0000.

First Aid, Responding to Emergencies.

Adult CPR.

American Society for Testing and materials (ASTM):1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187

ASTM A 603Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Struc-

tural Wire rope.

ASTM A 906Standard Specification for Alloy Steel chain sling

for Overhead Lifting.

ASTM D 120Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating

Gloves.

ASTM F 18-SeriesASTM Standard on Electrical Protective Equip-

ment for Workers.

ASTM F 855Standard Specifications for Temporary Grounding

systems to be used on De-energized Electric Power linesand Equipment.

Cordage Institute (CI): 42 North street, Hingham,MA 02043.

CIF-1Fundamentals of Fall Protection,

CIE-4Knot Tying and Rigging.

Electrical Equipment Testing and maintenance byA.S. Gill, Prentice Hall, Route 9W, Englewood Cliffs,NJ 07632-0000.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.(IEEE): 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. box 1331, Piscataway, NJ08855-1331

IEEE 978Guide for in-Service maintenance and Electrical

Testing of Live-

IEEE 1048Guide for Protective Grounding of Power Lines.

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): OneBattlemarch Park, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, MA 02269-9101

NFPA 10Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.

A–3A–3A–3A–3A–3

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Cordage Institute (CI): 42 North Street, Hingham,MA 02043

CIE-1The Splicing Handbook.

Edison Electric Institute (EEI): 1111 19th Street NW,Washington, DC 20036-3691

Use and Care of Pole Climbing Equipment.

Hot Sticks-A Manual on High-voltage Line Mainte-nance. A.B. Chance Company, 210 North Allen Street,Centrailia, MO 65240

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):One Battlemarch Park, P.O. Box 9101, Quincy, MA02269-9101

FPA 70National electrical Code.

NFPA 70EStandard for Electrical Safety Requirements for

Employee workplaces.

NFPA 101Code for Safety from Fire in Buildings and Struc-

tures.

NFPA 780Lightning Protection Code.

The Lineman’s and Cableman’s Handbook by EdwinB. Kurtz and Thomas M. Shoemaker, McGraw-Hill,Inc., 1221 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10020-1001.

A–4A–4A–4A–4A–4

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Index–1Index–1Index–1Index–1Index–1

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

INDEX

Accessibility of work .....................................................................................................................................

At grade work ........................................................................................................................................... 3–4

Confined Spaces ....................................................................................................................................... 3–6

Enclosed spaces ........................................................................................................................................ 3–6

Inside work ............................................................................................................................................... 3–4

Work in elevated positions ....................................................................................................................... 3–6

Underground work ................................................................................................................................... 3–4

Accidents .......................................................................................................................................................

Causes ....................................................................................................................................................... 1–1

Handling ................................................................................................................................................... 2–6

Prevention................................................................................................................................................. 1–1

Reporting .................................................................................................................................................. 2–6

Aerial .............................................................................................................................................................

Cable ......................................................................................................................................................... 6–15

Lifts ........................................................................................................................................................... 6–14

Line work .................................................................................................................................................. 6–1

Rope use .................................................................................................................................................... 6–12

Work .......................................................................................................................................................... 6–11

Apparel, general ...........................................................................................................................................

Clothing .................................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Clothing do’s ............................................................................................................................................. 4–3

Clothing don’ts .......................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Jewelry ...................................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Zippers, metal ........................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Apparel, protective .......................................................................................................................................

Aprons ....................................................................................................................................................... 5–13

Contact lenses........................................................................................................................................... 4–3

3–4,

3–4, 4–11,

4–7, 5–3,

Paragraph

Index-2Index-2Index-2Index-2Index-2

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Dust protection ......................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Eye and face .............................................................................................................................................. 5–13

Foot ........................................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Gas masks ................................................................................................................................................. 4–3

Gloves ........................................................................................................................................................ 7–6

Grinding protection .................................................................................................................................. 4–3

Hearing ..................................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Molten metal protection ........................................................................................................................... 4–3

Respiratory ............................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Skin ........................................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Soot protection .......................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Applicability of rules ....................................................................................................................................

Work covered ............................................................................................................................................ 1–2

Persons covered ........................................................................................................................................ 1–2

Basics ............................................................................................................................................................

Emergency resuscitation needs ............................................................................................................... 11–20

First aid actions ........................................................................................................................................ 11–2

Safety principles ....................................................................................................................................... 3–1

Burning .........................................................................................................................................................

Brush......................................................................................................................................................... 6–16

Insulation .................................................................................................................................................. 3–3

Rubbish ..................................................................................................................................................... 2–7

Cable ..............................................................................................................................................................

Aerial ......................................................................................................................................................... 6–15

Cutting ...................................................................................................................................................... 7–5

Pulling ....................................................................................................................................................... 7–2

Underground ............................................................................................................................................ 7–5

Capacitors ................................................................................................................................................. 6–11

Paragraph

4–3,

3–15, 4–14, 5–13, 6–2, 6–9, 6–11, 7–5,

5–8,

Index–3Index–3Index–3Index–3Index–3

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Carelessness.................................................................................................................................................. 2–2

Care of ...........................................................................................................................................................

Live-line (hot-line) tools ........................................................................................................................... 4–13

Fiber rope .................................................................................................................................................. 4–9

Wire rope ................................................................................................................................................... 4–9

Chain saws .................................................................................................................................................... 6–16

Clippers ......................................................................................................................................................... 6–16

Choke coils .................................................................................................................................................... 5–8

Classification of workers ..............................................................................................................................

Groundman ............................................................................................................................................... 2–9

Laborer ...................................................................................................................................................... 2–9

Lineman .................................................................................................................................................... 2–9

Patrolling .................................................................................................................................................. 2–9

Patrolman ................................................................................................................................................. 2–9

Troubleman ............................................................................................................................................... 2–9

Worker qualifications ............................................................................................................................... 2–9

Clearances (lockout/tagout) ..........................................................................................................................

Lockouts .................................................................................................................................................... 3–10

Red tagouts ............................................................................................................................................... 3–10

Safe clearances ......................................................................................................................................... 3–10

Tagouts ...................................................................................................................................................... 3–10

Yellow tagouts ........................................................................................................................................... 3–10

Climbing ........................................................................................................................................................

Equipment ................................................................................................................................................ 6–5

Poles .......................................................................................................................................................... 6–16

Qualified climber ...................................................................................................................................... 6–1

Space ......................................................................................................................................................... 6–10

Codes ............................................................................................................................................................. 1–1

Paragraph

4–3,

2–2,

6–4, 6–6,

Index-4Index-4Index-4Index-4Index-4

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Common neutral systems ............................................................................................................................. 6–8

Consideration of others ................................................................................................................................ 2–8

Cooperation ................................................................................................................................................... 6–9

Crossing structures ...................................................................................................................................... 6–7

...................................................................................................................................................................

Danger avoidance .........................................................................................................................................

Barriers ..................................................................................................................................................... 5–3

Caution signs ............................................................................................................................................ 7–2

Danger signs ............................................................................................................................................. 7–2

Flagmen .................................................................................................................................................... 7–2

Red flags ................................................................................................................................................... 6–2

Red lights .................................................................................................................................................. 6–2

Signals ...................................................................................................................................................... 6–2

Warning devices........................................................................................................................................ 3–5

Warning signs ........................................................................................................................................... 2–7

Deenergized electrical work .........................................................................................................................

Line work rules ......................................................................................................................................... 3–11

Work areas ................................................................................................................................................ 5–3

Defective equipment ..................................................................................................................................... 5–2

Diagrams and schematics ............................................................................................................................ 5–2

...................................................................................................................................................................

Energized electric work ................................................................................................................................

Adjacent to energized lines ...................................................................................................................... 6–8

Anchoring link sticks ............................................................................................................................... 6–9

Approach distances .................................................................................................................................. 3–9

Circuits...................................................................................................................................................... 3–8

Distractions .............................................................................................................................................. 6–9

Live line bare-hand work ......................................................................................................................... 6–9

Live-line maintenance .............................................................................................................................. 6–9

Paragraph

3–5,

3–5,

3–6,

Index–5Index–5Index–5Index–5Index–5

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Paragraph

Live-line tools ........................................................................................................................................... 4–13

Over, under, or across energized lines ..................................................................................................... 6–8

Permitted work ......................................................................................................................................... 3–15

Potential to ground................................................................................................................................... 3–9

Required checks ........................................................................................................................................ 3–15

Standard requirements ............................................................................................................................ 6–9

Statement of qualifications ...................................................................................................................... 3–15

Untying conductors .................................................................................................................................. 6–9

Voltage levels ............................................................................................................................................ 3–15

Washing of insulations ............................................................................................................................. 6–9

Working distances .................................................................................................................................... 3–9

Electrical maintenance support ................................................................................................................... 4–1

Energy-storing protective devices safety rules ........................................................................................... 5–8

Engineering guidance ................................................................................................................................... 5–2

Equipment, heavy .........................................................................................................................................

Cranes ....................................................................................................................................................... 4–10

Derricks .................................................................................................................................................... 4–10

Winches ..................................................................................................................................................... 4–10

Examinations............................................................................................................................................ C–3

...................................................................................................................................................................

Fallen wires .................................................................................................................................................. 6–8

Feedback precautions ................................................................................................................................... 3–8

First aid .........................................................................................................................................................

Artificial respiration................................................................................................................................. 12–2

Bites and stings ........................................................................................................................................ 11–15

Bleeding .................................................................................................................................................... 11–4

Broken bones ............................................................................................................................................ 11–5

Burns......................................................................................................................................................... 11–11

4–12,

1–1, C–1, C–2,

2–4, 11–21,

Index-6Index-6Index-6Index-6Index-6

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) .................................................................................................... 11–22

Chest injuries ........................................................................................................................................... 11–8

Cold emergencies ...................................................................................................................................... 11–13

Concussion ................................................................................................................................................ 11–6

Dislocations .............................................................................................................................................. 11–9

Electric shock............................................................................................................................................ 11–19

Electric shock accidents ........................................................................................................................... 10–3

Eye injuries ............................................................................................................................................... 11–14

Fractures ................................................................................................................................................... 11–5

Fundamentals ........................................................................................................................................... 10–2

Gas poisoning ........................................................................................................................................... 11–18

Heat emergencies ..................................................................................................................................... 11–12

Miscellaneous precautions ....................................................................................................................... 11–23

Obstructed airways .................................................................................................................................. 11–17

Poisonous plants ....................................................................................................................................... 11–16

Pressure points ......................................................................................................................................... 11–4

Principles .................................................................................................................................................. 10–1

Procedures ................................................................................................................................................ 11–1

Shock ......................................................................................................................................................... 11–3

Snakebite .................................................................................................................................................. 11–15

Spine fractures ......................................................................................................................................... 11–7

Sprains and strains .................................................................................................................................. 11–10

Tourniquets ............................................................................................................................................... 11–4

Wounds...................................................................................................................................................... 11–4

Fire ................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm systems .......................................................................................................................................... 9–3

Extinguishing equipment ........................................................................................................................ 2–7

Near electric lines .................................................................................................................................... 6–8

Paragraph

2–9, 6–16,

2–4,

Index–7Index–7Index–7Index–7Index–7

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Paragraph

Fusing ............................................................................................................................................................

Fusing safety rules ................................................................................................................................... 5–7

Fusing transformers and regulators ....................................................................................................... 6–11

...................................................................................................................................................................

Grounding .....................................................................................................................................................

Electrostatic grounding ............................................................................................................................ 3–13

Equipment grounding .............................................................................................................................. 3–12

General rules ............................................................................................................................................ 3–14

Ground switches ....................................................................................................................................... 3–14

Grounded neutrals ................................................................................................................................... 6–8

Grounding cables ...................................................................................................................................... 3–13

Interior low-voltage equipment ............................................................................................................... 9–3

Lightning protection grounding .............................................................................................................. 3–12

Number of sets of grounding devices....................................................................................................... 3–14

Permanent grounding .............................................................................................................................. 6–8

Personal grounding .................................................................................................................................. 3–13

Protective grounding equipment ............................................................................................................. 3–13

Resistance of grounds............................................................................................................................... 3–13

System grounding .................................................................................................................................... 3–12

Temporary grounding ............................................................................................................................... 3–13

Tools .......................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Vehicle grounding ..................................................................................................................................... 3–13

Gum chewing ............................................................................................................................................ 4–7

...................................................................................................................................................................

Hazard concerns ...........................................................................................................................................

Acids .......................................................................................................................................................... 4–8

Asbestos .................................................................................................................................................... 3–7

Askarel ...................................................................................................................................................... 3–7

3–12,

3–12,

4–3,

Index-8Index-8Index-8Index-8Index-8

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Carbon tetrachloride ................................................................................................................................ 4–7

Caustics ..................................................................................................................................................... 4–8

Creosote .................................................................................................................................................... 6–2

Electrical service hazards ........................................................................................................................ 3–8

Elimination of normal hazards ................................................................................................................ 3–3

Energized machinery ............................................................................................................................... 3–3

Explosive charges ..................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Explosives ................................................................................................................................................. 4–8

Exposed belts and gears ........................................................................................................................... 4–7

Gasoline engines ....................................................................................................................................... 3–3

Hazardous substances .............................................................................................................................. 3–7

Job hazard preparation ............................................................................................................................ 2–5

Phase differences ...................................................................................................................................... 3–8

Polychlorinated bephenyls (PCB) ............................................................................................................ 3–7

Potential differences................................................................................................................................. 3–8

Sulfur hexofluoride (SF6) ......................................................................................................................... 3–7

Wood product preservative treatments ................................................................................................... 3–7

Work around sources of electric and magnetic fields ............................................................................. 3–7

Heating materials .........................................................................................................................................

Compound kettles ..................................................................................................................................... 7–6

Furnaces ................................................................................................................................................... 7–6

Heating pots ............................................................................................................................................. 7–6

Paraffin ..................................................................................................................................................... 7–6

Torches ...................................................................................................................................................... 7–6

Housekeeping ................................................................................................................................................

Good housekeeping ................................................................................................................................... 2–7

Safety checks ............................................................................................................................................ 3–5

Paragraph

4–3,

3–7,

4–7,

4–7,

4–7,

Index–9Index–9Index–9Index–9Index–9

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Paragraph

Illness ............................................................................................................................................................ 2–1

Inching .......................................................................................................................................................... 5–6

Inspection of ..................................................................................................................................................

Apparel, tools, and materials ................................................................................................................... 4–2

Fiber ropes ................................................................................................................................................ 4–9

Live-line (hot-line) tools ........................................................................................................................... 4–13

Rubber protective equipment .................................................................................................................. 4–14

Tools and equipment ................................................................................................................................ 4–2

Wire rope ................................................................................................................................................... 4–9

Insulating oil handling ................................................................................................................................. 4–16

Insulation ......................................................................................................................................................

Insulated and insulating tools ................................................................................................................. 4–12

Insulated buckets ..................................................................................................................................... 6–14

Insulating sticks ....................................................................................................................................... 4–12

Insulators .................................................................................................................................................. 6–8

Interior low-voltage ......................................................................................................................................

Battery rooms ........................................................................................................................................... 9–12

Circuit breakers ........................................................................................................................................ 9–3

Control equipment ................................................................................................................................... 9–3

Fire alarm systems ................................................................................................................................... 9–2

Fish taps ................................................................................................................................................... 9–3

Fuses ......................................................................................................................................................... 9–3

Generators ................................................................................................................................................ 9–2

Guidance ................................................................................................................................................... 9–1

Installations .............................................................................................................................................. 9–3

Motors ....................................................................................................................................................... 9–2

Precautions ............................................................................................................................................... 9–2

Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 9–2

3–15, 4–11,

Index-10Index-10Index-10Index-10Index-10

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Solid-state equipment .............................................................................................................................. 9–2

Switchboards ............................................................................................................................................ 9–3

Interior medium-voltage ..............................................................................................................................

Guidance ................................................................................................................................................... 8–1

Motion hazards ......................................................................................................................................... 8–3

Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 8–4

Intoxicating beverages or drugs................................................................................................................... 2–8

Leather goods ................................................................................................................................................

D-rings ...................................................................................................................................................... 6–6

Leather equipment ................................................................................................................................... 6–5

Safety belts ............................................................................................................................................... 6–6

Lighting .........................................................................................................................................................

Extension lamps ....................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Minimum levels ........................................................................................................................................ 3–6

Temporary lighting ................................................................................................................................... 3–6

Lines, aerial ..................................................................................................................................................

Primary line installations ........................................................................................................................ 6–8

Secondary line installations .................................................................................................................... 6–8

Service connections .................................................................................................................................. 6–11

Limitations on work ..................................................................................................................................... 2–9

Lines, underground ...................................................................................................................................... 7–5

...................................................................................................................................................................

Manuals......................................................................................................................................................... 1–1

Materials handling .......................................................................................................................................

Cleaning operations ................................................................................................................................. 4–8

Compressed gases .................................................................................................................................... 4–8

Equipment handling ................................................................................................................................ 4–8

Flammable liquids .................................................................................................................................... 7–6

Hand and forklift trucks .......................................................................................................................... 4–3

Paragraph

8–4,

8–2,

6–5,

2–3,

4–8,

Index–11Index–11Index–11Index–11Index–11

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Paragraph

Handling chemicals .................................................................................................................................. 4–3

Load binders ............................................................................................................................................. 4–8

Painting .................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Poisons and pesticides .............................................................................................................................. 4–8

Slings ........................................................................................................................................................ 4–8

Soldering ................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Solvents ..................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Storage requiring special handling ......................................................................................................... 4–8

Throwing tools and materials .................................................................................................................. 4–8

Medical treatment ........................................................................................................................................ 10–3

Metalclad switchgear safety rules ............................................................................................................... 5–11

...................................................................................................................................................................

Network protector safety rules .................................................................................................................... 5–12

Night work .................................................................................................................................................... 7–2

Noise control ................................................................................................................................................. 3–6

Neutral systems ............................................................................................................................................ 6–8

...................................................................................................................................................................

Offenses, penalties ........................................................................................................................................ 2–2

Orientation of new workers ......................................................................................................................... 2–3

OSHA requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 4–13

...................................................................................................................................................................

Personal conduct ........................................................................................................................................... 2–8

Phasing circuits ............................................................................................................................................ 5–14

Poisonous plants ........................................................................................................................................... 11–16

Poles ..............................................................................................................................................................

Climbing and working on poles ............................................................................................................... 6–6

Digging pole holes .................................................................................................................................... 6–3

Dismantling poles ..................................................................................................................................... 6–3

Equipment on poles .................................................................................................................................. 6–11

Gin pole setting method ........................................................................................................................... 6–3

2–6, 10–2,

3–15, 6–2,

3–9, 4–11,

3–8,

6–16,

6–4,

Index-12Index-12Index-12Index-12Index-12

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Paragraph

Ground handling ...................................................................................................................................... 6–2

Hauling poles ............................................................................................................................................ 6–2

Installation of guys ................................................................................................................................... 6–8

Installing overhead wires ........................................................................................................................ 6–8

Pike pole setting method.......................................................................................................................... 6–13

Records ...................................................................................................................................................... 6–2

Reels .......................................................................................................................................................... 6–13

Removal of guys ........................................................................................................................................ 6–8

Removal lines ........................................................................................................................................... 6–8

Setting poles ............................................................................................................................................. 6–3

Storage ...................................................................................................................................................... 6–2

Stringing and salvaging wire................................................................................................................... 6–8

Winch line setting method ....................................................................................................................... 6–3

Working on or around pole-mounted equipment .................................................................................... 6–11

Practical jokes ............................................................................................................................................... 2–8

...................................................................................................................................................................

Red X ............................................................................................................................................................. 5–2

Regulators ..................................................................................................................................................... 6–11

Rescue ...........................................................................................................................................................

Manhole .................................................................................................................................................... 12–3

Methods .................................................................................................................................................... 12–1

Pole-top ..................................................................................................................................................... 12–2

Responsibilities .............................................................................................................................................

Crew members .......................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Foremen .................................................................................................................................................... 4–3

Personal protective apparel checking ..................................................................................................... 4–3

Personal tool checking ............................................................................................................................. 6–13

Qualified worker ....................................................................................................................................... 3–10

Supervisors ............................................................................................................................................... 3–10

6–3,

6–8,

5–10,

2–1,

2–1,

4–2, 6–5,

2–1,

Index–13Index–13Index–13Index–13Index–13

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Paragraph

Rope ...............................................................................................................................................................

Conductivity ............................................................................................................................................. 6–12

Fiber rope .................................................................................................................................................. 4–9

Handline precautions ............................................................................................................................... 6–12

Knots and splices ...................................................................................................................................... 6–12

Manila rope ............................................................................................................................................... 4–9

Rope use terms ......................................................................................................................................... 6–12

Safe loads .................................................................................................................................................. 4–9

Snaps for tackle blocks ............................................................................................................................. 6–12

Synthetic fiber rope .................................................................................................................................. 4–9

Tackle blocks ............................................................................................................................................. 6–12

Wire rope ................................................................................................................................................... 4–9

Rubber goods .................................................................................................................................................

Insulator hoods ......................................................................................................................................... 4–14

Line hose ................................................................................................................................................... 4–14

Rubber blankets ....................................................................................................................................... 4–14

Rubber gloves ........................................................................................................................................... 4–14

Rubber protective equipment .................................................................................................................. 5–2

Rubber sleeves .......................................................................................................................................... 4–14

Rules ..............................................................................................................................................................

Applicability ............................................................................................................................................. 1–2

Enforcement ............................................................................................................................................. 2–2

Interpretations ......................................................................................................................................... 2–2

Obedience .................................................................................................................................................. 2–1

Persons covered ........................................................................................................................................ 1–2

Safety checklist ......................................................................................................................................... 5–4

Variances ................................................................................................................................................... 1–3

Violations .................................................................................................................................................. 2–2

3–8,

4–14,

Index-14Index-14Index-14Index-14Index-14

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Safety.............................................................................................................................................................

Area ........................................................................................................................................................... 2–7

Field and shop .......................................................................................................................................... 4–5

Fundamentals ........................................................................................................................................... 3–2

General ..................................................................................................................................................... 1–1

Meetings ................................................................................................................................................... 2–4

Office ......................................................................................................................................................... 4–4

Phasing ..................................................................................................................................................... 5–14

Rules checklist .......................................................................................................................................... 5–4

Support ..................................................................................................................................................... 4–6

Tools .......................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Unsafe acts ............................................................................................................................................... 3–2

Unsafe conditions ..................................................................................................................................... 3–2

Smoking ........................................................................................................................................................ 5–13

Sobriety ......................................................................................................................................................... 2–8

Storage battery safety rules ......................................................................................................................... 5–13

Street lighting ............................................................................................................................................... 6–10

Substations ...................................................................................................................................................

Abnormal conditions ................................................................................................................................ 5–2

Station operators ...................................................................................................................................... 5–3

Work .......................................................................................................................................................... 5–1

Supervision ................................................................................................................................................... 2–1

Support ..........................................................................................................................................................

Boatswain’s chairs .................................................................................................................................... 4–6

Chains ....................................................................................................................................................... 4–9

Decking ..................................................................................................................................................... 4–6

Hoists ........................................................................................................................................................ 4–8

Ladders ..................................................................................................................................................... 4–6

Paragraph

2–8, 4–7,

Index–15Index–15Index–15Index–15Index–15

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Paragraph

Lifting ....................................................................................................................................................... 4–8

Platforms .................................................................................................................................................. 4–6

Rigging ...................................................................................................................................................... 4–9

Rigging hardware ..................................................................................................................................... 4–9

Scaffolds .................................................................................................................................................... 4–6

Slings ........................................................................................................................................................ 4–9

Trestles ...................................................................................................................................................... 4–6

Surge arresters ............................................................................................................................................. 6–11

Switches ........................................................................................................................................................

Bypass ....................................................................................................................................................... 5–10

Double-throw ............................................................................................................................................ 9–3

Knife .......................................................................................................................................................... 9–3

Oil .............................................................................................................................................................. 5–6

Time .......................................................................................................................................................... 6–10

Switching safety rules .................................................................................................................................. 5–6

System familiarity ........................................................................................................................................ 5–2

System operation .......................................................................................................................................... 5–2

...................................................................................................................................................................

Taking chances ............................................................................................................................................. 2–8

Testing devices ..............................................................................................................................................

Combustible gas/oxygen detectors ........................................................................................................... 4–15

Insulation testers ..................................................................................................................................... 4–15

Leakage-current monitors ....................................................................................................................... 4–15

Line fault locators .................................................................................................................................... 4–15

Phasing testers ......................................................................................................................................... 4–15

Voltage detectors ...................................................................................................................................... 4–15

Testing of .......................................................................................................................................................

Structure before entering......................................................................................................................... 7–4

Temporary leads ....................................................................................................................................... 5–5

5–8,

3–8,

Index-16Index-16Index-16Index-16Index-16

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Testing safety rules ....................................................................................................................................... 5–5

Tobacco chewing ............................................................................................................................................ 4–7

Tools, aerial line work ..................................................................................................................................

A-frames.................................................................................................................................................... 6–3

Cant hooks ................................................................................................................................................ 6–13

Gaffs .......................................................................................................................................................... 6–6

Jacks ......................................................................................................................................................... 4–8

Jennies ...................................................................................................................................................... 6–13

Powder-actuated ....................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Safety ........................................................................................................................................................ 4–12

Tools, general ................................................................................................................................................

Axes ........................................................................................................................................................... 6–16

Chisels ....................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Cord connections ...................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Cutting tools ............................................................................................................................................. 4–7

Drill presses .............................................................................................................................................. 4–7

Drills ......................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Extension cords ........................................................................................................................................ 4–7

Grinding wheels ....................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Hand tools ................................................................................................................................................. 4–7

Lathes ....................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Machine guards ........................................................................................................................................ 4–7

Machine tools ............................................................................................................................................ 4–7

Machinery ................................................................................................................................................. 4–7

Measuring ................................................................................................................................................. 4–7

Metal rulers or tapes ................................................................................................................................ 4–7

Miscellaneous ........................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Picks .......................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Paragraph

4–10,

4–12, 6–2, 6–3,

6–5,

4–7, 6–3,

4–7,

Index–17Index–17Index–17Index–17Index–17

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Paragraph

Pneumatic and hydraulic tools ................................................................................................................ 4–7

Portable cord-connected power ................................................................................................................ 4–7

Sledge hammers ....................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Sockets ...................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Welding ..................................................................................................................................................... 4–7

Tools, energized line work ............................................................................................................................

Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................... 4–13

Fiberglass ................................................................................................................................................. 4–13

Handling and storage ............................................................................................................................... 4–13

Hot-line tool types .................................................................................................................................... 4–12

Inspection ................................................................................................................................................. 4–13

Link sticks ................................................................................................................................................ 6–9

Records ...................................................................................................................................................... 4–13

Repairs ...................................................................................................................................................... 4–13

Specialty tools ........................................................................................................................................... 4–12

Wood .......................................................................................................................................................... 4–13

Transformers .................................................................................................................................................

Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 6–11

Current transformers ............................................................................................................................... 5–9

Power ........................................................................................................................................................ 5–10

Testing ....................................................................................................................................................... 6–11

Voltage (potential) transformers ............................................................................................................. 5–9

Tree trimming ...............................................................................................................................................

Equipment ................................................................................................................................................ 6–16

Qualifications ........................................................................................................................................... 6–16

Two-worker requirement .............................................................................................................................. 6–11

...................................................................................................................................................................

Use of .............................................................................................................................................................

Handline ................................................................................................................................................... 6–12

2–1, 3–15, 4–8, 4–14, 6–2, 6–9,

Index-18Index-18Index-18Index-18Index-18

TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682TM 5-682

Live-line tools ........................................................................................................................................... 4–13

Rope, general ............................................................................................................................................ 4–9

Rubber protective equipment .................................................................................................................. 4–14

Wire rope ................................................................................................................................................... 4–9

Underground work .......................................................................................................................................

Backfilling ................................................................................................................................................. 7–2

Ditching machines .................................................................................................................................... 7–2

Excavations ............................................................................................................................................... 7–2

Manholes ................................................................................................................................................... 7–5

Obstructions ............................................................................................................................................. 7–3

Precautions before commencing work ..................................................................................................... 7–5

Preparation for work in underground structures ................................................................................... 7–4

Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 7–1

Ventilation of structures .......................................................................................................................... 7–4

Work inside underground structures ...................................................................................................... 7–5

...................................................................................................................................................................

Waste ............................................................................................................................................................. 4–7

Weather ......................................................................................................................................................... 6–8

Weeds ............................................................................................................................................................ 2–7

Paragraph

7–4,

2–7,

2–4, 3–15, 4–13, 4–14,

T M 5 4 8 2

..-

This proponent agency of this publication is the Chief of Engineers, United States Army. Users areinvited to send comments and suggested improvements on DA form 2028 (Recommended Changesto publications and Blank forms) directly to HQUSACE, (Attn: CECPW-EE), Washington, DC20314-1000.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

Official

ERIC K. SHINSEKIGeneral, United States Army

Chief of Staff

JOEL B. HUDSONAdministrative Assistant to the

Secretary of the Army

Distribution:To be distributed in accordance with Initial Distribution Number (IDN), 341728, requirements for

TM 5-682.

TM 5482

DA 5168-R.

TM 5482

DA 7407-R.